Updated May 2, 2008
These predictions are dated by the date they went sent into Psychic Pathways Prediction Registry. They are stated this way so you can judge if the prediction actually was seen, felt, etc., before the event occurred. You will need to read the actual prediction to find out when the prediction will occur.
Please note that these Predictions HAVE NOT BEEN EDITED. They are printed EXACTLY AS THEY WERE SUBMITTED, MIS-SPELLINGS AND ALL. Since Predictions are channeled through our perceptions, the mis-spellings, the wording of the prediction, and the images reported are GIVEN TO YOU EXACTLY AS GIVEN TO US AT PSYCHIC PATHWAYS. We will never edit our predictions because when editing, as in many religious texts, including the Bible, the original meanings are distorted and lost and we wish for you to make your OWN assessment of their value in your life. They are to be read at your own risk, and we assume no liability. You have chosen to read them. We do reserve the right to remove links to other web sites (that are referenced within predictions), as we have been informed that at least one link contained what could be described as a virus.
Also, we do not have a way to contact anyone that has sent in predictions to us. I delete the e-mail immediately, so I don't know the e-mail address nor the name of the people unless they personally put it in the text of their prediction (so they can be contacted by others). We're a confidential service. Many people don't wish for others to know that they're psychic (for whatever reason).
This Registry is a service to you from Psychic Pathways and was updated on the above date. These are predictions which have been sent to me via E-mail concerning upcoming earth changes, personalities, etc. If many of these show gloom and doom, I can't help that. I'm reporting what was sent to Psychic Pathways as predictions...may more positive predictions, of light, of peace, and of understanding greet us.
This page will be updated as predictions are received. The Predictions are numbered as to the date and the person who sent them. If you look at #163, it has numerous predictions. This is because they were all sent in by one e-mail, same person. This page is copyrighted by Psychic Pathways and may not be reproduced in full or in part except by permission of PPathways@aol.com
If you wish to register your prediction, please e-mail KayNelsen1234@gmail.com
We do not keep records as to who sent what prediction,
but if you wish your e-mail address and/or name printed with the prediction,
we will print it on this page if you ask us so you will have credit for it.
When submitting a prediction, please state whether you wish your e-mail address
and or name released. If this is not stated in the original e-mail, we will assume
that you wish to remain anonymous and will not print your e-mail address or real name.
All e-mail records are destroyed when the prediction is published. We are a
confidential service for others to stay abreast of what might be happening in our
world now or in the near future.
March 9, 2007: DO HAVE PRECOGNITIONS, MOSTLY WHEN I AM DREAMING. THEY ARE SO ACCURATE, INCLUDING COLOR PLACE, ETC. ONLY MY IMMEDIATE FAMILY KNOWS OF THIS BECASUE I ALREADY WAS AFRAID,THEY WHERE TOLD WHEN I WOULD WAKE UP AND THEN WOULD COMPLETELY FORGET ABOUT IT AND WHEN IT HAPPENS, MY FAMILY IS EVEN SCARED OF ME. BUT THEY DO BELIEVE IT BECAUSE THE EVENT WOULD COME TRUE DURING THAT DAY USUALLY 24 HOUEA. I WOULD BE LABELED AS STRANGE OR CRAZY. I HAVE LIVED WITH THIS AT THE AGE OF 10, IT DOES FRIGHTEN ME AND I JUST WOULD LIKE TO KNOW, HOW CAN THIS HAPPEN. IF I TOLD MY FRIENDS THEY WOULD THINK I WAS CRAZY, I WOULD DO THE SAME IT SOME TOLD ME THAY COULD SEE INTO THE FUTURE.
WHAT BOOKS CAN I READ TO TRY TO UNDERSTAND THIS, NOW AT 57 I HAVE LIVED WITH THIS FOR SO MANY YEARS AND I JUST WANT TO FIND OUT HOW CAN A PERSON SEES INTO THE FUTURE. IT DOES SEEM IMPOSSIBLE, UNLESS IT HAPPEN T YOU. I WOULD ALSO SAY SOMEONE IS CRAZY IF THEY TOLD ME THAT THEY CAN SEE INTO THE FUTURE, BUT I KNOW IT IS TRUE BECAUSE I HAVE IT AND JUST WANT TO UNDERSTAND IT BEFORE I AM NO LONGER ON THIS EARTH.
THOUGH I HAVE A PHOTOGENTIC MEMORY, I WONDER DO OTHER PEOPLE DO. ALSO WITH ALGEBRA, GEMONTRY PROBLEMS TO SOLVE IN THEIR HEAD FASTER THEN YOU CAN WRITE IT DOWN. THIS HAPPEN TO ME IN 6 TH GRADE WHEN THE NUN ASKED TO TO PROVED MY ANSWER ON THE BOARD BUT I COULD NOT CAME ALMOST AUTOMATICALLY IN MY MIND,
ANTHING YOU CAN HELP I WOULD APPRECIATE IT. ALSO THE SCIFI CHANNEL CALLED ME FROM CANIDAN TO BE ON THEIR SHOW, THE PRODUCTER CALL SEVERAL TIMES AND I WOULD ME COULD NOT GO ON TV, BECAUSE I WOULD BE LABE;ED AS SOME LYING OR CRAZY I AM SURE YOU HEARD OF THE SAME PROBLEMS WITH MANY PEOPLE.
February 10, 2007: an asteroid will twist our gravidy october 2007
September 19, 2006: Anna Nicole's son, Daniel, died from "smack". I heard this word very loudly. I also heard the word Ephedrine. Kay
,
September 17, 2006: This is concerning a dream i had in 1999. I was driving to locate my family, and pick them up and gather them, I was in a large city which I did not recognize, just a generic city, buildings high in the sky, that sort of thing. I looked up and to the left, and saw a plane coming in towards a building, like it would hit it, it was a small commuter jet, I turned to look at the building, then back at the plane, and it was a cruise missile. I flicked back and forth again and it was a cruise missile with fake windows to make it look like a plane. Then I saw a huge hole where the buildings were, with a line of people waiting to be taken away, they had their bags packed and with them, and waited on a broken stairway for something, presumably, to come and take them away. I observed these people, and they were pale, like they were dead.
Then, the part of the dream that hasn't come true. I looked toward the right, and at a distance, I saw a city on the horizon. I focused on it, and it exploded into a mushroom cloud. in the dream, the distance felt more like an indicator of time, than actual distance. The dream ended.
The next dream I had, concerned myself in a new place that I was not living in at the time but have since moved to, and this dream was in the fall of 2001. I was standing in the yard, watching many people work, planting things in pots, building shelters to live in, basically preparing and getting along nicely. I started to daze a little and then from the woods in the dream, I heard three incredibly horrific screams that sounded inhuman and seemed to come from the woods and the earth itself. Then the trees lept up "seven years" growth. Sand shot up and out of the earth and the ground lept underneath us. Then there was a war in the woodlands. Soldiers with dirty faces screaming at me and each other, small missiles being launched from further back in the woods. I went to leave, and ran into a young man who was eyeing the young women of my clan of people, and I noticed his iris was different. There seemed to be a chip out of it, and his eyes were oddly colored. I sent someone to protect the girls from him as he exuded the feeling of rape. I then traveled to the city of Columbia, SC and saw a disaster area. Buildings leaning, and sand in the streets. hundreds of people rioting and fighting over scraps of plastic and empty cartons. I stood and watched for awhile, I had come to help, but would not venture into the fray for fear of being killed for my clothes. This dream appeared to describe a span of time, and slightly out of order, like dreams within dreams. Nuclear catastrophe having already happened, an earthquake occured, followed by a war, and much personal turmoil.
my next dream, same fall, same year, was of new bombers coming out of the sky, they were triangular, and came in from subspace, unmanned and extravagant bombers, dropping older style munitions from a hatch underneath. The planes ran on some different engine technology that seemed to leave trails of different colored lights. The bombers ran in twos, and took turns coming in to bomb houses with relatively impressive precision. They seemed to be be bombing according to the GPS location of the houses. They would bomb one side of a street and leave the other side untouched. Like it was meant to flush the inhabitants out of the area. Then the dream showed enormous and wonderful light shows in the sky. Strange patterns, symbols that you almost understood and then they would change again. and people standing out in their yards watching and asking each other what it may be.
These are the dreams, the first was obvious and past, planes as missiles, missiles as planes. The second, I feel was a future nuclear explosion in the same city. The next dream, to me, represented a huge earthquake that broke the dam systems North of Columbia, SC, and most likely damaged many other places as well. This then sparked a war over territory, and flushed everyone out of the cities. The bombers are new technology, which always seems to come with new wars. And that is all I have. I do not know what the lights in the sky represent, but I have since heard rumors of such proposed operations that are hard to believe if i had not dreamt of them first.
my e-mail is available, Clintonlion@peoplepc.com. I have had these dreams all of my life, never any mechanical time specifics, and all that I have not had direct control over changing, have come true. Listen. People over things. Be honest. Love. clint
http://www.cnn.com/2001/US/11/02/inv.bridge.threat/index.html
Any questions? I was John the Baptist in a past life who Jesus said in Matthew A prophet? 'Yes, I tell you, and more than a prophet.' but don't tell anyone as it could easily get me killed. Remember when they asked me 'are you Elija' (Elias). They were the same guys from Jursalem who later ended up killing Jesus and wanted to kill Elijah. They asked me in the present tense 'are you Elias' not 'were you Elijah' and since I was John and not wanting to get killed I said no and did not explain reincarnation. (So if you do tell anyone that I am John the Baptist I'll deny it since my name is Ted.) johnpineal@inoutbox.com
September 14, 2006: I forgot to separate my prediction from my previous ones. Here is a prediction for your registry. My two predictions that I published on your web site on October 6, 2001 proved out when about 15 days later the Taliban negotiated..with the U.S. to hand over Osama Bin Laden and a month later the California governor announced that the Golden Gate bridge could be a terrorist target. It still is the next one (in the US).
This is my new prediction: A comet will be discovered soon which will approach quite close to earth on it's outward bound trip. This will be much to the delight of astronomers and to the fear of doomsday prophets as well as many others. It's large and has a very long orbit of thousands of years. It's quite a fascinating comet which has been depicted on cave walls and elsewhere. TBA johnpineal@inoutbox.com
September 14, 2006: That little giant of an earthquake ,the 2.7 nearest Pinnacles, California is so laden with symbolism its beyond astonishing. It vibrated at its outter limits from San Jose to King City to Green fields to Soledad to Pinnacles. Two sevens are 77. Lets take it from the beginning. San Jose translates to St. Joseph,earthly Dad of son Jesus. This was the first man to father the Father. This is a task we must all take on,fathering Gods light to create love and peace while in human bodily form on our short Earthly stay in transition to our next stop on this cosmic journey to bliss. King City. Of course this name implies Jesus(Gods wisdom in man),the most famous human ever, our earthly King. Our crowning achievment of life is not biting the apple by learning love that provides us light that illuminates wisdom which guides us to the next stop in this cosmic adventure. King City, surrounded by green fields and ruled by Soledad is the pinnacle of earthly and cosmic existence. "Please" the sign reads,"While in King City, admire the flowers but do not pick them". "There are people arriving tomorrow who ALSO deserve this wonderful sight" Green fields. Without them we perish. This implies our daily bread,Gods physical sustenance on which we survive,His love and wisdom. Our minds either reflect fields of cultivated,sustaining life, a green field, or fields that lay barren and dry, reflecting waste. Grey areas do not exist. A loving thought cannot contain even a smidgeon of ignorance anymore than an ignorant thought can carry love. This is an ironclad rule and cannot be broken. It is the ultimate law of the Universe. Soledad. The "Way". The only Way. We must Solely father light and love while climbing the mountain of wisdom to reach its peak, its pinnacle. Pinnacles. All of these are examples of the Pinnacles of our understanding. All represent the Ultimate in wisdom. All harmonic flow leads to the tributary of ultimate and pure reason which begets the pinnacle of human spiritual wherewithall. This succession of names that shook around this little 2.7, starting with St. Joe and ending with the Pinnacles is as wonderful a sign as God could give. It is so deep in meaning and so profound that, at this moment, were He to never throw us another sign, I could retire in wonder and satisfaction on this alone. Just the names in symbolic succession is enough to fill you with wonder. Yes,I know I am reporting with wonder here, but on the other hand, on His left side, as we all know, nature is certainly not thru with Her helping hand to help God make His point that He exists. The poem,"Reach" has another half to it that I decided not to include. And after this wonderfully symbolic quake, as in ying/yang or contrast or duality, we shook with named quakes equally symbolic with a sinister tone. I am trying to wax on the loving side of things here and I hope to continue doing that. This period of calm will not last, but at least we had it and God showed us His loving self and gave us this time to reflect on ourselves and our actions. Certainly some percentage of the population has taken note of the world since 12/26/04 and reversed course and are now in the ecclesiastic pursuit of goodness. At the least, I know I am. (I always did like being the first at a red light,or the first on a bus. It happens if you show up early and have patience) Be a trendsetter for God. Be the first in your area to hop on the bus and spread His word. Its not an obsession, its duty. Most busses in King City on the way past green fields to Soledad still have plenty of empty seats. Matter of fact, most days,me and Joe the driver are the only ones on THIS bus! Ever purer rays of light and love to ya,Mike
September 10, 2006: Wow! Gulf of Mexico earthquake felt in Southeast US - Yahoo! News
http://news.yahoo.com/s/nm/20060910/us_nm/quake_gulf_dc
September 10, 2006: I emailed a list of this seasons hurricanes earlier this summer. It is proven incorrect and while the season has a long way to go it cannot be taken seriously any longer. But, while this year certainly isnt like last year in terms of "seeing" things that later came to pass it is remarkable for this 719 phenomena. You cannot forget this......... on 6.6.06 we had that quake in Guatemala. I then took the 4 cardinal numbers that corresponded to u,t,m and l, or,the highest letters in the name. If you start in the alphabet with the letter A=1 and B=2 then L=12,U=21,T=20,M=13. This added up to 66 on June 6,06. I was then "told" to match these numbers with latitude or longtitude and when I did this I came upon the Solomon Islands. I was then told about equating God with the number 719 and wrote this to everyone on June 9th,2006. God said to think of Him as 719, a random number but in that order....7...1...9. To access Him you must get that number in that order. Any other combination is not God. Ok? He told me since Oct to be on the lookout for a tsunami that would hit somewhere in the vicinity of Australia.(caused by a meteor) He said it would cover Australia and some countries and give no doubt it was created by God alone so as to force man into believing He exists. He then told me to be aware of Christmas Island because of its holy name.(days before the 7/17tsunami I wrote of the possibility of a noteworthy quake may be coming to Christmas Island and I have the email to prove it)
September 7, 2006: I've told only my husband and close family friends this. But I hadn't paid much attention to the case before but a lot of time I get impressions sometimes with some things and then nothing with something else. They mostly happen with living people and I sense a problem or great happiness and I recieve image picture type clues to what it is. With Jonbenet Ramsey I recently saw a picture in the newspaper about John Karr confessing. Imediately I knew he didn't do it. I began to see pictures of anger and rage.. Out of control rage around Jonbenet at the time of her death. I sensed fear and anger feelings from Jonbenet. Tears and bitterness. I sense her mother grabbing her hair and pulling it and yelling. (I don't think this was the actual murder but a regular occurrance) I sense vomit being signifigant and the dna on her underwear was already there before they were put on her. That's it... I've tried to look at pictures of jonbenet and tune in more to see if I see anymore and I just keep seeing fear and rage uncontrolable rage. Same pictures. I'm convinced from what I felt that it was a family member and Jonbenet is not at rest. I got the distinct feeling on restlessness and sadness too.. That could be my own feelings seeping in there though. Oh well Just wanted to share with someone other than my family and friends.
September 7, 2006: While this may not seem like anything to you, to me it is HUGE. Today, at 719 in some parts of the world,919 Virgin Island time we had a 2.7 quake. Today is the 7th. 2.7=2 times 7 or 77. The name of the nearest place was Christ iansted, St. Croix,Virgin Islands! This is translated to ,Sted, or home of Christ. The Saintly Cross and of course His Mother, the Virgin Mary. And the largest quake thus far was in the Mariana Islands or Mary and her mother Anne. The symbolism couldnt be greater and my stomach is killing me so I am somewhat certain much more is to follow before the light of the 7th fades into the 8th of September. Wow! Since 7/17 and on the 27th of July to August 7th with the exception of the 17th and then again on the 27th of August and now the 7th of Septemeber we have a 719 quake in a place with a VERY symbolically holy name ....Christmas Island twice, Santa Cruz or Holy Cross, Espirito Santo or Holy Saint and now this...........the Cross, Christ and the Virgin............superamazing! Stay tuned as God shows you His ultimate reality. 719pm East coast USA time may herald much more. Light and love, Mike
September 7, 2006: Reindeer herders and village people spread over hundreds of miles of tundra are reporting an extraordinary phenomenon. People with no way of collaborating with each other, are reporting seeing the same vision in the sky. The Russian news media has even begun reporting it via their local television outlets. Most of the nomads living in Russia's far north have little or no biblical knowledge and are therefore unaware of the prophetic significance of what they are seeing. The vision they are seeing is: A MAN IN THE SKY HOLDING A SICKLE IN HIS HAND AND SAYING, " I WILL COME SOON".
August 26, 2006: Ok, we just had our first 719! It hit in California but,but...........but, the 27th started 10 hours ago in Fiji. To be true and honest about this you must grant God all the hours of the 27th we have in the world. And guess what,I am not sure but I think it was 719 at Christmas Island when this little quake hit!!
August 21, 2006: IT HAS BEEN RARE THAT I HAVE BEEN WRONG IN THE LAST YEAR AND A HALF with any of my predictions.
August 18, 2006: This will be short and simple. With the heat being over 100 degrees plus this summer, The San Andreas Fault shall open or crack from Oklahoma thru to Waco, Texas. The Interstate Highway 35 in the City of Dallas, Texas will crash entirely from this type of quake. There are to be many good reasons to investigate this prediction. Make the right source search and survey the highways. Thank You Etta N. Smith PO Box 12124
August 15, 2006: Erica will win Big Brother. I'm psychic and I asked. Seems unbeliveable, but the "other side" told me that she is destined to win. Kay
August 12, 2006: I am writing in about two dreams I had in the early morning hours of Thursday, August 10th and Friday, August 11th. In the first one that occurred, all I really remember about the dream is that I was being told something important, three words that I kept repeating over and over again in my dream. I had no paper or pen to write them down, and for some reason it was important that I not forget them. I woke up repeating them outloud. Piedmont, Solar, Sinclair.
Anyway, this building was on fire and there were people inside. The fire was horrible and I was watching it from a distance as it burned. At first I thought it was a NASA building, but the more I looked at it, the less I saw it as a NASA building, perhaps a tall building in a big city, like New York is what it appeared like to me.
There were several places nearby that were locked up and closed. There was debris falling as the building burnt and pieces fell to the ground. I don't understand why there was debris, or why sections of the building were falling since the first thing I remember seeing in the beginning of my dream was the building on fire. It was at the end of a long street I was looking down. The debris and sections of the building were falling as people drove and walked by. The people were trying to escape it and keep it from falling on them as they passed.
One place right by were I was standing and observing this entire scene unfold had some kind of slurpee or slushee machines inside. The place was locked up and closed but I saw kids had broken inside of it and were using the machines to get free drinks since no owners or police were there to stop them.
My attention then again focused on the building on fire at the end of the street and for some reason I knew the woman I was standing beside (have no idea where she came from) was distraught and had a very sad look on her face because I knew (without us ever speaking.....which is weird) that her husband was in that building, he worked there. She was wondering if he was alive or in the building.
As I moved down the street and closer to the building, the debris was falling and I actually felt the heat of the fire and I didn't know how to escape since now the entire scene all around me seemed like it was in turmoil. The heat from the fire and falling debris is what woke me up from my dream, quite abruptly in fact. I still felt hot when I woke up and that was a very weird feeling.
I drew a sketch of the building and my view of it as it burned. I don't have a clue where the building is actually located or what kind of building it was. I think it was a building where people worked, since that woman's husband was in there, and also that may have been a NASA, or other type of government building. Or, maybe not. I don't know. I know a lot of people were in there and it was horrible to see. -Stephanie
August 3, 2006: I have had many repeat dreams of a very large wave. A wave so large it seems to engulf the tops of the highest skyscrapers. I am not sure what city this takes place in, perhaps San Francisco . The interesting thing is that these dreams seem to have declined over the past few years. After the large Tsunami in December ’04 I have not had the repeat dream again. I felt certain this was not the huge wave of my repeat dream. If my dreams were a psychic prediction then I fear we may have an even greater Tsunami that will destroy our western coast. In the dream I was standing on a sea wall or freeway along side the ocean. I live in Las Vegas , and I don’t have any plans of traveling northwest anytime soon. I’ll write in again if I plan a trip.
My attention then focused on an explosion I witnessed as it happened. It happened to some kind of building. An important building.......and I for the life of me can't remember what it was now, but in my dream I knew. A monument, government building, courthouse, something along those lines I am sure of. I know it was bad. Awful.
I was not at home at the time the destruction occurred and I panicked worrying about the safety of my family and them being confused and scared over the events. I knew we had to escape to another place. Somewhere safe.
The skies had been littered with all kinds of aircraft earlier and now I saw crowds of people walking and all seemed silent..... Thousands of people. No cars, no vehicles, just people of all ages and sizes walking the roads.
This was awful, eerie, and most disturbing. I wish I could remember all of the other details of this dream, I kept repeating to myself in the dream, I need to remember this, but when I awoke, I could only recall half of the details.
It started out that I was observing a wedding ceremony of some sort. The ceremony was spoken in a Foreign language that I am not familiar with, but the person speaking was very fluent, and it appeared to me to be his native tongue. The minister speaking also appeared to be to be foreign. The man and woman being married, also seemed foreign. They both wore flowers, similar to tropical leis. The ceremony took place near the ocean because way off in the distance I could see the ocean line extended into the distance.
I looked again closer, as if to focus or adjust my eyes to what I was observing, and I saw a huge wave approaching in the distance. The wave was massive in height, and it was headed straight for us. I began to feel uneasy and panicked. I worried about locating life jackets for my girls, hoping that some how that would help after the wave engulfed us.....giving them some chance to surface. I then looked to my left and saw a long path leading to a cottage and started running.....only to realize that I did not have my life jackets with me and I knew that there was no time. I looked again and the wave was still approaching. It was at this time that I woke up.
I have no idea what happened or why I dreamed it, but I keep having these repeated dreams involving a huge wave, and this was different that the usual ones........I had to share.
Nostradamus: Quatrain 2.62
Mabus (Abu Musab al-Zaraqawi ?) will soon die, then will come
Of people and beasts a horrible destruction:
Then all too suddenly the vengeance is revealed,
A hundred, hand, thirst, hunger, when the comet shall run.
This dire prediction warns that the death of Mabus, when it occurs, will ignite a major holocaust somewhere in the world, quite possibly in the Middle East and, perhaps, far beyond the region. As the above quatrain illustrates, a horrific retaliation will follow in the wake of his death, starting an escalating cycle of reprisals, possibly nuclear. Indeed, "hundred" and "hand" may refer to 100 nuclear-armed missiles, possibly Chinese or North Korean ICBMs. They may also be linked to Al Qaeda and the missing 100 nuclear suitcases reported by the late Russian General Alexander Lebed in October 1997.
Meanwhile the US inches closer to a possible war, not only with Iran, but with North Korea and its giant ally China.
Add to the mix up to 43 Al Qaeda moles living in the United States, up to 20 of them brain-washed university students, each one carrying an atomic, Hiroshima-type warhead in a suitcase.
Mabus must die first before the great slaughter can take place and he must die when a spectacular comet is visible in the night skies.
A strict observation of Quatrain 2.62 has us watching the sky at the time Mabus dies. The translation is literally, "when the comet shall course (or run)." Therefore, Mabus does not die sometime after a comet has passed -- he dies while the comet is still being observed in the sky by many millions of people.
Nor will the comet be a southern hemisphere object: Nostradamus was a European and his perspective is European. The comet will therefore be seen in the northern hemisphere. Who is Mabus? Mabus= Abu Musab al-Zaraqawi ? Abu Musab al-Zaraqawi
May 2, 2006: I believe there will be an air disaster about May 10th, involving possible fog, or precipitation, and a mountainous/ hilly terrain. Stargazer Of Arizona
April 24, 2006: Idreamed about being on a bus, and backing up. Then we went across a bridge, and I saw a deep gorge, with a river. I felt the bridge shake, and I knew we may die, and I prepared for it. Then, I saw a steep hill with railroad tracks being pushed rapidly down the hill from the right side. I saw men and women doing things that were bad, for the evil branch of government. They seemed like Military, or experimenters. I was separated from the bus, and I was sealed up in my chair pod, and all went black. I awoke, because I told God that I was afraid. He gave me waking consciousness.
I also believe that there will be an aircraft collision April 30 or so. I base this on Astrological patterns. Signed Stargazer of Arizona
April 6, 2006: I found myself sitting at a pick-nick table inside a small one room shack and to my left and to my right were 2 other people and across the table was a Fierce Demon in the form of a man but with incredible attributes. In the middle of the table was a cistern but with no Well obviously. We were all being tempted wealth with incredible detail. I was given a depiction of a white stone Mansion. I was to be given all the prosperity but had to follow the devil which left me in a panic state. I realized that my spirit had intensity levels much greater than what my human body could perform. Not only was the impulses to give in to the riches extremely tempting but, I found my self reflecting on my belief in GOD. The guys on my left and my right were both excited and agreeing to the temptations and I ended up saying in the manner of " no guys this is not the way", and I looked at the Cistern in the middle of the table and it turned and the Demon said loudly, " Don't do that". The fear generated from that was more intense than anything I've ever experienced. My Panicking left me completely demoralized and just from my glancing at the Cistern again the Demon shouted even louder "Don't do that". He than reached over the table and swatted me with the back part of his wrist on my left cheek. I said immediately after " I believe in God" and then loud thundering with immeasurable glory radiated throughout my spirit and the room. About 1.5 meters to the left of the table a Door appeared as the color of Gold and it got bright to the point that it disappeared and when I looked nobody was in the room anymore. I walked out the door to find myself on a beautiful beach and an ocean ( or a huge calm lake). There was an angel waiting for me on the beach and when I walked over and started to talk to him down the beach I woke up.
April 7, 2006: I found myself sitting at a pick-nick table inside a small one room shack and to my left and to my right were 2 other people and across the table was a Fierce Demon in the form of a man but with incredible attributes. In the middle of the table was a cistern but with no Well obviously. We were all being tempted wealth with incredible detail. I was given a depiction of a white stone Mansion. I was to be given all the prosperity but had to follow the devil which left me in a panic state. I realized that my spirit had intensity levels much greater than what my human body could perform. Not only was the impulses to give in to the riches extremely tempting but, I found my self reflecting on my belief in GOD. The guys on my left and my right were both excited and agreeing to the temptations and I ended up saying in the manner of " no guys this is not the way", and I looked at the Cistern in the middle of the table and it turned and the Demon said loudly, " Don't do that". The fear generated from that was more intense than anything I've ever experienced. My Panicking left me completely demoralized and just from my glancing at the Cistern again the Demon shouted even louder "Don't do that". He than reached over the table and swatted me with the back part of his wrist on my left cheek. I said immediately after " I believe in God" and then loud thundering with immeasurable glory radiated throughout my spirit and the room. About 1.5 meters to the left of the table a Door appeared as the color of Gold and it got bright to the point that it disappeared and when I looked nobody was in the room anymore. I walked out the door to find myself on a beautiful beach and an ocean ( or a huge calm lake). There was an angel waiting for me on the beach and when I walked over and started to talk to him down the beach I woke up.
April 3, 2006: Nostrodamous predicted the third anti-Christ would be raised by his uncle, the only notoriety in our currant world conflict, famous for being raised by his uncle, although long dead, who still has a very great influence on our currant world events, was the founder of Islam, none other than the prophet "Mohammad".
We seem to over look many things that our prophets and dreamers tell us, dreams often don’t make a lot of sense and may need the likes of the biblical Daniel who could translate dreams, many years can pass before fulfillment, Tens, Hundreds and even Thousands of years, can pass between a prophetic dream and its coming to fruition, Strangely enough they who have these dreams or visions feel compelled to record or announce them, even when they are laughed at and mocked they are compelled to repeat to the rest of us what they have been shown, even at their own expense, I cant remember when my dreams began to play out in the real world, but for me when I am witness in my waking hours of what I have recently dreamt of and mentioned to family or friends, I cannot deny from myself nor they who I may have said something to when the event happens, So I know for a fact some people do dream of future events, It seems to run in my family my Mother, Sisters, and Children all seem to have some ability, but again its in how we use what we are given as to what we can achieve, As much as some would have us believe the Bible is for the goody two shoes type, an impossible book to understand, full of Hell-fire and brimstone for the wicked such as, us. But it is really about dreams and prophets, it itself in the form of a riddle, Three mainstream religions stem from the old testament, all three have the same basic recordings of the same events, Such as all believe that the Ark was real, That Moses led his people out of Egypt, and that David wrote Psalms, In Psalm 22 David made it clear to all that the Christ would die in this exact manor Matt 27;46 I have no Idea at the moment exactly how long between David, and Matthew, but right on the money. still the facts are division and war exist and its got nothing to do with God wanting anyone dead, he gives you your breath and takes it away any time he wants, Men kill Men with the hope of, a promised theft of a nations inheritance, apart from self defense there are few reasons to go to war.
Someone sent me what I first thought was part of a virus, as I was just about to delete it, I seemed to get some sort of sense out of it, What does anyone else think? this is part of the email I was sent and I was shocked to get out of it what I did, I have no idea where or who it came from, it just happened to make me write what I saw as an interpretation of the message,
¬22ÄM)"vb"vqeEß’sv÷5BkŠÖí ÖfO_Í~M3o²-±e'•E7]éMI̧8~’:X}Ú.~L«Knº¾�s%'K"m•iBª…Š›Fͧl‰O-ÔVÖYcyoV�>‹G«O:FC‹Ë¼>ëUL�$%X�:ÜY�2—ICe‘"ª/0RF›mO:UÎaqPúšp.{‰)0e)w�WDéB?©W1k†.›e÷VÉÄain :ó•²3£KiëkhP<jqcO†‹u£z®G lain \t¤~u¹ÓDérs�’*ÁŠÂ†®³÷Ë)laX³Ššy¥,`ä�xTdh„" wý_•xm¾tÔ„ëA¶‚St ŽKF½V}6VtUMXB/�ó%¥\óK|î1»•YrPÎ:%%²%ýr¥tp.�l8M_7Ô�ƒbz„]U’%uÝWé�&>|ºßf‡~kqm\pard fs24 üyjgd ëFýLpW
Message, 10 PM, A Voyager of Space, one I am 3
you and me are alike each other oh kymosabi the one god
has sent me to you. You and I are equals. plus wow the eternal creator, united.
united in comradery, together can overcome death, How ever the Holy one The Almighty one the one whose name un-pronounceable says, I see everything that you do, and yet although by 6am soon to come Woe to Mankind Thunder, the Heavens Awake. One last time I Call you to me.
Are my words not pleasing to your ears? open your eye’s For ever have no doubt who I AM. Be warned turn back from the path you are on.
Worthy reward comes to those who will listen, and for those who will not, bind them in chains and leave it to me. If you remain as you are, on the day I reveal my self, be awakened to the parable, and great Riddle and mystery to be revealed, Turn from your wicked path, now before I return Harm not the hair on one more head, they are mine to deal with, and for no other shall you ever again, Harm again, lest I strike you my self, for those who will not listen to this let it forever more be on thy own head, If One hair on the head of my servant is harmed. Need I say more?
In an instant I arrive. And it will be no riddle. Plain as the nose I put on your face. You better listen with those ears I, put in your head, beware not one hair.
C At this point I had to stop I have no Idea who sent it to me, but somehow I got the above from it,,, what IS this a Virus?
C There is more to the email but I haven’t dared read any more of it I will read the rest of it when I can, even I wonder about my grasp on reality after that one...
March 29, 2006: I dreamed of a great wall of water, enormous. I honestly cannot place where this was but believe in my soul it was California I had this dream a few days ago and know that it will occur very soon within 2 weeks. It was disasterous and had an overwhelming feeling of complete doom. please prepare. kim k
March 27, 2006: had several "nde's" and because of the blessingi was given I can both behold the future, and teach others, also. I was visiting the west coast in 2003, and one satueday morning, in berkley, while sitting in my car, about 8:00 am, I had a "black and white vision", and a voice told me to "get out of the city tomorrow" (and I did), then I was shown in color, where "san francisco" once was-it was gone, even both bridges. all I saw that was left was polluted debrie and water. a few monts later, I had a "black and white" dream/vision showing san francisco, with four large "earth quakes" on both sides, and in the middle, and below where "silicon valley" and "san padro" is now. I later inquired of the lord, Heavenly Father", as to the radius of it, and was "impressed" the quake would radiate about "125" miles. it will reach old town sacremento, which I visited, as a poor homeless person, but I soon found out that it was against the law for a homeless person to ask for help, so I left the town without giving sacromento an "angel's blessing", except for one guy at the salvation army. I gave him the gift to "heal" injured people he day after the "big one". I've notified "fema", the san francisco examiner, the los angelas times, the seattle times, just in case the quakes dissafect the whole west coast that first week in june, 2006. I also notified the white house. I really do not believe that it can't be changed. but if the "gay"/"lesbian" population "truelly repents" of sinning against God and mankind, the lord might at least bless the more "more righteous", to live another day. but with last years 200,000 gay ralley, it's not likely. by the way, both in new york and san francisco, duringthe "gay ralleys", many gays were given a "heppitis b" shot; but unbenounced to the gays, an additional ingrediant was added to the shot-the newly "genetically enginered ""aids/hiv" virus was added to hose shots. awful!
January 31, 2006: Ipredict that the the world will get back to the "real" meaning of the word spirituality and not keep following some hell and damnation religious belief that threatens to take our very souls to the depths of hell (figuritively speaking) from us by taking away our right to freedom of choice.
January 29, 2006: To Whom It May Concern: I had a premonition in a dream that there would be a tsusami or earthquake in some foreign country that would kill a lot of people. An earthquake did occur in India but I don't know if anyone was injured or killed or not.
January 3, 2006: Gday all
I don’t remember having a dream last night, but when I woke this morning I saw on the morning news the miners where still trapped, I thought that was strange, must be slow reporting I definitely remember reading online last night that the miners had been found alive, and I thought , I had seen a photo of a large pipe to extract the gas, I think it was red at the entry to the shaft, it was a large pipe with a fan ( I guessed) to draw the gas, like a vacuum hose, and I was so sure they where all found alive, I was about to email the show, but thought I would check my sources and to my surprise no, they have still not been found, I guess I could have dreamt it, I must have, I cant really imagine how they could still be alive though, it would be a miracle. It would be nice if they did get a miracle,
All the best stevebn
As long as I don’t get spam its ok
December 28, 2005: A mega tsunami originating in the south sandwich islands on 13th April 2006
surface of skin(overseas) possible chemical agent used on people. Assassination or attempt on George Bush's life. 2009 economic collapse of the US. The end of 2008 around October, Mt. Vesuvius will erupt. Adverse climate changes. First part of 2009 an earthquake 11.0 or greater will hit the western coast destroying most of the western US. 2010 increase unusual sightings, they will come to us and make their presence known.
December 10, 2005: I'm seeing a possible earthquake in Las Vegas area...between 4.8 and 5.2...No serious damage,but enough to make folks stand up and take notice..newsworthy..broken glass mostly
November 28, 2005:
Nov. 7, 2005~~One day Millions of People will go missing, they will vanish into thin air, when this happens do not beleive what anyone tells you as to the explaination, beleive this; If you take the 'Mark of the Beast', which will more than likely be a computer chip (similiar to tracking devices for dogs) you will not make it into Heaven. My advice? Find a Holy Bible and it will tell you what to do. Read Revelations. Better yet, read one now and save yourself the heartache of the tribulation years when God's Light is no longer here on earth, only darkness. Acts 2:38~~~~Sheri
November 3, 2005: Had a vivid dream last night, the had been a nuclear blast in a large town, near an Australian city, .like Wollongong or Newcastle, near Sydney. I woke up saying out loud, "Oh, no life is going to be really hard now." Trish.
I'll share a few downers on this message board, not to bring anyone down, but just in case it helps someone avoid something. So many times I wanted some type of forum to be able to warn people, without holding myself up to ridicule from the fearful or sceptical (can you spell c-o-w-a-r-d?). Too many times I was right, but luckily not all. Many plane crashes, the Tokyo gas attack (although I didn't understand what I was seeing), earthquakes, floods, etc. Unfortunately, I tend to be in tune with predicting plane crashes a lot, especially military ones, which probably doesn't help my fear of flying much--lol. OK. This is long, but I won't post again. Here goes:
1) a shiny white military or passenger jet with red writing on the tail deliberately crashed into the residential section of a military base called Griffith AFB (I don't know if there is such a place), in the Northeast USA. It happened on an evening when there was a big blockbuster movie premiere (it felt like a Friday night); and the military theatres on the base were emptied by military police and a curfew put into effect. The crash was caused by three of the crew who had been working together clandestinely. They were in an elite (research?) section of the air force and kept their association with each other well-hidden until their plan could come to fruition. They had worked very hard to do well in their studies and to be the best in their classes over the years in order to secure a coveted spot on some elite military (research?) team. They were extremely well trained, highly intelligent, and "talked the talk", "walked the walk" very well. No one would ever suspect them- totally above suspicion. I did recall their names when this first came through, but I've since forgotten them, although I probably wrote it down somewhere. There were two men, one very tall, and a woman. All in their 30's, maybe the tall one a bit older than the other two, though. They were living on this base in a small open barracks or apartment, but in separate apartment units. The men were black. They did not appear to be of Arab descent- and yet, they seemed to be connected to Al Qaida. The woman was white. She was connected as well. The tall man was of a medium light brown complexion, and lanky; yet he was not Osama Bin Laden, nor did he look like him (nor did he look like anyone I know). He lived on the second floor of the small, three-story, open walk-up military apartment building to which the three of them were assigned. The woman and other man lived above and below him; and they all acted as though they didn't know each other well, and not at all before they "met" in military officer's school. They were officers. And they were directly reponsible for the carnage. This dream took place sometime in 2003 or 2004, I think, although I'd have to go digging for notes to say for sure. This dream also had a premonitory texture. I know I had it before the devastating theater hostage situation in the Soviet Union occurred.
2) a large white truck with no markings except USA or some such written on the side, near the back, drove into a parking lot of a huge shopping mall (it looked like a giant strip mall) late at night and there were only a few cars driving around the lot. The driver was preparing for detonation, trying to gauge the placement for maximum damage. He was inside the parking lot, but parallel and alongside the main road that edged the strip mall. This took place not long after 9/11 so it's difficult to discern what is a natural and creative fear reaction, and what is premonition due to urgency and an intensified energy field (global).
A little over a year before 9/11, I found myself looking at cars on the side of the highway and thinking that some time soon, someone would use them to wreak havoc on our country, by exploding them.
When I was a teenager, I had a dream about a friend and myself being blown up, but the dream didn't make sense to me, because the man placing the bomb also blew himself up (it didn't hurt, by the way; and we actually laughed during the experience). I had not known anything about suicide bombers at that time.
3) from a channeling and remote viewing experience- I started channeling in arabic and it felt perfectly natural to me to write from right to left (I don't write, read or understand arabic however, so it was probably gibberish, no matter what the old arab man intended)- I have never channeled in arabic before. I could not discern his intent except that it was an urgent warning of some kind from the old man, who had been a cleric or imam or spiritual leader of some note, it felt; and it involved Bin Laden. I tried to discreetly find someone who might know a little arabic who was on my wavelength enough to understand the channeling concept and not think that I had totally taken leave of my senses; but that didn't happen. As a result of that, and some other things, I felt urgently compelled to do a remote viewing- that's the closest term I can give it (I don't think what I did works exactly the same way as it is usually described by others in the books, etc.). I felt like a fly oon the wall and I saw Osama Bin Laden, dressed not in robes, etc., but in western wear- a crisp snowy white shirt and beige-alabaster slacks. He did have on a small turban. He was surrounded by others (subordinates) in the same style dress and they were deep, deep, deep underground. They were surrounded by heavy duty computers and electronic equipment. It was reminiscent of the glimpses you get of NORAD in Cheyenne mountain. The scary part was that they were planning to bomb Saudi Arabia with a nuclear weapon and blame it on the U.S. They wanted to start a war of huge magnitude between the west and the middle east. And at the same time, I guess, get rid of some of the Saudi royals; or at least make them look powerless. They were hugely efficient. Very military in their carriage, no wasted motion, and very intense, yet extremely familiar with each other. Bin Laden was clearly in charge. Like a commander or a general, but not loud or boisterous, more confident and deliberate and focused, but with a deadly intent. It was fairly quiet, but it sounded like they were speaking in arabic. There was a tension and a sense of urgency. There was no sign of religiosity. It felt like the religion he showed to the public eye, was simply an act for the masses they were trying to influence-- a pr campaign. They were acting like purely secular power brokers on a mission, although with a sense of spiritual righteousness--not religious, but spiritual. I got an aerial view of the facility. It was in the mountains of Quetta, Pakistan, near southern Afghanistan. I saw a map and I saw the topography in 3D. The landmarks were stunningly clear. A mountain ridge to the left, horizonally, and almost at a right angle to another shorter ridge. Desert mountain. Hard rock. Very little, if any, vegetation, and very tall. There were lots of other mountains like them all around. The state of the art facility was in the intersecting corner and it felt as if this place was prepared for them in advance with the help and support of the Pakistani government, and helped kept hidden by the same.
4) I had a premonitory dream that my child and I were in the NY garment/fashion district, in a small closet-like room for a model fitting. We looked out of the window and all of a sudden, the entire row of skyscrapers on the street one or two blocks distant, simply collapsed deep into the ground. This was the summer before 9/11, but it didn't feel like a terrorist event. It felt more like liquifaction of the soil or the earth, from a water main break, maybe, but not an earthquake. It was sudden and it was silent. There were no warning noises. It just happened.
5) the last for now: numerous recurrent water dreams, especially overflow dreams over the last 13 years or so (several times a month), in almost every form-- floods, both freshwater and saltwater, and brackish water, near the ocean, and also inland, not all of them significant, but some with houses and infrastructure almost completely wiped out, and with central authority totally gone, anarchy and disorder (resulting in the powerful abusing the vulnerable); or the dream where on a sunny tropical day (in Hawaii) a tsunami wiped out a neighborhood (town?) and lots of tourists on a field trip with it (this neighborhood is very large, is somewhat inland, and is in a shallow "half" valley (the other half is flat, flat, flat); it has a road nearby that goes alongside and around a low slopey hill); and then even water dreams involving the murder of a woman, dumped in deep saltwater in the Southern hemisphere (off of a small tropical island in the Pacific Ocean, killed by a boat worker or tour operator of some kind).
The odd thing is I love water and don't fear it. Most of these dreams have the texture of earth change and took place years before the tsunami in Asia and the Hurricanes of 2005.
I believe we are in the time of a merging or contraction of reality sets, that the dimensions are becoming compressed, maybe as a result of a natural cycle like respiration. Maybe we are in a time where many of us have already learned the bulk of what we needed to learn in these particular reality constructs and there aren't as many incarnations necessary anymore. Maybe there are less of us choosing to incarnate during this sequence and more of us are choosing to abandon our bodies, or didn't plan to stay too long in the first place. Probably only the really hardy (or truly foolish- lol) are still incarnating into these particular reality states, especially to Earth; and maybe that's why it appears to our shuttered perceptions that we are in a state of multiple catastrophes, when what we really have are mass exoduses. Yet even catastrophes and mass destruction and ex-carnations probably have spiritual purpose- either to help other souls finish up their homework or to brush up a bit ourselves. And for the "dummies" (like me) who still can't get their lessons--who knows?
October 28th 2005 : I'm glad Ive found this site. I was searching for information on Nostradamus and his predictions of 2012, namely the tidal waves. Ever since I can remember, I believe I was about 8 or 9, I have had reoccuring dreams about huge tidal waves. They are so real that I can still remember most, if not all of them that I have ever had. They have been in different places of the world and I have spent the dream warning people and running from them before becoming immersed in the wave trying to scramble up a hill. The first real Tsunami I ever saw was long enough after I'd had significant dreams about them. It was in China and the wave went right through the town from the beach. I remember telling my Dad who was watching the tv with me that I'd had dreams about them, but I was young so he probably put it down to me overreacting or something, which is normal for kids to do. My dream prior to the Asian Tsunami (as you might be wondering) was that 3 large clouds, in the shape of donuts gathered over the sea where I live in Weymouth, it is the clearest dream Ive had of my real life surroundings. I knew the clouds were signifying a tidal wave so I ran up the hill to my house screaming to everyone to get to the top of the hill. It came and it was awful. I feel like a bit of a fruit loop for saying this but I'd looked at tall buildings in the States and been wondering when it was that someone would fly a plane into them. If I get a vision when Im awake its not intense enough for me to recognise immediately, it's more like a random passing thought that generally doesnt mean anything until the event happens and then I can link the 2 things together. If I get them in the form of dreams they are a lot stronger. I've never spoken to anyone other than my close friends and family about the tidal wave dreams. Im writing this as I have been encouraged by other peoples entries on the site to post mine. I dont think I have a high psychic streak, but I do beleive that I am receptive to recieving messages as Im extremely open minded and have strong morals. I do believe above all else that the current events throughout the world caused are caused by climate changes caused by global warming, and I think we are entering into a new cycle where we will see more of these types of events. I'm not happy to accept it, but it's what my instinct is telling me to think. I've spent the morning prior to this researching how to join Rapid UK.
October 23, 2005:
October 20, 1995: HI,
October 5, 2005: Northern California, will, make all channels with breaking news of a huge quake. The immediate knowledge of this will cause mass "surprise, and dread, anxiety. It will start a new surge of people, and media/scientists changing from denial, to (I get the words): "factual truth knowing".
People will start to have ideologies & expectations of the reality we are now arriving to....: true-current/future state of earth.
This I feel will be part of history by end January 2006, and will only be the tip of "an" ice burg!!
Tim
September 22, 2005: My mind wants me to write India/Sunda region but my gut is saying no....Tokyo. ' to my right but stright up'...when I check my map..thats Tokyo.
August 9, 2005. There will be a terrible flood in Vietnam . Also, there will be a hostage drama in Turkey
June 15, 2005: This prediction is from my sister, Lampyer. She saw these events about two and a half weeks ago. What I am writing is a summary of what she said.'
At first it started out as saying that soon, within a few years, there would be a major event that would cause a global war. She said that it would be a war between Good and Evil, but could not go into much more detail than that. A while later, she got more detail. And very detailed it was......
In the year 2010, an asteriod will hit the planet. It will strike off the coast of california. It will be of such magnitude, that the resulting tidal waves will wipe out the entire west coast. It will also cause massive global climate changes. A major sign to watch for will be massive numbers of sea mammals beached. This will also signal the start of the war.
The war will be a spiritual war. She went on to explain that there is one God, with many, many faces and names. "The Source" made things that way because he/she knew that everyone would percieve God in a different way. There needs to be a balance: Good and Evil, Male and Female. She firmly stated that this war will not be about "religion". She said that all religions are aiming for the same things, and all religions have something important to say. But all religions have corruption, and this is why the war will come. She also said the dead will walk the earth. It will only be for a few days, however, because people will get smart quickly as to how to defeat them. The dead will not be who they were in life, and they will appear as they are now.....rotting. The bodies will be possessed by demons. IN the end, it will not matter what church you go to, or by what name you call God. It will be about what kind of person you are. How good are you to your fellow man? How connected are you to the earth and the things around you? How connected are you to the spirituality we should all possess?
The asteroid and the resulting war are a necessary thing for our world. We have lost all connection with the things The Source provided for us. She said that The Source has love for all people and all religions, but the earth must be cleansed of the evil that has taken over. It will be necessary to live off the land and endure the suffering that will inevitably happen so that the children that survive can escort the planet into it's next phase.
Governments will become reginal due to the break down of National sociaty and infrustructure. your toilet wont flush and your power wont work and people will draw together into communal groups. as this is happening, steller(spiritual) frequancy emitions will bombard the earth and conciouness of all living things and we will start operating as fully activated beings. All man made pollutants will cease from the discontinuing of our current economic structure mindset.........(consumer,financial greed,exploitation of natural sources) The catastophys in the future will culminate with the Earth as a living eminating conciosness of spirit simply choosing,......in perfict hamony on all levels of greater law....to re-establish its natural balance as a living biosphere.
Spiritual emitions from above(spirit) will pulse energy into matter at sub-atomic level as well as his workers at this end in the form of angels and extrateresterestrials applying their great deeds of assistance to earth and her people under instuction from the god head. After the cleansing, those still around will be formaly contacted, only after our inner cries for help.
Yet let it be known they will not interfere with our soveraign right of choice to decide our new destany, though they will guide us in the right direction to create a future in harmony with our living biosphere and we will slowly establish technology that is pro-acitve to the earth and space regions, in accordance with our Creaters image. We on earth will end our chronological period of being under "spirtual qurantine"as all aspects of the inherant lucifer ego mindset will be eradicated.
known physics and science, metaphyiscal, archeological, anthrapological and indiginous cultures still living in tune with nature........as well as my gut feelings, intuition and thought through projected...... opinion.
If any of you are sleepless or experiancing a racing heart or disoriantation during sleep time you can blame solor storms . You are reacting to what the earth is doing at "geomatric grid levels". We call this....Geopathic stress. Eg, some people are earth/cosmos sensitive.Solor and or cosmic freaquancy emissions (vibrations) are hitting the Earths Magnetic fiels and filtering/altering conditions at the gemetric grid points, pulsing out energy that effects us in one form or another. Some people experiance headaches or other symptoms prier to earthquakes for example. Animals and native nomadic people are very aware of the earth and what it is telling them.
05/14/05 Between 2007 & end of 2010 the emplimentation of micro-chip IDs by presidential orders will be in effect for every U.S. Citizen to insure (possitive) ID all in the name of; "National Security". Those citizens who refuse the implant will not be able to sell or buy groceries or any
other common item. They will be forced into a life of (theft) for the sake of "survival" and when they are arrested- they become wards of the
State which then forces them to (receive) the micro-chip implant thru "court order" and are then put to sleep in order to receive the implant.
In order to buy or "sell"anything- your micro-ID Chip must match the info you have on your Gov ID card which is checked from a (hand-held) scanner... The same microchips are already in use as implants for Fire-Fighters & special Op soldiers for possitive source ID in case the firefighter or spec-op cannot be identified anyother way...
By; Lonnie W. Craig, Editor/Publisher of; Craigs UnderGround Press. Listed in Tripod/Lycos
February 16, 2005: There may be another major power outage affecting millions soon
February 15, 2005: Nostradamus and his predictions for our future is horrifying. To understand his quatrains,let us look at the clues which he has left behind.I believe the horrifying events which Nostradamus predicted will happen soon.Starting with civil war and a economic collapse which will happen in 2005. Soon after the civil war his prediction of Mabus could happen.Nostradamus claims there will be a huge comet which will strike
the earth after the death of Mabus.This will happen in 2006 and billions of people will die because a gigantic tidal wave which will cause the waters which was above Atlantis to move and cause some parts of the United States to be underwater and other parts of the
world to be underwater,leaving Atlantis on dry land.
February 11, 2005: I dreamed about a reservoir. The water spilled over the top. It could have been a dam, but people seemed to visit because they liked to climb up to see it. The people were dressed in spring clothing. Stargazer
February 7, 2005: I predict that a serial killer will be caught in Massachusetts, Cape Cod Area, this spring/summer. His name (last/first) is something like Jayne. This is a local man and it will rock the community. My other predictions include... Michael Jackson found guilty, tries to commit suicide. Joan Rivers has a stroke or heart attack, Iran and N. Korea will become a major problem over the whole uranium enrichment thing. They are both lying to the US.
January 31, 2005: I dreamed about a man kidnapping some children. I saw a building with an opened patio door, and a lot of glass. I saw a Child Star (from long ago) who looked Like Judy Garland dressed as a hobo. Then I passed a lot of red cars near a night club, and some oriental people. Not sure what it all means. Stargazer...
January 30, 2005: I had a premonition / vision that a cure for most forms of cancer and immuno-suppressive disease will be found in 2005. It will be developed in Korea; it is derived from tuberculosis.
January 25, 2005: Not really a prediction, but I spoke with Johnny Carsen last night. He is doing fine on the other side, but still recooperating. He said he feels as if he has been "beaten up". When I told him that he had survived death, he said "By Golly". His answers were very short, and he wanted to be alone to recooperate. KN
January 21, 2005: I feel there will be an air disaster involving a mountain, and also I see a plane crashing into a man made object on the ground. Today is the 21 st of January 2005, and I feel the next few days will produce two air crashes.....STARGAZER
January 2, 2005: has a Prophesy to declare, on this day of 27 december 2012 at 1400hrs GMT. the galaxy will transcend into the fourth dimension and space will become instant and time will become irrelevant
November 1, 2004: John Kerry will win the Presidency by Two Electoral Votes. KN
October 31st 2004 My visions are difficult to decipher. I saw a train large rectangle windows, then an Indian or Pakistani young man in his early twenties straight black hair white dress shirt looking up into the sky, then everything went black and a gold pocket watch appeared with some kind of engraving on it. Then the watch front opened and I saw a military helicopter landing on a very dusty area and dark mountains where far in the background then the watch closed back up. This is not finished yet. Usually my visions come in pairs several days apart. I hope that time is not up. Unlike 9-11, a watch meaning time is being put before me. I will e-mail you if something else happens. Kathleen Chamberlain
October 28, 2004: Earthquake to hit California soon. I saw the previous prediction and I do see it coming within that time frame but I see it as coming much sooner than that. I would say relatively soon 30-90 days. SAH
August 23, 2004: I am in a large structure with small windows. Drawing my attention to the outside is the bottom of an airplane going crashing on its left wing. I learn that the flight took off from Ft. Lauderdale, Florida. I see many students who have just returned from a Hawaii trip. You may publish both my name and e-mail address:
Daniel Lee DosMaridosSC@aol.com
August 18, 2004: I have sensed that a mixture of events - severe weather, terrorist attacks, meterorites, etc. will be happening all at once, within a few days of each other or no longer than a couple of weeks apart. I have sensed this will take place at any day commencing today up through the end of September. The dates are not specific, but the sense of these things happening are very strong and very specific.....
July 26, 2004: I believe that Quantum physics needs to be used to understand crop circles..Spirituality and Science are both involved as in all aspects of life
July 26, 2004: have been receiving premonitions regarding John Kerry's demise. I believe something will happen to him this week in Boston, probably in his hotel suite. In addition, I see several car bombings doing severe damage at the Democratic convention. The delegates at some point will vote for a nominee and Hillary Clinton will be picked over John Edwards. She will choose Wesley Clark as her running mate, and they will win in November. Falcon
July 23, 2004: Last night I dreamt I was with a small group of people who were entering a building that had a door which was guarded from the inside and only certain people were allowed in. The group I was with were standing together, and walking in together, but I saw no faces. I seemed to be close behind them but they may not have been aware I was there. One of them had a badge, like an id card on his clothing, which he showed to a person in the group and was laughing quietly about it. I looked at the badge and did not understand what it was all about. It seemed to be like brown leather and had strange markings on it. In my dream I thought it was Celtic. The writing on it was thin and looked like scratches. I did not hear any one speak. They seemed to be wearing long clothes of a dark colour. I moved into the 'house?' and passed through a room onto a balcony. It was not high up. There were low mountains(or distant mountains) and many houses light-coloured spread out in front of me and I saw, to the far left, a large passenger plane taking off. The roar of the engines was loud. I watched it gradually gain height, then there was a little sputter, then no engines, and the aircraft began to fall from the sky, silently, eerily, tilting and turning to its right,. Then I was in a different place, and was standing directly underneath the plane as it came down , a nose dive, silently, shining metal in slow motion. I knew it would fall on me and that I would not survive, and many people would die, but I could not move, I was almost accepting of the situation. Then I woke up and was not affected by fear . I felt curiously detached as though I had just been watching this event from different places.
July 9, 2004: US President 2004: Democrat, New Jersey Governor 2005 : Republican
June 3, 2004: A large earthquake in Northern California will soon take place be careful be prepaired and tell a friend. starting on June 3,2004 Bay Area Quake over 5.0
June 3, 2004: lOOK TO THE m1 cRAB nEBULA Is iT ThE AwAiTeD Loved Jesus Christ apon a airship returning or could it be the AnTiChRiSt ArIvInG?
May 28, 2004: The quake could also be a terrorist attack or something really, really big. It's going to ripple through the news like fire burning dry paper. A real "big bang". A lot of shakeup will take place. <KHELBEN 28MAY2004>
May 28, 2004: The quake becomes stronger more and more. I don't know where or when but it is coming. My first guess would be Antar\rctica but it could take place anywhere Richter scale 9 or higher.
May 13, 2004: I do not support Bush or Kerry, but I had a dream concerning the future of this country. If Bush is reelected the war in Iraq will linger on and many more people will die. The draft might even be reinstated. Bush will not end the war because of his pride, underneath it all he is a mean and selfish person. I also saw the down fall of America. I don't think that their is going to be a stock market crash, but things are going to get very hard financially for all Americans. There was also an invasion on American soil. I don't now if this is a terrorist attack or an actual invasion, but people are going to die. In my dream I was told that these things will happen if Bush is reelected. Lets hope that it was just a dream. May 13, 2004 Linda
May 12, 2004: I dreamed that there are still 3 hostages held by the same "captors" as the beheading people. They are NOT arabs, but actually held by americans and Israeli people . I am NO fan of the Arabs and generally support our boys and Israel, but this is what I dreamed. One of them is a basketball fan who I was "comforting" by a play by play retelling of a basketball game (I hate basketball & telivised sports - boring)... he also told me he was cold (we "imagined" a warm basketball jacket with fur for him).
I wish I would have known about the register prior to the last days events as I have been dreaming about these hostages for a while (they say their captors speak perfect english) and one of the hostages does NOT speak english. Their terror is disturbing. Has anyone else had this dream? They tell me I am not the only one to "visit" in their dreams. I know no one in the middle east - so it is bizarre I dream this...
May 8, 2004: Well not being given the "Gift of Prophecy" I think I might have found some interesting rhymes from Nostradamus: The first Saddam his life in power CVIIIQ 70. He will enter, wicked, unpleasant, infamous, tyrannizing over Mesopotamia 9. All friends made by the adulterous lady, the face horrible and black of aspect. A monster horrible, and black his face. Monstre [Gr.teras/teratos?]; physiognomie 9 Mesopotamia = Iraq or Avignon or Lyon Lines 1 &2 Saddam returns from exile and begins his Stalinist purge
Line 3rd line here is Nostradamus using his humour to depict the Republic of France as a play upon the Whore of Babylon, France being Iraq's largest trading country.Republic of France as the adulterous lady France being Iraq's biggest trading nation and the allusion to the "deals" made. The fourth line is Saddam's end at power and his wretched looks, and just possibly how the land will look as a legacy to this. LXX. Il entrera vilain, mechant, infame Tyrannisant la Mesopotamie 7, Tous amis fait d'adulterine d'ame, Tertre 8 horrible, noir de phisonomie.
7 Mesopotamie = between two rivers (Iraq) 8 Tertre = mound/ face/ land physiognomie? Now everyone's favourite demon Usama his part in the scheme of things: C5Q55. In the country of Arabia Felix 1, There will be born one powerful in the law of Mahomet: To vex Spain, to conquer Grenada, And more by sea against the Ligurian 2 people. 1 Arabia Felix = part of Arabia now divided between Yemen and the Aden Protectorate. 2 Ligurian = the Genoese or Italians by extension. LV. De la Felice Arabie contrade 1, N'aitra puissant de loi Mahometique: Vexer l'Espagne, conquester 2 la Grenade, Et plus par mer à la gent Lygustique 3.
1 contrade = Provencal contrada, country. 2 conquester OF: conquester, to conquer, win. 3 Ligustique = Latin Ligusticus, Ligurian. the law of Mahomet = organisation of new name for Al Qaeda [the Base] now "The Law" If this Quatrain is about Usama and his part in the scheme of things well he is NOT going to face court justice until he invades Spain. 34. And a new incursion will be made by the maritime shores, wishing to deliver the Sierra Moreña [mountains of Grenada] from the first Mahometan recapture. Their assaults will not all be in vain, and the place which was once the abode of Abraham will be assaulted by persons who hold the Jovialists in veneration. And this city of "Achem" [ Mecca] will be surrounded and assailed on all sides by a most powerful force of warriors. Their maritime forces will be weakened by the Westerners, and great desolation will fall upon this realm. Its greatest cities will be depopulated and those who enter will fall under the vengeance of the wrath of God. So could the great Satyr be Usama, they seem headed in the same direction? C3Q90. The great Satyr and Tiger of Hyrcania 1, Gift presented to those of the Ocean: A fleet's chief will set out from Carmania 2, One who will take land at the Tyrren Phocaean 3.
1 Hyrcania = The south eastern shore of the Caspian Sea, part of Persia (Iran)
2 presented to = Or possibly by (in which case, see C3Q78)
3 Carmania = The part of Persia at the mouth of the Persian Gulf or E Pakistan/Afghanistan
4 Tyrren phocean = enigmatic place name presumably a seaport of Italy or France or possibly 2 ports Genoa and Marseilles XC. Le grand Satyre et Tigre d'Hyrcanie, Dont presenté à ceux de l'Océan: Un chef classe 1 ira de Carmanie, Qui prendra terre au Tyrren Phocean. 1 classe = Latin classis, fleet
Yours L Ballaam Townsville Australia
April 26,2004: May 2 Venus will oppose Pluto. Could be aviation crash. Victims may be pawns.
May 5 the Sun squares Neptune..Most likely an air crash involving fog, and Mountains.
May 25 th Mars conj Saturn High death toll. Could involve a building or large ship
May 27 th..Sun squares Uranus....Fire...electrical fires....air crashes
If I have any dreams, or hunches, I will post them. Stargazer
April 25, 2004: I had a very disturbing dream regarding a major terrorist attack around about the 26th April 2004 ( or a couple of days afterward ). In my dream there was alot of smoke, and many casualties.
April 12, 2004: I have been having this re-occuring vision for a long time, at first I could not understand what it meant exactly as it come in various fragments. I see the a black pryamid engulfed in flames, I see surronding images of palm trees, fire engines, emergency personnel in a frenzy of activity. This vision started a few
years ago, I wasn't even sure where it was, it didn't come to me until one day I was watching a television program on Las Vegas, that I saw the Luxor Hotel............and reight there it was! my black pyramid. I am not sure when it will burst into flames, just that I see it doing so! Darius
April 12, 2004: There may be an explosion around St. Louis Missouri or Memphis Tennessee. Possibly the Mississippi River...bomb? not sure,but could make the earth quake...could be on a barge in the river..I think it could affect the richter scale for that area...Almost as if it could have nuclear intensity....witin this month April or May 04
April 5, 2004: I forgot to add this one. Around April 14 the , or so, I see the possibility an aircraft will crash into a stationary object. Last night, I dreamed about Queen Elizabeth, and a Killer clown with a knife. Stargazer
April 4, 2004: I don't really have much, and might have to depend heavily on hunches, and dreams. April 6th thereabouts...a plane crash is possible. Mars will square Jupiter, and I have very little data on that aspect. It usually means sacrificing something, or giving up something big. April 9th, Venus squares Uranus, and that usually has to do with Sudden violent accident, and explosions. It can mean negligence, too, and freak accidents..with survivors. Mars will form an Opposition to Pluto the 24th of April, and from my experience, plots, and cover ups are involved.....conspiracy..involving many people. Stargazer predicts
March 27, 2004: A lot of high officials, elected leaders and executive branch members will be removed from office worldwide.<KHELBEN 27MAR2004 hbtm>
March 23, 2004: Had a dream a few nights ago ablout the Pope. I am not Catholic and don't know why I would dream this. In the beginning of the dream he was as he is now, his age and illness hampering what he wants to do. By the end of the dream he was young again and praising God for his blessings. In the dream it was a "knowing" that it was sometime around September that he would be young again. I believe the Pope may pass sometime around September 2004. Wolffwind
March 23, 2004: This Prodiction might turn heads!! My prediction is that the 144,000 that are chosen are the USA troops, the numbers match.The False prophet will lead them into false peace. We will know who he is after this year. All of these things have been written and we r blind to see. David
March 14, 2004: I feel a major collision will take place around the 19th of March, 2004. Aviation comes to mind, based upon my Astrological research. Under Venus Square Neptune aspects, military planes (especially Navy) are often involved. I always hope I am wrong about these disasters, but there is nothing I can do personally to stop them. People ask me why bother making predictions, and registering dreams, and hunches, and I answer "To document the validity that such things happen to people from all walks of life, and that we share an "Unconscious link" to many of our fellow humans, as individuals, and collectively." Stargazer
March 11, 2004: My dream about the trains "separating" Has come true. March 11, 2004 . The timing, and the details are eerie. In my dream, a window "opened up" and I got out with help. The cars separated, and the engine headed toward another destination. The details can be seen in my Train Dream. The news is carrying the story today. This is one of the best documentation of a psychic dream I have had in awhile. I feel timing, and details......are key to making accurate predictions. Skeptics can be merciless, even when we are "right on the mark"...they find a way to twist things. Well, have faith in what you see...I say... don't let them get you down. STARGAZER
March 9, 2004: I dreamed that there was a newspaper story that at the Boat Show in Birmingham England they paid tribute to a fishing boat that sank in bad weather with everyone on board drowning that day. March 9th 2004
March 9, 2004: I dreamed that in a newspaper there was a story about a family of four or five being killed by influenza.
March 8, 2004: Martha Stewart will receive about 3 1/2 years sentence prison time. Crow's Prediction
March 7, 2003: I was on a train, heading East. The car I was in leaned to the right, and fell halfway over. A Glass window opened up, and I escaped with a few people. One young man helped me out. The rest of the train, including the engine, kept heading down the tracks, toward its destination. Somehow, the cars became separated. Stargazers Dream
March 5, 2004: Some thoughts on dreams, and their relationship to fear...Have you ever considered that fear is the real initiator of your bad dreams? There are many frightening things in the world, particularly at this moment. Because of 9/11, people have increased fear of planes blowing up. Because of the economy, people have increased fear that their own job will be lost. Because of Bush being such a wack job, people are afraid that our president will do something stupid. Or, we think he's such a dork that someone should shoot him. All these things add to what occurs in our dream state. A thing to ponder... why doesn't the lack of your fears coming true ever curb your thoughts that bad things will occur? Do you ever keep track to see just how many (if any) of your predictions (fears) actually come true? I've always noticed that fear is almost always wrong. I'd say about 99.99 percent of what fear tells us is wrong. Back when fear had a purpose, when we had great potential for being eaten by wild animals, fear had an actual purpose. But, fear now-a-days has little to no good use. It is a liar, and always has been a liar. The body generates fear when the adrenal gland is churning away all the time because of stress. It's called fhe 'Fight / Flight' mechanism and is related to noradrenaline output. Why don't you try meditation, or yoga, or something which would cut the stress in your lives rather than venting your fears as if the things you fear will actually happen. You're just spreading unfounded fears to others. Start making a list. Start counting how many of your fears actually come true and how many of your fears are unfounded. Create a second list and start tallying how many good things occur in your life. To see a face-on view of how many times your 'predictions' never come to fruition is health
February 7, 2004: There are ten Russians who know most of what I am going to tell you. The changes that Russia has gone through since about 1990 were planned out by the KGB and more precisely, President Putin. Putin has just given the Russian people a long rope that will change overnight into a noose. One half of the people will be suspect, one quarter trusted by the government and one quarter will be exterminated. If a Russian has a pen pal in the west he is probably going to die. Overnight an Iron curtain will fall again. Russia will be totally silent when this curtain falls. Maybe 10,000 westerners will get trapped. People will be totally surprised at its effectiveness. Nobody will travel inside the country, even to Moscow, for months. Nobody will fight back, such is the nature of the people of Russia. Later, some people will fight as the Russian Army moves westward sequentially taking back the countries of the old USSR. They will go as far as they are allowed. This next information is from predictions I made up to two years ago. Putin was the person responsible for the downfall of the Russian Army in Afghanistan. When the US gave the Muijahadin 200 shoulder fire sam or stinger missiles Putin made sure they got two thousand more, then he told them where to go so they could shoot down the helicopters. It made it appear the US was much more involved than they really were. It was reported in the American popular press that the KGB gave the Mujahadin the orders of the Russian Army. It was a little different. As possibly you know, the KGB members will make money at the same time carry out orders if possible. Also, they will make as much money as they possibly can. Which of the Mujahadine had the most money to buy the plans and advice the KGB had to sell? Logically it was Osama Bin Laden that the KGB dealt with. Most of the Russian casualties fell to plans that were actually devised by Putin. These were given to Osama under advisement. At first ¾ of the operations of the Mujahadine were Putin’s but later as Osama developed his skills and leadership abilities the KGB input dropped to about half. Putin’s plans remained more destructive for several reasons. This earned him great respect within the KGB and a nickname or operational name like ‘dagger killer’ was given to him. Putin will kill thode 10 men that know about these plans, one at a time, as a warning to the others until at least eight are dead. These men are very arrogant. The arrogance keeps them from getting together on their own to overthrow Putin. Also, my girlfriend says they are not smart enough to take over and run things themselves.
Putin and Osama planned the present terrorist attacks the world is facing when they worked together to destroy the Russian Army. The Taliban and Osama know that America will hunt them forever. They have no intention
of hiding for the rest off their lives. Their job was also to get the US Army out of America. It’s Judo to get
the enemy off center like that and Putin is the Judo expert.
In the 1980’s Russia knew that to attack the US meant Mutually Assured Destruction (MAD). So they simply hired an Arab assassin to confuse us. Beware the Bear has more weapons than they did at the end of the cold war. It never stopped they just got rid of the fat, all those satellite countries that hated them and are just playing a different game. More to come. Ted Drab
February 7, 2003: Cheney exits by the Flower Moon With reasons quite transparent to all
The stage now set for a Rudy June To gild the Bushes through the Fall. Michel
February 2, 2004: Glad to see that gas leak at Sydney Opera House was contained....A main gas line was cut by contractors. I like happy endings. Something is going to happen at the Dallas Fort Worth Airport I do believe..may be a plane crash or destruction of sorts..bomb in trash can maybe...Maybe someone will find one in trash can and thwart potential disaster. Down2earth1AL
January 15, 2004: I was standing in line to go thru security at an airport, and when I became aware I did not have my luggage, I left the line. The people in the line seemed to be doomed, and I felt sorrow as I looked at them. I said "I must write to Georgia" Stargazer
Accurate Prediction Reported on January 1, 2004:
Previous Prediction of 12/26/03: I forsee the strong possibility of an Aviation crash during the last day of this year, or thereabouts, involving engine trouble. STARGAZER PREDICTS
NOTE: There was a small plane crash in Dallas today, Jan 1 2004. No word on the cause, yet. Stargazerer
Editors Notes: This could also be referring to the crash on Christmas Day over Africa, or possibly the more recent crash containing mostly French Citizens.
December 31, 2003: I predict Michael Jackson will NOT be convicted on the Neverland situation, greatly due to the 'weakness' of the parents involved. Saddam will face 'a body of rifles' as his final fate. Most likely a firing squad.
These predictions will soon be found in verses written by Nostradamus. Also, I predict Mt. Tarhuna in Lybia will be found to have a VERY MAJOR poison gas factory UNDERGROUND and will be destroyed entirely by a special type of 'twisting missle'. I predict the 'end' of Pope John Paul II. He will most likely be followed by Cadinal Carlos Maria Martini of Italy...the 'black' Pope. NostraBOBus Egan nostrabobus4u@aol.com
December 26, 2003: THE EARTHQUAKES ARE NOT DONE..MONGOLIA,NEAR ANTARTICA...BRAZIL...POSSIBLE 6 OR BETTER..WITHIN NEXT FEW MONTHS
12/26/03: I forsee the strong possibility of an Aviation crash during the last day of this year, or thereabouts, involving engine trouble. STARGAZER PREDICTS
December 12, 2003: I've had dreams for years now that something bad is coming. I see it symbolically as a strom, but I don't know any details as to what it represents. These dreams started a couple of years ago. Now they are more frequent and are becomming clearer. I do know that whatever is coming is ten times worse than what anyone can imagine. The good news is that afterwards things will get better than they are now. There will be no one who is unaffected by this.
December 7, 2003: My prediction is that the futures holds an unformity in the atmosphere of human life. Its destruction is being by the sufferings of people. To develop a human rights in which all people won't receieved. These gatherings of human rights issue will develop an anti-government leader. He will controlled the minds of the government through influence of learn human rights violations. And the suffering of man. This third world enemy would rule by governs in the acts of helping a third world government. The antichrist is a transformation of the antigovernment. He has raised a strategy to became your loyal government. He is america spy. He will spy on communities to take a great affect and will influence the government to protect another government under a great lie. The antichrist know as the antigovernment will again influence the people in the local community on one who life seems to be a mystery. This strange breast figure is revelation to the step in the beginings of war. The bible is a transmation that had been develop to prediction practical practicing sayings to repeat the rehearst messenge of the middle east people which this follow mastership of human destruction will follow other countries to destruction each other in the match of
who is the strongest country. People will become more power ego and less human sensitive. Their own selfish ways will destroy us for power. The power in this power is not to be trusted. We will need a not trust government policy to evaluate the imposer who impose power through the enemy middleeast. Middleast will be a teaching college of self destruction. Other countries will follow the middles in the future. The no trust policy is a policy that only the simply man made have or products for failure destruction. Politicians may develop a lead that they are developing power through culture contact or in grouping contact. Which later will lead to grouping destruction because of a lack of a promise of a particular politician. We need a government revised. Again the no trust policy, it must be done. In my heart and in my mind I can feel the hurts of many lifes but many influence politician will answer to God. These people can influence the government to cover another government to cover corruption in another government which could effect us all later. The Anti-Government and/or the anti politicians are going to be unloyal to us. Its so late threaten that I fighten by the thinking of the emotions. The Anti-Government is a form government of another outside the united states and within us. The bible has came to reconstruction the mind in which we think. Later, we will have any america crisis. Because they did something I can't believe it happen in america. In time or later in the future don't sleep america keep your eyes open for future destruction upon man. Analysis that if will follow the pearl habor when we had a war or and attact this may tell us something about how long it will take an another attact on us. Also, another analysis methods are to study our wars in distrance any war we every had this is an clue to when a possible attact can happen on USA. Most financial places gobally will be hit first because of the money. Anti-Government thinks that the buildings as of now is the main targets because they think they are hurting the money. These anti-government people is very not much intelligent as the USA thinks. These Anti-governments are people who watches around main impressive building as our explosures recently. They watches the people who work for these buildings and following them home. and learn as much as they can learn. They watches the government within inside of the government. They have made friends with the government representing power. We have several aims to which from starting from our highest government to our lowest government. Each people must be watch in America. Loading cops around public environments are not in particular for my idea for public safety every politician needs to be watch 24 hours a day by the police officers or armed forces.This is were our money should be provided for less building police officers and more police officers to government officials. This is a call for watch america. We do have enough police officers to watch every politician or respenting a form of the lowest government official chair and that councilman or statesman or other political positions. The closes to the political officials may be his the appointed in his command. Political close friends must be watch by police officers. Political's families must be watch by police officers. This is a call for a close watch on america. Organization, Foundation, Businesses, Large or small needs a voluteer police watch. Every community in Thee USA need to put up police watch signs for war attacks on America.
November 16, 2003: THIS IS THE ONE "An unusual Democrat President is coming. This person will have their hands full cleaning up a lot of things. It may be Ralph Nader. STRONG POSSIBILITY of prayer defeating George Bush and his Administration. The odds are 6 to 4 that Bush will be impeached. He is this generation's Nixon." I am certain it is Kucinich.
November 16, 2003: Tarot reading has revealed a surprise election result for 2004. Ohio Congressman Dennis J. Kucinich, a Democrat, will be the next President. It will be an extremely tight race up until the last minutes. His popularity will surge because of something involving Oprah Winfrey. It is a complete surprise. He is the dark horse candidate and will remind a lot of people of Jimmy Carter with the things he says. One danger: Kucinich needs to be very careful during term. Danger of assassination attempt.
This ties in with something Liberty said, about the next President having something European or having to do with women around him, and ties to Ralph Nader. Kucinich has been endorsed by Nader. Liberty claimed this next Democrat President would have a big "clean up" to do on America on his hands. I agree with him or her.
Do not bet on Dean. Dean is going to get pulled down by a scandal and Kerry is going to falter too. Kucinich will come out of nowhere and ride something enormous in the media straight to the top. The media and entertainment world will love him for some reason. This is big. Keep watching, you will see the cards are right
October 31, 2003: "Stargazer, here. I have decided to post the most likely dates and details for Air disasters. I will only list the approximate dates, and a few key words. November 2-3 I see foggy conditions, and a mountainous terrain. November 15th I see an Air crash involving a stationary object. November 18 I feel will be a murderous day, altho not involving Aviation necessarily. November 20-21, I feel an electrical problem will cause an air disaster..and I feel it will cause many deaths. Much anxiety comes with this event. November 23-26, the planets are acting up again, and I see an Air Disaster involving a small plane, and a Mountain, and the possibility 2 different sized planes will collide. Murders increase the 26th of November. People will be killed in groups in and out of war."
October 24, 2003: Stargazer here....I dreamed about Poland and Greece.
October 7, 2003: President Bush will voluntarily exit office and will not be re-elected. He is enormously upset and devastated by the Ambassador Wilson affair and knows the trail of evidence is leading back to the Oval Office. It is not Karl Rove but G.W. Bush who deliberately leaked the identity of Valerie Plame. The reason Bush will resign from office is to protect the Republican Party from complete destruction that will result if the American people uncover his real reasons for endangering Valerie Plame. The reasons go back to Clinton. Bush and Plame were involved in an extramarital affair. If the trail of investigation gets any closer to exposing the affair, Republicans will be crucified by the Democrat Party, because essentially Plame is to Bush what Lewinsky was to Bill Clinton. The AFFAIR is the reason Bush exposed Plame. The AFFAIR is the reason Bush will resign from office to cover it up. Watch and see. This prediction comes from a Liberty Tarot reading performed October 7th, 2003.
September 29, 2003: I had several scenes in my dream this early am. Some I cannot recall enough to write of, but I do remember the following: I looked up from a house I was not familiar with and saw a dark gray sky swirling above me. There appeared to be a great storm forming. I saw the sky open up and a tornado forming.....quite bizarre since it was so clear and close. The winds picked up and there was little time to run for cover. This was an unpredicted tornado/storm?, because everyone seemed unprepared for it. I can only remember bits a nd pieces from the other scenes as hard as I try to remember.
I also wanted to follow up from my post on September 08, 2003. I live on the water in south eastern Va and was at home when hurricane Isabel hit. I video taped and took many pictures of the storm and storms damage. Our dock did indeed get completely covered with tide...in fact all the way to the top of the boat lift was covered. The wind was blowing sheets of rain onto the water. My girlfriends dock was destroyed in the storm. They currently have nowhere to dock a boat. My husband had to go out in the sotrm on 3 different occasions in the smaller skiff we have to move it closer inward. We ended up having it tied to the back deck due to the extremely high tide and storm surge. The storm was unbelieveable and caused major damage in my city.--Stephanie
September 28, 2003: I do not claim to be a psychic but these are things that I am feeling. Part from dreams, others from something I cannot describe.
California will VERY soon suffer an incident that will result in large scale loss of life. Terrorist or Earthquake, although I actually see someone pouring liquid into fault lines in an attempt to cause an earthquake.
The pope will be killed in a terrorist attack. Debates regarding his replacement will be very contentious. There will be a largely successful movement in the American Catholic Church to separate from Rome . Jerry Falwell will fall due to scandals regarding the government. The American Catholic Church will be filled with many new members as other scandals rock the Televangelist community.
George Bush will die in office. The cause will appear to be natural, but will not be. Cheney will be widely unpopular due to many exposed unethical businesses dealings before he becomes president, and suspicion will surround him regarding the fall of Bush, although he is not involved in Bush's demise. I am unsure whether the fall of Bush is due to Osama’s appearance and disease, but regardless of the cause there will be an internal plot that occurs as Bush attempts to move his administration away from the more conservative and hawkish elements of his administration.
Osama Bin Laden will sneak into the United States . As another shocking terrorist attack occurs, he will appear on the steps of an important building. Perhaps the UN, or Supreme Court, but I have a feeling it will be on the steps of the Lincoln Memorial (I only see steps). He will proclaim that the United States will be defeated, for making oil slaves out of the Arab people. He will be taken into custody, and die shortly afterwards. He has intentionally infected himself with an unknown strain of an airborne infectious disease, perhaps something similar to Ebola immediately before his public appearance. The government will attempt to keep his disease a secret, but as multitudes of people begin to die, much anger at the government will ensue, and the truth will be revealed. Many shocking government secrets will become public knowledge. Violent riots will follow.
Saudi Arabian and Pakistani governments will be overthrown by fundamentalists. A brief nuclear exchange will occur between India and Pakistan . This will be the prelude to the rise of a ruthless Hindu leader who will become the leader of India , although democratic institutions will technically continue to exist, they will exist in name only. China will become a democracy. Putin will expel democratic institutions in Russia and will become the dictator, and will demand Eastern Europe back. Europe will become less effective on the world scene, and Great Britain will withdraw from the EU. After several terrorists attacks in London , British citizens will look to Queen Elizabeth for leadership. Prince Charles will have already been killed in an attack. Queen Elizabeth will die under suspicious circumstances. Prince William, will become King, eventually disbanding Parliament, and successfully occupying the whole of Ireland , and will rule with an iron fist. Despite his cruelty he will remain relatively popular by successfully thwarting terrorist attacks, but civil liberties will become practically nonexistent.
September 27, 2003: I see the Queen of England suddenly becoming very ill..sickness keeping her bedridden
September 22, 2003: Dream last night was very disturbing. I was in a tall building or on a high hill top with a glass window looking out down over a city. City didn't appear familar to me. Felt/ heard a loud explosion, that was thought to be an earthquake. Looked down over city and saw large building falling, almost as if undergoing a demo like you would see in the news. Only difference was very little smoke, more dust than anything, and there were people on the plaza (granite) running from the collapsing building. The building was perhaps 20-30 stories tall. I thought it was a government building. It was a light sand colored rectangular building with a structure that got wider near the base. As it collapsed, people around me wondered if earthquake or demolition of building was going on. But in my mind, I knew it was a subway explosion, perhaps terrorists with exposives beneath building. The underground explosion explained the lack of initial smoke and dust, as well as why it was felt as an earthquake.
Anyway, wasn't thinking of or talking about anything of the like, and have had many precognitive dreams of a personal nature over the course of my life. Just wanted to get this registered in case.
September 17, 2003: I have dreamed about the following over the last 2 nights. I was near several buildings. They appeared to be Scandinavian, or German. They were 4 stories high, one was brown with white trim, and flower boxes out front of each window. It seemed to be a rental, like an apartment house, or hotel. It was in a fancy area.The other building was white. Last night I dreamed about little Pond critters being skinned and sold while still alive. I pitched a fit, and told people off....I was in a jet with other people for a short time, and then, I was on the ground....and levitated...wearing white...I saw a preformer...go up a ramp. He/she was an ice skater, it seemed. I hugged a man with a broken finger. He was frustrated, because he could not write, so I said "Dictate". Signed, Stargazer
September 12, 2003: What is going on with russia. It is a very intense feeling I have of them. I cannot place it but they are up to something that is going to hit the news real hard if it becomes apparent. The impact of that information is so great that no country aware of it wants to give it to the press. A long term strategy making the USA and Europe very weak. Of any developped countries, Russia is the only one that does not rely on other countries for resources. If putin understands this, Russia will be great again. The role it competes with China. Those two countries have the most chance of ruling the world. The USA and the middle east are merely nice playgrounds to fight the pre-war in, keeping the russians and chinese as safe as possibly for the next world war. One of those two will be ruler of the world. Metaphorically speaking, Cayce was right. the north pole will be over Russia and the South Pole will be over China. Russia takes Europe, USA, South Amerkia. China takes on..... (south is not an option because of the moslims). China plays the 2nd violin. That has never happenned in history before. Then the war in the middle east spreads. Russia is faced with a southern front. Due to a european general (dutch or french), this battle will be won by russia. This will bring russia (terra) to the stars. Peace will be on earth while the next challenge departs into space. the big question. Who starts the first conquest in space. The space race has begon and I will not live to see the first space war. The real star war starts between two moons. Who owns the other moon ??? In order to prove ourselves, we need ourselves in battle. The challange of humanity: OVERCOME VIOLATION. We have forgotten what religion is by then, Science made it superflous, or.... did we ? We will be great in space someday, far into the future. After we have been conquered, liberated, conquered etc until we see our chance to be great again. Some things never change.....<Khelben 13SEP2003>
September 12, 2003: European Sweden (and they truly are more european than they might think) was the unfortunate country to be hurt by assasination. The nagging feeling has not gone. The same goes for the suburban or rural terrorist attack. <Khelben 13SEP2003>
September 10, 2003: In this dream, I was standing on the top step of the stepps leading into our back yard. My dogs were outside playing on the lawn. I looked up to the sky and there was a black, black, cloud in the perfect shape of a rectangle, it stretched right across the sky, I could see normal light louds all around it, but this cloud filled me with dread, I called my husband to have a look and we both felt this intense fear, or feeling of dread, I began to panic and called my dogs to come into the house, and we closed the door. I did not feel that this was a dream for my personal future, it felt much more like it was something, dreadful, hanging over the world Trish...
September 9, 2003: My dream about the canal took place in broad daylight. There were busy streets in a mid sized town. Stargazer.
September 9, 2003: I dreamed about a deep, narrow canal, and brick buildings, flying, and high tension wires.
September 08, 2003: I had a dream in the early am this morning of pouring rain, wind, flooding & a high tide. I saw my dock and also my friends dock with the water covering them as the waves pounded and the rain poured. I, for whatever reason was in our small skiff and felt the cold rain and winds as I tried to dock my boat at my friends house. This seemed to happen on the day of a concert we all have tickets for, because I knew it must be cancelled. (We do have tickets for a concert on Sunday that all of us are attending) We are located on the east coast, VA area.--Stephanie
September 7, 2003: 8/30/03 prediction by Stephanie: Hey Stephanie, I too dreamed about a tidal wave coming over a town like San Fran, and the Animals that hid in the dirt, I posted my dreams on a different web page but definitely did record them. I read your post, and both struck a chord with me as dreams I had in this last year. Neesoj.
September 5, 2003: The final major war will be between Europe and The United States. I see dreams of secret meetings between the German Chancellor, the President of France, Vladimir Putin of Russia who has pledged tanks and artillery, several northern European countries' leaders, and Canada's Prime Minister. The plan is to spark a crisis between the United States and North Korea while the U.S. is still mired deep with hundreds of thousands of soldiers in the Middle East. Israel will be the trigger. To rescue Israel from a sudden threat, we will send most of our thinkers and manpower to the Gulf and defend. Then Kim Jong Il will make a terrible attack on the U.S. that splits our attention and makes us vulnerable. Canada will be used as "the back door", and China, followed by Europe's forces over the Bering Strait, will move in. We cannot fight three battles simultaneously. The U.S. will lose. Peace will follow this war to end all wars, and new age will be the dominant Western religion.
August 31, 2003: Stargazer here. I dreamed about an accident in New York. People were pointing at the sky, and a railing collapsed. I saw Arnold giving a speech in New York, too. Someone said "Universal Studios is there "...I saw a map of new York State highways.
August 30, 2003: I just discovered your site. I keep a dream journal and decided to submit some of my most recent entries. Although I have had many the past few months, these seem to be the most interesting. 1) I opened a door and looked out across a vast field. I looked closer and saw something that shocked me. Several patterns in the ground, very strange formations which appeared to be crop circles, and scared me when I looked at them even closer. The patterns are quite complex and almost as though some ancient type of writing or writing not of this world. (I have sketches drawn of what I remember them looking like) I yelled for someone to come downstairs to see them and when they came down I again opened the door and peered out to see a completely different scene before me. The crop circle formations were no longer there, but instead I saw various animals (some of which I did not recognize). The animals appeared to be laying in a dirt/mud area. These animals were moving about and burying themselves under the surface of the dirt. This was very strange to witness. This also left me with an uneasy feeling upon waking up. I recorded the dream right after I awoke and sketched the picture the next day. 2) In this dream I was looking out of a big picture window and out of it I see in front of me a big bridge, one that very much resembles the San Francisco Bridge. (sketch of it drawn in my journal) While looking at the bridge I seemed to know that water was coming and going to engulf the bridge & town right by it. I saw a huge surge of water, much like a tidal wave, it was coming right over the bridge. I tried to warn people, I knew it was only a matter of time & not to far off. I called, and talked to many about what I saw. Nobody would listen or they listened but really didn't believe it. I then woke up and recorded the dream. 3) This dream is a bit strange, but here goes. I saw two very different looking aliens. These aliens seemed to have a human type body, but there hands and heads appeared to be like a mantis. They wore robes of some sort. They were showing some things, and the only I remember enough to write is them showing some sort of liquid that turned completely solid. I have no clue why, nor do I remember anything else. 4) I had a dream about some news regarding a significant DNA find. Something very different about the DNA strand. I even saw what looked like a different looking human, but could never seem to get up close to see its details and features. It appeared to be somewhat human,but not all human. My name is Stephanie. I have always had very vivid dreams from very young. I don't remember every dream I have, but I do have dreams on a weekly basis that I recall. Some of which I realize I'm dreaming, some of which I don't realize it until I awake and record what I have seen or felt. I have kept a dream journal since 1992 when I realized some of my de ja vue was because I had dreamt of a detail, or similar event. I don not in any way claim to be some sort of psychic. I do however claim to have had some of my dreams come true or parts of them come true at some time. Dreams are still quite a mystery to most, many debates over the true nature of them. My favorite quote says it all---"The most beautiful thing we can experience is the mysterious. It is the source of all true art and all science." --Albert Einstein
08/29/03: Bill O'Reilly scandal... will turn out to be an immoral person.. secrets will be revealed.. Maria.
08/23/03 I'm having these premonitions that therewill be an assasination attack on a high ranking US, Israeli or European official or politician. I think it will be a surprise since we didn't expect that to happen. It's a nagging feeling so I give it quite some credibility. I had a similar feeling on april 30th 2002 , 7 days before the dutch populist Fortuyn was killed. <Khelben 23AUG2003
08/23/03 I had a dream last night about a man, I'm a bit fuzzy on the name, but the name "Waban" (or something like that) was in the name, as well as the name "Harry". My dream was like watching a documentary on TV. It started out really mundane, but it was the end of the dream that scared me. In my dream, this guy (I'll just call him Harry) lived alone, and had no family members living within 100 miles of him. Harry was worried over some sort of appointment, which had something to do with cancer and/or physical exams. For some reason, Harry wasn't suppose to drive himself to and from these appointments for whatever reason, but wasn't supposed to take public transpiration/taxis either. He was worried because he lived alone, had no family around, and was too afraid to ask any of his friends to drive him. Harry wasn't sick, but then this worry over this weird driving/appointment situation snuck up on him, and made him depressed and anxious. Everything around his environment was now making him depressed and anxious, and he was now desperate for a change in his environment and lifestyle. And then eventually someone offered it to him, so he jumped on it the first chance he got. He was moved to a location that was surrounded by water (an island or a place by rivers) and had very moderate temperature most of the year. The documentary going on in my dream didn't name the country he was moved to, but just called it "the middle east". He was given a wife (named something like Aniss, maybe with an "amuria" or "ab..." somewhere in her name) who temporarily stayed in the US to contact Harry's family and employer and make up excuses and lies about his disappearance from his current home. In Harry's new location, he was worshipped by all those around him, and he was relieved by this, as it contrasted and defied his previous worrisome situation. Harry was seen as a religious symbol, and taught people that Satan was the answer to all the world's problems, as those around Harry would promote Harry as being in a god-like status. Then there was some big fight scene in a park, involving Harry, and Harry and his people were making fun of and humiliating anybody in the fight that didn't like them. People were chasing Harry, but he was enjoying it and laughing at them, but then somehow somebody caught him with a lasso. Then the last scene of the documentary in my dream was a view of Earth from outer space, and then the whole Earth turned into a big ball of bright light, and then there was a crucifix and some religious music playing... it sounds dumb, but this scene felt really spooky.
August 21, 2003: Had a dream, last night (21/08/2003) which I felt I had to remember...
Bit mixed-up, I'm afraid... The salient points are: Helicopter Four occupants A Red Wire (this was important) The name McGregor (though I'm hazy on this) The helicopter crashed, and I think the occupants perished I woke up in the middle of the night, with an urgency to remember this, but it only came back to me when I was shopping with my wife in the local supermarket, some eighteen hours later. Dave
August 21, 2003: This is weird: I keep having visions - not dreams - of a new religion invented. I see people saying, "More Christlike than Christian." People gathering in small towns and cities, outdoors at first, and candles are involved. It's at twilight. Like the Jews: service starts as the sun goes down. These people feel very sincere. I want to go to a service like this, it feels so beautiful in the visions. A voice says to me, "More Christlike than Christian will save the world."
August 20, 2003: Stargazer here. I had a dream about a dead man being found out in the open, not far from the water. He had drowned, or committed suicide. He was seemingly American, and had pale features. He was dressed in very little, maybe swim trunks. People were not upset he was dead.
August 19, 2003: This dream (from today 8/19 at about 5AM) seemed to involve yet another aircraft. I saw what looked like a cockpit with three persons inside – two apparently dead and the third was possibly injured. I think that it will involve the western coast of Florida – possibly the Tampa, St. Petes, or Clearwater areas. There might be two or three attempts before the event is actually noticed. There could be a deception involved to give either a false sense of security or at least to create some confuse. This is likely in the next 48 hours. Isaac.
August 17, 2003: I had a rather weird dream last night. In my dream, I was watching TV, and the news was covering a terrorist attack, where the date was 9-11-2003, and Al Qaida had staged another 9-11 attack, with planes flying into high profile buildings. In my dream, MSNBC's Patricia Sabga was covering the footage of one of the attacks, and she was wearing a short mini-skirt. All of a sudden, Patricia Sabga got diarreah and was crapping her pantyhose. It was really a messy sight, with diarreah running all over down Patrica Sabga's pantyhose, getting all over her legs, and dripping down onto her shoes and the ground. Then the news shifted away from the terrorist attacks, and focused exclusively onto Patricia Sabga's pantyhose-crapping accident. All of a sudden, it was like the latest 9-11 terrorist attack didn't mean anything, but the new center of the news was now the mess Patricia Sabga had made in her pantyhose. I don't know what the meaning of this dream was, but all I can say is.
.. Patricia Sabga, if you feel like you've gotten food poisoning, just get straight to the bathroom... it's not worth covering any amount of news! I know that there's more to my dream than this, but I just can't figure it out yet.
August 17, 2003: It's only so long until a new terrorist attack will happen. As long as there are attempts, there is a likelyness of happening. The recent Indonesian attack is again proof of this. Question remains when an attack in the scale of 911 will happen. As with 911, carefull planning and a big dose of luck made it happen (alongside some conspiracy theories). It keeps nagging me that we are still not out of the clear. Although the likelyness of something happening in the US is diminished, I feel a strong barrier in future. This time I suspect a more rural area, European. Not the high profile 911 but more something in the suburbs of a city or even a smaller town. Impact will be high but only related to that moment. 911 also had impact on financial institutions, this one has not. Think in the sense of breaking a dam, shooting down a plane or releasing chemicals, bacteria.
August 12, 2004: The world will turn upside down in 2004. Prepare accordingly. The future is not chiseled in stone. PRAY! Betty
August 1, 2003: Unless I recieve a few psychic dreams, or strong premonitions, I will not have much to say about August, other than Mars is in his closest point to Earth than in many thousands of years. I do see a few prominent aspects. The Sun Will form oppositions to Uranus, and Mars about the same time. Sun forms an opposition to Uranus on the 24th, and forms an opposition to Mars on the 28th. The first aspect is a sudden change, upsetting events. The second aspect pertains to aggression, and a clash of wills. I do see a small aspect on the 7th. Venus forms an opposition to Neptune, which usually involves collisions between military jets. On the 13th, I see a cycle of revenge. A retaliation......Not much to go on, but it's all I have from astrological sources. Dreams may provide more clues. ** Stargazer
July 22, 2003: Stargazer, here. I dreamed a Passenger ship vanished
July 3, 2003: In the past two months or so, I've been having aweful gut feelings, like something is about to happen, but it's a very personalized feeling like it's happening to me. They're the same type of feelings I got a month or so before 9/11, where throughout every day, I was tormented by feelings of imagining myself being involved in a collision, then immediately after 9/11, the feelings stopped. This time, one of the main feelings is that of being stranded, like having no way of getting back home. Another one is similar, but involves an overall lack of transportation... like not being able to get somewhere because of not being able to walk and/or drive... the driving part is either because of not physically being able to drive, or because your car in inaccessable or inoperatable. Another one involves extreme pain, especially in the rectum/crotch area (prostate/colon cancer?), and other types of pain involve heat, falling/tripping and hitting the ground and/or other hard objects, being stabbed by sharp objects in sensitive areas (mainly the eye), and being scraped by hard objects in sensitive areas (again, mainly the eye). The other main category of pain I sense is mental, where one feeling is stress (very fearful stress so bad it makes you feel physically sick), and another one is lonliness and complete lack of friends and family. The mental gut feelings/intuitions almost always correlate with physical ones, like a stressful fear feeling almost always goes along with a feeling of unbearable heat and dehydration.
July 3, 2003 I feel July 8th will bring death to many women, and children in the Middle East. A neighborhood will be devastated by a bomb.
June 28, 2003: A Nuclear bomb does not need to be going off in a city on order to make a point. <Khelben 30JUN2003>
June 28, 2003:
June 10, 2003: I see a few dates this month that indicate more revenge, and violence. (And there ARE times in the news we really don't have mush angst on a large scale) June 23rd thru 25th, there will be cycles of revenge, with people who are being caught in the middle as pawns. Jealousy plays a big part in this event. People will be very upset. June goes out with a bang, and many sorrows. It is also the time an Air crash is most likely. Birds could be a factor. I see a major accident at night. I see a small explosion involving young people about the 11th. Rumsfeld will continue his downhill slide, and take many with him. His smile will remain sinister.
June 10, 2003: Dreams of sudden flooding and death. Also epidemics, alot of people dying, very contagious. javajunkie70@hotmail.com
June 9, 2003: Recurring dreams I have had since very little, with different variations. My family is in a house and there is a truck going around outside, a man with a megaphone is telling us that we are under martial law, any violator of the curfew will be shot. I sense that the curfew is 24 hours. I sneak out to get some food because we are starving and I see others doing the same being shot.\ We are evacuating in another I have had. The roads are clogged and people are getting frustrated and leaving their cars, possesions to walk instead. I see huge aircraft hovering above, (not like a flying saucer or anything) and I have a heart attack. ( I HATE this one) I am trying to feed my family...apparently I have children. There is another curfew. the govwernment? or someone has sent out spherical probes that shoot people on sight.I wait for it to go away and try not to set off any motion sensors.. my husband in this dream made me a device to jam it. I go out and steal food from my neighbors who are dying of some wierd disease Hopefully all bad dreams with no real portents.
June 5, 2003: I had a vision concerning EARTH CHANGES..It was very intense. There was a cosmic force that blew by the earth,but NOT an impact however it caused the earth to shuddered and stop! Of course everything on the earth continued moving causing total catastrophic disentigration of everything and the force reduced everything to mere sand particles wiping mankinds existence from the face of the earth..I told a friend about this and she brought me a book on "POLE SHIFT" theories...Was fascinating to see the similarities that scientist have reported as possible scenarios....My visions come across my eyes while awake....I have had dark feelings concerning the world starting in 2004 to climax in 05 and recovery in 06..I don't feel that it is connected with the above vision,but will impact the world..mankind as well... Hope I'm wrong on both accounts.
JUne 3, 2003: I have had a series of dreams within the past month or two that seem to be more than dreams, because I can still remember them clearly many weeks later without even keeping a journal. Since they've just started happening back-to-back (about every week or two), it usually means something, like they're related and are giving a message. In the first dream, these guys were blowing themselves up with record players. They'd attach a record player to themselves, and the electricity would blast through them, and with the last few drops of electricity left before the power went out, the record player would play a couple of seconds of a spooky sounding song, with some sort of political sounding lyrics. They weren't doing this to injure or kill anyone (except themselves), but they were doing it so that the news could record it and play it over and over again on TV in order to scare people, because the combination of the electrical blast from the record player frying somebody and the brief sound bite that would play would be so frightening to watch. The second dream I had, I went home for Christmas, and my uncle was too busy to greet me, but he had left two presents out for my mom to give me. The first present was a stack of huge (30 - 50 gallons a piece easily) containers, all containing food - the biggest caserols I've ever seen. My mom told me that if I prominently displayed them in my truck when I hauled them home, that it would make traveling faster, because other drivers would see them and have a better understanding of how to conduct themselves on the road. The second gift was a huge pair of pants - they were like 10 feet tall and 10 feet wide. My mom explained that my uncle got them for me because he knew "what a big breakfast eater I am". In the third dream I had, I was watching an episode of Seinfeld. In the episode, Kramer had bought some sort of device to give himself big electrical shocks. George was over, and Kramer was showing George the device. Kramer would strap himself in some sort of wooden reclining chair, flip the switch, and big lights would flash and zap all over the place, and Kramer would scream something like "ahhh! wow... I can really feel it in my spine!!! ahhh!" After he was done, George would be all excited and smiling, and would say "oh wow, that's something... come on, you got to let me try it now!" So George would strap himself in, flip the switch, and have basically the same reaction... "ahhh! You really can feel it in the spine!" And then Kramer would take another turn at it, and it would just go back and forth like that. In the latest dream I had, I was in some bleachers at a football game. Some guy was dressed in a bear suit, and had a gun that would shoot out fire. At first, he was going down the bleachers blasting it at people and burning them. Then he switched to an AK47 type of assault rifle that would just shoot bullets at people. People were trying to get close enough to stop him, and the guy stopped to give a short speech. He said "I want you to realize why I'm dressed like a bear... when you look at me, I don't want you to think of the bear in Little Red Riding Hood or the bears in the Goldilocks tale, but I want you to think of the song '99 Bottles of Bears on the Wall' " (I know it was a wolf in Little Red Riding Hood and that it's "99 Bottles of Beer...", but that's just what the dude said). The guy eventually took out a pistol and shot himself, but he didn't die, but some men in the crowd got a chance to hold the guy down. So the men in the crowd decided that the only thing to do was to kill the guy. At first, they brought him into the men's room to see if there was anything in there that could kill him. The assailant in the bear suit said "are you bringing me to the men's room so that you can sit me down and explain the birds and the bees to me?" They brought him in there, but weren't able to kill him, so they took him to an abonded house instead where they buried him in the basement.
May 23, 2003: There is another assasination underway. A plane being hit by a missile. The plane carrying a VIP. <Khelben 23MAY2003>
May 22/2003..... I had this dream about a week ago. Was in an international airport... with Queen Elizabeth and Prince Philip. I had driven them there., and was on an apparent equal basis with them. There was to be quite a wait for their next plane. We went into an observatory room....and as soon as we got in there.... into the glassed enclosure... I saw a plane heading straight for our building..... I yelled Oh God... look at this.... it's going to crash..... we looked behind us... and saw it crash into a windsock pole.
Part of the plane broke off.... and shot up the runway blazing with fire..... then it blew up in a luggage storing area. Prince Philip.... stated to Elizabeth..... Damnit Elizabeth... I told you we shouldn't have sent our luggage out there. End of Dream.
Analysis: England will face suicide bombers? I have never dreamed of the Royal Family or anyone of that nature. I feel the dream showed the Queen and Prince... to depict the country of origin.
May 15, 2003: There is an enormous tremor in the time-space. Some star wars fans would call it 'a disturbance in the force'. The latter is exactly what it seems. There are major changes at hand an it is not to be something that happens so quickly that one says: 'it happened then and there' but more like: 'jeee the world looks a lot different from a year ago'. Something similar was already happening in Israel where I noticed that the spiral of violance was so slow that it's increase in level almost got unnoticed. That same thing is going to happen all around us. Not necesarrily with violance but a lot of changes are at hand. The world is going to change slowly into something we never knew before. <Khelben 16MAY2003
5/15/03 8:40 E.S.T. A Canadian airlines or a Canadian plane associated with the numbers CA-101-1 or 111 will crash in the Atlantic with catastrophic loss of life. A-6 is also associated with the plane. Jean Charest, premier of Quebec, will also die in office. (I have nothing against the man.)
R. Boyd Blackwell, esq. "Search Engine" and Reference Librarian
April 29, 2003: I am upset at the fact that I predicted a earthquake for San Fran bay area and had one right under my own two feet here in Alabama!!! Oh well...Now I am seeing the English royal family coming into the international news soon...possibly a wedding or maybe something to do with a child....should be big news with royalty
April 22, 2003: I see most of the crashes will be related to weather. The first crash comes about the 4th of May. I see foggy conditions, in a mountainous region. Around the 12th, I see precipitation causing another crash. I see an event around the 13th and 14th involving a criminal element in some kind of transportation accident/incident. The 19th, another mountain crash. The last cycle runs from the 24th of May thru the 27th . It is the worst of the three cycles. I see the likely hood of a fire in flight, and a collision into a structure. There could be a mid air collision involving a lot of young people, and a small plane hitting a big one. I hope I am wrong. I can't rule out a plane colliding with another plane, as an act of sabotage.
April 18, 2003: I am very sad to say, I believe May 2003 will be a very bad month for air crashes. I need to check my dream book, and aspects, and elaborate shortly, but I can't help but think it is best to stay on the ground! There are collisions of a peculiar type involving Planes hitting things, like stationary objects, and structures. I will make details known as they arise. I hold no illusions that I can prevent them. Stargazer.
April 14, 2003: I believe that the Okland bay bridge will was again be damaged...I believe a 6 or greater quake will hit the bay area soon...Something will rattle that bridge...
April 4, 2003: This can't be, all of my life I have been taught that it is wrong, demonic and unchristian. Yet over and over with deadly accuracy I have had dreams of Airlines crashes. Some were just daydreams others
nightmares, in all cases the details were jumbled or wrong, ie: wrong airline, plane type, color and such
but the main details "airliner crashes into a large downtown building in a port city".
This afternoon I had another one while taking a nap. I was in a small utility building at the airport with a view of the approach and an end view of the runway. It had been raining, near dusk and storm clouds hovered. A huge DC10? airliner came in and someone yelled, "It doesn't sound right". I said, "come to the back door and we can see." everyone ran back to see the plane almost set down then shear or something moved it to a slight angle to the runway. As the pilot corrected the attitude, the back left landing gear touched the ground and twisted. Someone yelled "Oh God." The plane careened off the runway to the left and tore apart as it went through the field and finally a fence into parked cars in a fireball. This was on Friday, April 4, 2003. This is the first sleeping dream in about one year.
This first daydream was like this: we were on a flight into LAX on United. Suddenly out of a cloud a small
twin engine plane flew straight in to our wing. I nearly dove out of my seat. My wife grabbed me and others asked if I was okay..."Fine" I lied. We landed in LAX without trouble and learned as we got to the parking lot...breaking news, a small plane had flown into a Mexicana Airliner on final approach to LAX and crashed in Ceritos, just blocks from an uncles house. This is typical of my "dreams".
All except once, airplanes. We were at a huge RV show, they were giving away 100 free Florida Lottery
tickets. As I walked up I told my wife I would win them, I knew I would. I did! They amounted to about
$3.00 but I did win them! What do you make of this? Bob confederatebob@hotmail.com
March 31, 2003: I dreamed I was in a room with a low ceiling, there was another woman there, she showed me her dream, she put three bronze nails upright in my palm and almost like evil magic they took off into the sky like missiles, but one went awry and stuck in the wall next to me, but did not explode.
March 30, 2003: I predict that religion will never accept anything, no matter how awful or destructive, as the 'end times' having actually occurred. It won't matter how closely the Biblical predictions have been matched because they will never ever stop destroying hope in the name of something good.
I predict that although religious people constantly talk of love, they will never be able to actually do it because they are also thinking that they have to uphold a book which supports the exact opposite of love, a book which supports terrorist ideas and concepts which are destroying our world.
March 26, 2003: There will be PEACE, JOY, HOPE & LOVE that surrounds humanity on the Earth.
March 21, 2003: Areas in Afghanistan and Iraq will not adhere to their 'MADE IN USA' governments but adhere to Iran instead. From one of those Areas, the third antichrist will rise. Welcome to world war 2.9.
March 20, 2003: I dreamed about a little boy lying on a bench. He appears to be dead, and he is pronounced dead, but he falls from the bench, and he is alive. I dreamed someone harmed Tom Cruise, and I saw spirals in the sky. The ocean was in the sky like a transparent aquarium. The fish were pretty colors. I know I sound like a kid, but this is how dream images appear. I am actually a 55 year old woman ! Stargazer.
March 18, 2003: Saddam will be captured and will be brought to Turkey. His son will flee. People will choke due to use of bio/chem weapons, this will feel like a hot burning throat. bio/chem weapons will be used before the USA attacks. Saddam will or has used terrorism. The USA will get quite a beating too. The political situation in the USA will deteriorate. 17 terrorists. After 7 days (or weeks) of Baghdad seige, an escape will be tried. Saddam will feign injury. <Khelben 18MAR2003 21:50 GMT>
March 16, 2003: Feel a bridge collapse will be in the news..possibly from a construction accident, or possibly the supporting struts being struck by a ship/boat?? Karen
March 16, 2003: I now see similarities to my prediction of january 7th concerning an assasination of a leader and that of the Serb Prime Minister Zoran Djindjic after reading the AOL news article..On that note...I also believe that George Bush needs to have extreme caution when he travels to Europe for meetings....He may experience troubles just in the flight alone..Mr Bush may have a spiritual experience that will change his sights forever.
March 9, 2003: Mars is heading for the Earth. The perigee reaches peak In August. I do not wish to predict gloom, and doom, but the world goes mad, sometimes, in order to right itself again. Where are the superior brains hiding? Thank You, from Stargazer of Florida.
March 9, 2003: Posted at Psychic Pathways. I see something major involving aviation the 10 th of March. I see a plane crashing into the mountains. I know it seems I predict this often but I am going strictly by aspects. I see SNOW will make news about the 12th. Around the 16 th, I see revenge. Mercury will square Pluto, and it signals revenge......Mercury squares Saturn the 17th, and that usually brings heavy disagreements between the old and the young, and pain. The 28th Venus conjuncts Uranus. I fully expect something to do with a ship, or a bridge. With Uranus in Pisces, why not? My dreams may clear, soon, and I will be able to work on them to look for clues. Thank you from Stargazer of Florida.
March 7, 2003: After previewing what predictions already are listed, I will keep my postings short. Just key elements. Usual wait time is around one month. How I have developed the interpretation of given information is not 100%, what is in life? No intro here, have done it at other sites. HBear.
March 1. Indicative of a cruise ship or a similar surrounding. Threat/device. E. Med. Sea probable. Hopefully, this will be nullified by proper parties.
March 2. Sequential run. Common thread denotes construction accident. Long span, steelwork involved, probably a bridge. Unforseen lateral stress causes loss of integrity at crucial expansion/stress joint causing partial collapse of a mid-structure of this span. Beam/girder falls. Will affect foot-traffic pedastrians. Japanese tourists? Span/bridge adjacent to run-down area, RR? Locale guess-east coast?
March 3. Depictive event. These usually are from the viewpoint of a specific individual involved in the incident. Problem involves a track switch that inadvertainly directs train/subway onto track of oncoming traffic coming out of a tunnel. Key elements are as follows. A fan-fold, local newspaper whose front story is about a baseball team assoc. with "red"; people are wearing warmer weather clothing; a white "D" in a solid, blue circle; metro cruise line; a bay area; happening during daylight hours. The focal person had just been to some sort of festival.
Enough for now.
March 7, 2003: It's true, the great lakes shall become , great lake, southern Ontario, shores of Canada and I would un doubtedly guess the southern part of such lakes shall also be wading. reneg8
March 3, 2003: am Mikeadib. I had a dream last night...I dreamt of electrical wires coming down. They fall into rushing water. There are men and women in this water- many people are shocked to death. I think this is a flood or somekind of natural disaster/storm. There were palm trees...I wish I knew where this was going to happen or when its going to happen.
February 28, 2003: HELLO, MY NAME IS TANYA. I LIVE ON A HIGH RANGE IN AUSTRALIA. IN MY DREAM THE GROUND WOULDNT STOP MOVING FOR AGES, THREW ME DOWN AND I HAD TO STAY THERE, LOTS OF NOISE, AND LOOKING DOWN TOWARDS THE COAST, EVERYTHING, HOUSES, TREES, WERE WASHED AWAY BY LOTS OF WATER. THERE WAS NO POWER AND MY MOBILE WOULDNT WORK. EVERYONE ON THE COAST WAS DEAD, I'D SAY IT WOULD HAVE BEEN THE SAME ALL OVER THE GLOBE BY THE FORCE OF THE EARTHQUAKES. THIS WILL HAPPEN SOON, PLEASE REMEMBER IT IS YOUR INTELLECT THAT SEPERATES YOU FROM THE ANIMALS. WHEN IT HAPPENS, YOU MUST FORM GROUPS, ESTABLISH A LEADER (MUST BE STRONG MENTALLY BUT NOT AN EGOMANIAC) AND COOPERATE WITH EACH OTHER TO LOOK AFTER YOUR GROUP AND DEFEND AGAINST ATTACKERS. GET AWAY FROM CIVILISATION FOR AWHILE OR DISEASE WILL KILL YOU. ACCEPT ALL WHO COME SEEKING HELP, BUT BE RUTHLESS IN DISPOSING OF THOSE WHO WISH TO CAUSE YOU HARM.
Febuary 28, 2003: March Madness" will soon be set upon the world! The third month of the third year will be remembered for centuries as the "official start" of the deadliest religious war in history. The dream of a democratic Middle East will become a nightmare for the new Caesar. "Beware The Ides of March" hasn't been so true a statement for two millenium. Few places on this planet will be safe. Pythia@oracleofdelphi.com
February 24, 2003: I predict Bruce Springsteen will pass away this year. I hope I am wrong.
February 20, 2003: Hello from Stargazer Of Florida. I am sad to say another air crash came true. I just now read the news from Islamabad. Mountain, weather. I know we can't stop them, but, at least we may be able to see when it is safe to fly. I had dreams about sand. I believe the most seemingly insignificant clues can be the most important.
February 19, 2003: I am sad to say my previously posted predictions have come somewhat true. The subway attack by the Queer (odd) man, and the Iranian air crash today. Stargazer Of Florida.
Feb / 18 / 2003: There will (not) be a war in 2003. Not with bombs anyway. Bio poisons.We will not even know it. There will be war in 2004 and a half. There is too many rotten dead bodies not well disposed off ,causing great deaths and diseases. Some countries will be quarantined because of high death counts and because it will be a massive out break. Environmental groups will not let a war happen until the outbreak is in total control and well quarantined. There is worry here of more than war. Sadamm will die this year 2003 .He will be murdered. His throat will be cut. Unfortunately I see one of his older suns take over. His sun believed to be his all. (And he wants it all. He is a bad man. Dangerous mad man. There is a catastrophe of out off control disease because of death counts. I believe allot of these dead carcasses were massacred .Leaving the bodies to rot and create major deadly diseases. This is too be taken care off quickly or it will spread so fast. ALERT. Lots of tortured dead corps will be found ..I see, soldiers discovering this as one soldier urinates. A huge, lumped hill. The flood are coming .I believe the shuttle missions that are sent into space create this explosions of different gases. These gases are from the outer ozone not yet transferred in our atmosphere. This will be discovered at the ending of the year 2003. Lazars...Scientist will be inspecting and testing new directions ..Everything will be changed. Overnight.) It will be a time for restructure, big major changes are happening even as you read this. Energies, fuels will be created from human waste. I the ending of 2003 and a half brings us the beginning of the future .The future flight buses. The bus shuttles run on human waste and fly by magnet light systems. A major earthquake ,I believe from a Volcano deep in the ocean. t will cause a major flood across the West Canadian and the West American lands. It will spread all the way across both countries.It will destroy more as it repels on the way back . Water contamination. My visions: by Laure
February 15, 2003: The USA policy of Iraq is in Limbo. There is no way they can win right now. they have to wait. Wait for someting else to happen. Seems like Osama is going to give that to them. Did you ever consider how convenient Osama bin ladan has been for the USA so far. <Khelben 16FEb2003>
February 15, 2003: When we all know the outcome , why aren't we doing what is necessary to change or stop it now? reneg8 03/20/69
February 15, 2003: I never went into the sea, I saw a ship passing in the intricate canal from the point. I shouldn't have been there but I was merely a spectator. Should I defend my prescence? I thought to stay quiet. A ship passed , but it was not a boat in the canal it was a flying machine. It was a captured ornament, two men younger than my knowledge in enemy hands. They were not killed, they fealt minimal pain, they were dead. between hotel, subway, bus, nothing was smoothe. But front desk did give me money to seek my brother in the meen time. It was a fireworks expose., Something floated up from the backside of the condo. The show was being shoy from the roof of thus condo. I think use to live there. But the creepy scarecrow like figure floated up into my view. Yellow smiley face, with skinny ftame flowing in it's trail. The condo sparked and bat an eye it wasn't safe to be local anymore. reneg8 shall I continue?
February 15, 2003: Hello my name is Mark: I am a single man in Can. You know things are pretty hum drum arround here except for last night. A few nights back. I've dreamt a nightmare of fairly large magnitude. It was from what I could see as a great playground, a large city, with a very well constructed subway. This subway was intrinsic, with greeting service. bus terminal was on time at the interchange. everyone seemed asian like. I think I was in Japan. The world was mapped out like a Fritz lange, animation production. Metropolis. But as the tourist I was, in Future place. I followed this world of As I walked towards the front desk to which I had no clue, "can you help me find my brother " I was told no way in ;..., Soo I searched in between the dark subway urinal stalls, in this dream. to my hunting like avail, I found my self with this brother. I referred to the Fritz Lange thing because everything was in Multi ayered communal treadmills `arriving at the same place. I don't want to carry on tonight. but in this place when you went to front desk and said you were lost, they would give you money. The thing is though is that the money would carry your face and your friends lost. you money with your picture on the bill. these dreams are very realistic, wanna see? I'll luckily be allowed to post tomorrow. agreatfireinarwatersidestructure. condo in TO ? get thee way side Canada aint safe neither . The great lakes are one n we wonder why. reneg8.
February 13, 2003: I am picking up that Bush wants this war for Power. He wants to control the weapons of Bagdad and Iraq and Al Queda. He wants to control the Middle East. He wants to prove something, he wants to prove that he is supreme, prove that he is President.
February 13, 2003: I had a dream about 3 days ago,in my dream i am looking towards a beautiful blue sky,then i see two whales in the sky,all of the sudden they fall from the sky on a creamy coloured house with glass on its roof,from that i woke up. chris.
February 12, 2003: From Liberty: No further information is being sent to me about what city Bush is about to attack. All I have learned is that this city is a thorn in his side and one he personally dislikes. There are dissenters there. It has a good population of college student types and youth. A major voice will come out of that city decrying Bush and has been taking sides against him publicly for some while. Yet nobody will put two and two together after the city falls. I see a terrible time ahead for all Americans. We have a shadow population living among us that worships competition, anger and hatred. These are the people who pollute and cut in front of us in traffic, and wave the most flags. Soon we will be wearing uniforms to school, saluting the flag with the fascist "right arm extended", and watching everything we do and say. All this sweeps in after the coming terror attack on a US city. Even if Bush dies, this new regime in America is planned and there is little chance of escape. Dissenting journalists will be sent to special camps. I still maintain ABC News is in danger of being taken over by hostile interests and that Peter Jennings's name is on a list of some kind. He and many others will be taken captive to this camp, and he will be unable to return to Canada, despite Canada demanding his release and extradition. It seems America's government is determined to make enemies around the world and again there is no escape. I agree with the young prophet on the board who said, very truthfully, we should have hope, but we also need to avoid naivete. You'll see what I mean in a few days. I am devastated George Bush II could so easily take down our country...Some dreadful times are coming. If we can survive them, a shift will occur and Europe will liberate the United States. We will attack Iraq but lose. Other nations will step in and punish our country. We will eventually go to war against Europe itself. Europe, allied with Russia and China, will defeat America. America will then become a socialist nation and part of the European Union. Health care and other concerns will improve under the new rule, but it only lead to new problems and dilemmas. The final word is the world has ended many times before and will end many times in the future. Every ending, however, is only a new beginning of something different. Meet the new boss; same as the old boss. This is my final prediction. God bless you all and God bless America.
February 9, 2003: The USA will intentionally allow a terrorist attack to happen. They know about it but don't stand in the way. This attack will give the USA more foothold in the war room. Instead of focusing on the homeland defense failure, retaliation is the main topic in the media. Only after the USA has done its biggest harm, people will start to wonder why the USA is target for terrorist attacks. The general population will realise that their government has been playing with them to get busines interests protected and expanded. The USA foreign policy results in risks/costs are for all americans but the benefits only for a few. <Khelben 09feb2003>
ebruary 8, 2003: In June of this year the "war" with Iraq will take a turn that will make the "action" against them from the U.S.A completely will be non- existent for reasons at this time not known..... but the united states will not be operating anything in or near that country. I feel possibly due to other nations or of obvious reasons. -----David Dietrich NJ(I wished I lived in vermont)
February 7, 2003: While reading the predictions sent in today, a voice came to me. It said "Have Hope". This means to have hope in the future, believe that we will be okay, and don't dwell on the negative. Please have hope. - Kay
February 7, 2003: This is Stargazer from Florida. I see some events involving a rather Queer Man, and a lot of people. It is centered on the 16th and 17th of Feb.2003. I do see an explosion. Then around the 20th and 21st, of Feb. I forsee an air disaster. The weather is a factor, and the terrain is rough, mountainous. I had a dream(registered) before the shuttle accident, that a car was full of frost. The dashsboard was frozen, too. I can predict now way ahead that May of 2003 will be terrible for the Airlines in terms of accidents. Aviation in general is bad then. Dreams will help me see more clearly, and hunches come out of the blue, as many of you know.
February 7, 2003: Liberty here - strap yourselves in, everyone: here we go. Americans should be on the alert starting today February 9, just as the Justice Department says. The reason however is that Powell's speech failed and the world is looking askance at our country, because we're lying and now the lies are obvious. Bush is about to enact Plan B. Look for a serious attack on an American city very soon. It may in fact be complete destruction of that city. I am looking around desperately for photographs of city skylines. I saw what the skyline looked like PERFECTLY in my dreams. If I can find a matching photo in time, I will identify the city here. Hopefully, hundreds of thousands of innocent souls will be warned and saved. I do know what cities it will not be: Washington, New York, Atlanta and Miami will not be harmed. There is a slight possibility of the target city being West Coast - Los Angeles, San Diego, San Francisco, Seattle, Portland. The strongest target feeling I get is the American heartland: Midwestern cities stand the most likely chance of being designated as Bush's terror target. If you live in the following cities, take extra caution during the next 30 days.
Dallas, Houston, Lubbock. 25% percent chance. Phoenix, Santa Fe, Albuquerque, Reno, Las Vegas. 10% chance. 50% chance, target likely: Denver. St. Paul. Minneapolis. Oklahoma City. Detroit. 90-100% chance. Avoid these cities. If you live in one, make plans to get out now. Cleveland. Cincinnati. Chicago. Pittsburgh. Little Rock.
I see a danger cloud like a weather front covering the Midwestern States. The cities with the highest level of danger from internal conspiratorial attack are those that belong to the Central and Mountain Time zones. The most dangerous areas are Central Time. Southern states, the upper East Coast and the extreme West Coast appear to be safe for now. There are phrases coming to me about "they struck America's heartland". I get a sense this area has seen depression and economic struggles recently and that just outside the city, there is a lot of farmland, and lots of struggling farmers. What they grow is a wheatlike, yellowish substance. I do not get a picture of dairy farmers, it is more a vegetable, grainlike commodity. This city has historical significance, i.e. "birthplace of US President blah blah blah", or a museum or location of emotional significance to America and its government. It also has a fairly respected symphony. A new Latin population completes the picture.
I'll continue hunting the correct skyline's photo. I hope I find it in time. Liberty out-
February 2, 2003.....Trish....Please has anyone had any dreams or information from their guides in the last 24hrs to do with an ice-age.....Last night I was awoken around 12am with my guides saying that they were very sad and sorry, soo sorry. They told me that they had not been able to stop it, and that before the end of the year it will become so cold that to survive we will have to live underground. I live in Qld, Australia and I know that if this happens many people will not be able to cope and die,,,ours is a hot climate. I was also told that although many would die, there would be many that survived, the edge of the sea here would be icy, never before seen in Australia, they said that things will be very, very difficult, but that the worst was that there would be viruses released that would mutate and no-one would be able to stop them. I rang a friend 300 klms away and she had been woken up at the same time, just feeling that something terrible was about to take place. I have had dreams and visions of ice on the sea shore, and a lot of people huddled in a huge cave. The months of April and May seem significant. On a more positive note, I have been telling myself that possibly with the many disasters in the last week, around the world that I am just getting jittery, a thing I don't normally do. I also feel that it is a hard thing to believe that it will happen so soon, I have had visions and dreams of these things happening in the future, but my personal visions, of my own family, do not tie in with it happening this year, more like about 2005 to 06, My friend sugested that it may be symbolic, so all you psychics out there, have any ideas what an ice age, brought on suddenly, would sybolise. I thought maybe a dislocation of comunication and travel perhaps or just everything standing still financially. Not sure, anyone have any ideas....Thank you..Trish.
February 2, 2003: I see nuclear poisons hidden in morgs with dead people or in dead people.(Caskets)This would be found hidden ..(secrets of Irac) Saddam and Bin Laden. Great floods predicted for the coast Feb, March 2003.Planet, ball of fire flashes though our sky above over the north .This will cause the earth to tilt 1/8 th to the left.Oceans will rise .Energie is very strong from fly by ball of fire. The planet of fire, earthquakes will make loud growl.
Vancouver Island does not sink but it will tilt to its side up overlaping some bits of land.Prince Rupert will have a much wider river...Much longer stretch of water. Many will drown .There will be a new begining of family value or better said ,human value. My visions .By laure.Feb/01/2003
February 1, 2003: Within 2 years, a british prime minister will either be assasinated and/or put on trail for actions against humanity. The action could be the launching of nuclear weapons which would count as actions against humanity due to the severity of such a weapon. It even could be that in this case, the British PM will be a scape goate. Being lured into this action. It is not inconseivible that the USA would ask Brittain to deploy such a weapon and the British get the blame for using it. All in all, there will be very dark times for Britain. Even the queen would not stand by the PM. <Khelben 02feb2003>
February 1, 2003: I came up with some predictions when mapping current events and forecasts against Nostradamus material.
Saddam will die very shortly after the attack on Iraq starts. The entire war will last for 500 days. 100 terrorists will wreak havoc. Food shortages in europe. <Khelben 01feb2003>
January 31, 2002: I saw there WAS a plane crash in East Timor(Indonesia) yesterday. It crashed in foggy conditions into a mountain ! Thanks for the opportunity. I am amazed. It was a Russian plane. I post my original prediction, and my news article to prove the event took place. I have a lot of these happen to me. Thanks, again.
January 30, 2003: Hello my name is David Dietrich. You can use my name if desired.
I feel as many people know that the year 2012 is a very important date. But I feel that its what happens from now till that date that is important. Lots of events and actions that will be very negative will keep happening and progressively become worse and worse. These things are signs of the most important "change" in our mother earth.
Such events as "911" and all the tension of many opposed nations in this world will unfortunately just be the start of this massive change. Many people that are here now will subconsciously "choose" to leave this 3rd dimension that we live in. Mostly because the world is changing in such an enormous way that humans have to basically evolve there body in order to live in these new standards. A good example would be a chameleon. A way to change and adapt to a new beautiful, peaceful and amazingly advanced state of mind that the people left here will aquire. The "vibrations" are drastically changing in this world accompanied by lots of new amazing information radiating through light in us every second we exist here. As mentioned before, this will be too much for some people too handle both mentally and physically, so they will leave to a level that they can handle and be comfortable until it is also there time to "evolve". But these are things that a lot of people must work on. It is sad to me how many people on this earth have lost there natural gift from ancient ways and spirituality. Selling it all for a television set and a busy hectic life. That is what is the biggest void filling this country. We need to learn to "balance" both the day and age we live in with the beauty and wisdom locked deep in our minds. That ancient power just waiting to be released like a genie in a bottle. To trust in our intuition, to not let fear (which is the one true thing that holds us prisoners) get in our way for what will be "a perfect world". The majority of the world are in a dream inside a dream, walking around like the living dead, going to work, worrying about bills, being afraid because of the negativity out there right now. Instead of looking inside of themselves realizing that all the answers lie waiting in the very near future. A future that none of us can really grasp until it is here. A world that will be like nothing you could imagine. But let it be known, it is coming and very soon. I hope all who reads this will be there to share this "new age". Keep the spirit of love, peace and unity alive!!!!!!!!!! To all my beautiful brothers and sisters of the light.... I LOVE YOU................
January 28, 2003: my prediction is simple and came to me in a dream...there will be two high profile american killings in India(prob.within 5 days)the killers will achieve this in a 'trojan horse' type attack...... from pad
January 28 2003: prediction for China, for Jupiter, and the ending or the beginning? In the last part of the year 2003 or the beginning of 2004, There will be a large dam break and millions of people will die. Oriental people will be screaming and running everywhere to get away but to no avail. They will be practically wiped out. On September 27, 2008, a large planet will crash into Jupiter breaking a major part of it off sending debris all around space. This will cause a problem for two other planets and will change everything we know. Axis' will be changed, gravity, lattitude, longitude, nothing will be right after that and we will have to find a new way to deal with the changes.
December 12, 2012, will be the end of time as we know it. There will be another dimension that we will have to pass into. At this time, everything in the world will go crazy. Household appliances, and everything man made will turn against us. Computers will crash. Prisons will open. Banks will no longer have security and looting and martial law will come into play. It will be survival of the true believers only. We will align with another dimension and pass through a time tunnel. We must believe and love and try to live the way we want a perfect world to be so that we can become the leaders in a new 5th dimension. This is, I believe, when God promises us heaven on earth, The new kingdom.
January 26, 2003: I agree with Khelben: if the United States indeed carries out an immoral and unjustified attack against Iraq, the war that follows will turn everything we take for granted in America completely upside down. There will be a return strike from several allied Arab nations, OPEC under one powerful Middle Eastern leader will shut off our oil, stopping our cars on the freeways and our tanks in the desert, and our economy will completely collapse. The nature of this return strike will be severe; our forces are not as well trained as the media have been led to believe. Those young well-fed weak pups will die out there; Bush will be held responsible, as he should for sending them into that hell zone. Our children will die like flies over there; they are generationally SIMPLY NOT PREPARED for the nature of the counterattack that awaits them. Some kind of weird "dust" of a strange color is going to rot their eyes in their orbits, cover them in a pale grayish white substance, then turn their flesh to death right on their bodies. It is a Russian weapon that was sold to Middle Eastern countries a long time ago and has not yet been used. When Americans see their kids dying in uniform, our country will split: 1) the warmongers will demand we go nuclear against the Middle East (exactly what Bush wants), 2) the peaceful people will riot into anarchy and attempt to remove the Bush Administration by force, and 3) the resultant civil war will reduce our country to ruins.
The Middle Eastern man who will advise OPEC to "switch off the oil faucet" is someone we have never seen before. He has always been a bystander in political affairs in the Middle East, but America's attack on Iraq will bring him into the open. He is Nostradamus' "blue turban" and "third antichrist". His swift, decisive nature will win the war for the Arabs and they will see him as their savior. Saddam, bin Laden -- no one will be able to match his popularity. That's because America will fall destroyed by his "strategies". I see Arabs dancing in the streets celebrating the fall of America, believing Mohammed has "delivered" her to the power of Islam. A Bush war will unite all Arabs in hatred of America because of Bush's planned atrocities. I strongly advise we do not begin this war because it WILL NOT end the way we think it will.
January 25, 2003: Al quaida Attack The base will do a great attack on the western world within 3 months. News at twentyfour-seven. Mass movement of populations. <Khelben 26JAN2003>
January 22, 2003: When The USA attacks Iraq, Iraq will hit back and win the fight in such a way that the USA is seriously considering giving up the war. The world is going to look very different from then on. Iraq will be the catalist for a greater arabic power. The Arabic countries will either unite or have a better cooperation. It will be revealed that Al Quaida is the intelligence service for the united arabic countries. Mohammed will gain greater (political) influence in europe. <Khelben 22JAN2003>
January 19, 2003: Hi, well having viewed your site thought I would add my reading of matters prophetic I have been fascinated by the work of Nostradamus for well over a decade and have tried to hold an objective view on this mans writings.
So I thought I would tell of what I make of the famous CXQ72 the penultimate date he gave well it is a thumbnail of the man's life he came to power in 1999 from a plane hence from the skies his other exploits will be to bring the 3rd World Debt to a head and revive the French Monarchy and he will always be lucky in matters of the Military.
Here is a related passage from the Epistle
. And hereupon it is that there is born of a branch long sterile [Mughal] one who will deliver the people of the world from this benevolent slavery to which they had voluntary submitted. He will put himself under the protection of Mars,[War] stripping Jupiter [the West] of all his honours and dignities, and establish himself in the free city in another scant Mesopotamia.[Kashmir]
Yours L Ballaam, Townsville, Australia
January 19, 2003: I forsee an air disaster at the end of January 2003 involving a mountainous region. It could involve foggy conditions. The last week of January 2003 involves multiple murders, and sad stories involving people.
January 19, 2003: I had a dream about an old paratrooper dying.
January 14, 2003: Secretary General of the UN is currently not the most favoured man by Iraqi standards. It wouldn't surprise me if we were to be targetted personally (assasination) for the UN's decisions of late. <Khelben 14JAN2003>
January 11, 2003: This Iraqi thing is going to turn out a complete other thing than we expected. Either the USA will withdraw from the endeavor or another big party will butt in there. It's certainly not going to happen the way people think it will happen... far from it. Khelben (12JAN2003)
January 8, 2003: On January 6, 2003 I had a dream where an atomic weapon was detonated in Washington, D.C. in response to the U.S.'s declaration of war on Iraq. Another possible time is George Washington's birthday as an attack on American values. A sleeper is currently with the bomb, and he works as a computer technician or for a computer company. I also got the name is "Abdul," admittedly a common name. Key agents may be Abdulrab Muhammed Al-Sayfi or Mustafa Abdulkadar Aabed Al-Ansari, currently wanted by the FBI. R. Boyd Blackwell, esq. "Search Engine" and Librarian
January 7, 2003: Possible assassination of a major world figure/President/Republican..maybe a chancellor...An unrealized weak link will allow this to happen.. Possibly from a belfry..a tower.. A large husky strong man may be the assasin..Could be in a country where there is a monarchy..In a village..The color green and bronze in a brocade come to mind,and Alexander the Great!!!???? GREECE......
January 1, 2003: There will be a wonderful new breakthrough in medicine or science, it will change everything, it is a positive thing.
USA:::: The foundations of their lives will be challenged. Something will happen that is quite devestating, it could be a chain of disasters. They will have to build from scratch and be aware of not turning on themselves. I feel though that there will be a new spiritual wave where the people will choose to create an atmosphere of love and hope and careing for one another.
There will be a period of isolation, where either the USA cuts themselves off from the rest of the world.....or there is a disfunction in means by which they communicate.. There will be a period where they will work hard to heal themselves and try to remake the image that they portray to the rest of the world, this will bring major transformation. There could also be at this time a lot of judgement and blaming on the outside world for what has happened and also at themselves.
There will then be a turning point which creates a resurrection with an outpouring of love for their fellow countrymen, listening and trusting more in each other, there will be a strong feeling of trusting their feelings, common sense will prevail, and an inner wisdom rather than rules and regulations. There will be a strong attempt to create a place of sanctuary and innocence for their children.
Then I see a woman President...at the very least a woman who is in charge of the money, or in control of how the countries money is spent. There is an atmosphere of teamwork and co-operation within the Gov towards building a better USA. However...there will be a lot of people who will be dependent on the gov for financial support at this time due to the harsh things that have happened to the country and themselves, there could be a period where these people feel let down and disappointed with the gov because their expectations of how they will be helped to get back on their feet will not match what the gov will do to help, the woman who is in charge will not be a popular person at the time. There will be a feeling amoungst Americans that they have always helped and supported so many countries in the past and now they need a little help it is not forthcoming. There could be an issue of the USA actually needing financial help from the World Bank and having it refused.
There then comes a period where the people of the USA deciede to help themselves and a huge education programe takes place teaching people how to build their own houses, grow their own food, basically how to survive without money, and stay civilized and sane. Apeciation of peoples natural gifts, artistic and intellectual, and craft will be encouraged, building of self-esteem in the community and helping their fellow man, find enough food and shelter....There is impatience at this time also, because of the many restrictions in communication...so that people will feel that they dont know what is really going on out of their own community. This will be fixed however and a great wave of relief and joy and celebration, at the return of their ability to communicate to the outside world again.
There will then be a feeling of victory at what they have accomplished and they will have the admiration of other countries, there will be more confidence in their safety at this time, which perhaps gives them a false sense of security, there is also an analysis of what went wrong in order to make sure it neve happens again.
The USA at the end of 2004 will be standing on their own feet again and either helping their own or putting feelers out to helping other countries achieve what they have achieved themselves. It will be gratefully accepted.
December 31, 2002: with reguard to ben-gurian prediction someone posted I did a search just for the heck of it and foun out its a college university.here are the links. Ben Gurion University ... Ben - Gurion University of the Negev, copyright - 2000 Designed and Managed by: The Text Store. http://www.bgu.ac.il/
2. New Page 1
Our web site has finally move to it's new and improved location at http://fohs.bgu.ac.il/. You will be automatically redirected in 10 seconds. ...
http://medic.bgu.ac.il/
3. Welcome to the department of Computer Science
http://www.cs.bgu.ac.il/
4. Ben_Gurion
A four year, American-style MD program taught in English. The innovative collaborative program with...
http://cpmcnet.columbia.edu/dept/bgcu-md/
December 30, 2002: I've been sensing a major attack on The USA or Israel for a while now. This morning 'Ben gurion' spun through my mind but it is far more than that. The airport (I know there is one) is in my head. It is not intenden to take a hyjacked plane but to disrupt an airport. What if the Main Control Tower were to be attacked by a missile. It could happen anywhere but Ben Gurion is involved here. Khelben <30dec2002>
December 30, 2002" The name Ben Gurion is haunting me this morning. I sense a terrorist attack on Ben Gurion. I don't know what "Ben Gurion" is. Khelben <30dec2002>
Decembe 28, 2002: The plan is to Stalinize America and then use the United States to control the rest of the world. Beware of false psychics and prophets and perversions of legitimate prophesies. The Nazis claimed that Nostradamus predicted they would win World War II. Jeane Dixon was friends with the FBI's J. Edgar Hoover. It's suspected that some of her predictions were intended to enhance Hoover's totalitarian agenda. Beware and PRAY! Betty
December 26, 2002: Israel will be struck by a single nuclear device efore the end of Tevet. -Del
December 15, 2002: I see bin ladden traveling from place to place .He will end up trying to hide in Canada.I can see he was here right soon after the sept 11/attack.He travels with no fear. He has shaved as a sacrifice for his pupils with the gift of external life. I see that there are 2 bin ladden's.One old, one (an actor) but younger.The real one is hurt. I see a piece of his leg. I don't see which one but one of the legs was damaged in the mountains during the war.( It may no longer be there.) He also hurt his left arm and I see a scar on the side of his left eyebrow..He was hidden well for large amounts of money.( Poor people.) Fathers who only wanted safety for their family (especially their daughters) He assassinated all who helped him escape.He says he has mercy for them and they will have life, external life. He wants no witnesses .
There will be a new law in place for different cultures around the world because of terrorism.
North America and Washington will take charge of unbelievable situations during terrorist acts.
I see that there needs cleaning up in North America. Surrey, Abbottsford,Vernon and kellowna.
Clean up in Washington, Seattle and Anchorage.I see terrorist travelling thought Alaska on their way into Canada.( White van, cheap overcoat of fresh white paint over chipped paint,and a new 2003 model gold rust colored car .I see up to 3 white vans (so visual). The whole side of the coast be warned that I see dangerous people there.
I see a helicopter trying to save people or something of the sort.The helicopter will perish during its attempt to save. The hero, I see a name (Tom or Sam or Thomason ) It crashes in a building with terrorist bombers side ways .I believe the hero is a man in his middle 30's.
I see little balloon bags filled with toxic chemicals dust.Biological specs of poisons for all of this world.One area to the next, they will be dropped from the air. We should be careful of ...I see hand gliders,hikers. I believe this has already started to happen.
There is a mad female scientist portraying to be a woman. She's a man. (A mad man.) She / He corresponds with binladden and shaddam.( And Russia )Russian leaders do not suspect any of it.Russia has no Idea.
I see a woman ,she has a ring around her finger .This ring has a tinny pin hidden under third finger.The pin is filled with this terrible poison. Her target .......President bush. She is not from the East .She will get very, very close. She fails her mission and is apprehended.Age approximately 50 to 56.Height 5 5' -5 7'
U.S.A., Canada and England will work very close.Teams of Americans, Canadians and England's soldiers team up to go to war .
We will be so proud.True hero's. This I predict for the year, 2004 and a half.
The war will settle down a little in 2003 .
There will be great disasters.Earthquakes ,floods in 2003
Some of Mexico will sink forever and some of Mexico will receive new land in return.The new lands will rise to surface high up .New mountains,caves. Ancient writing ,pictures.It will be written and drawn up in pictures that will make people believe that the tunnels are a way to the heart of the earth.The tunnels will go deep.There will not be any explanation.
On one end, Mexico loses and gains land.On the other side.... in Greece there will be talk of the ancient Atlantis city rising to the surface.It will rise from the waters.
In the future to come :
I see a piece of earth cracking.Scientist will try to stop this. I see earth tilting to its side at a 1/8th to the left of the sun.Dark days are ahead.I see 3 long days of darkness.It will come in episodes.
Yes, I see thousand of years ahead and I see we will live in elevated solar homes.We will be enjoying a pill or two for food consumption .They'll never see a steak like we do.They won't have any cows.Scary ...thought.
We will use human waste and other waste for energies.This is how we will fly our vehicles and how we will live on new energies.We will divide water particles and somehow make concentrated energies. The containers will be shaped in a 2'',3'' inch to 4 '' inch capsule like battery.
That's it for know .Visions by Laure Dec 15 / 2002
December 15, 2002: Between 25 may and 17 Juli 2003, something major is going to happen. I'm not sure what it is but is has to do with flexing the masculin power. Most likely there is aggression involved. It's going to be all over the world news channels. The end of june is the most important period in this timeframe. <Khelben 15DEC2002>
December 7, 2002: I am Australian so do not know if there is an interest in what I have seen. My guides have told me that there is a bad time coming, especially for the Northern Hemisphere, they did say though that the USA will have to pull out of the Middle East, Europe conflict as they will have too many things, happening in their own country, there will be natural disasters as well as other things, I have seen a virus so bad in New York city, that they will isolate that city, to contain the virus and stop it from spreading to the rest of the country. I was also told that London will have the same thing happening at that time....The positive part of the message was that the USA will pull back from the conflict in Europe so that they could take care of their own country and people, and that the people who will be running the country at the time will do a very good job in getting everything back on track, so much so, that they will have every right to feel very proud of themselves at the way the people of the USA pull together and get their country up and running again.
I did a meditation and remote view on Sep 15 2001 and saw a mess of rubble , then saw a lot of sick and dead because of a virus going through N.Y. city.
Then saw atomic blast in Middle East.
Then sawa lot of people disappearing in Indonesia, because of a similar virus and sickness. A lot of Indonesian deas, then the same sickness hitting Australia, especially Western Australia which is very close to Indonesia, not as many dying in Australia though, perhaps because there are not as many people??
November 23, 2002: Tony Blair of the UK will soon be out of power. In the dream I had this morning, I was watching a television broadcast, and people were talking about it being "a sad day" and about "Tony being out of power." It was not clear to me if this was involuntary or voluntary, his absence. The news reporter was talking about "the fall of the government," and there were implications of death(s), or insinuations of terrorism, and I saw 10 Downing Street in rubble.
November 6, 2002: The other morning, after I woke up and was just barely awake laying in bed, I heard a voice which sounded like a news broadcast coming from inside my head. This happens almost every morning, but it has always been just incoherent babbling, like I'm dreaming that I'm watching CNN, and none of the words or phrases from these semi-conscious imaginary news broadcasts are memorable enough to remember after I become fully awake. But the one I had the other morning was so clear, loud, and coherent, that I became fully awake the instant it was over, and I remembered all of it, and still remember it after several days. It was so clear, that for a few seconds after getting out of bed, I could have sworn that there was really a TV or radio on in my bedroom that had just been playing. The voice was talking about terrorists' plans for a future attack. He said that terrrorists are planning wide-scale shootings of Americans on New Year's Eve, the instant that the clock strikes 12:00. He said that the shootings would occur in multiple places throughout the U.S. at exactly 12:00 a.m. New Years, and that they would occur in bars because that's where and when there would be multiple large groups of people being together, and all these large groups would be at different locations scattered throughout the country at this exact same time. When I woke up, I thought about it, and realized that it wouldn't work for the entire country, because there's 4 time zones in the U.S., and therefore people would be celebrating the clock striking 12:00 at 4 different times. So after these shootings occur at 12:00 a.m. EDT in bars from Maine to Florida, all the people from Chicago to Los Angelos would be scared off and go home by the time the clock struck 12:00 a.m. CST.
October 29, 2002: Lisa Marie presley and Nicholas Cage/Robert Blake and Ramsey Murders I think these two will have a child together withing a year and a half. I believe Robert Blake will be acquitted of murder charges, and I think the JonBenet Ramsey Murder was committed by Patsy Ramsey when she mixed prescription drugs with alcohol. The family covered up the crime
October 29, 2002: I feel there will be an air crash within a few days. I see the possibilities of fog and a mountainous region, possibly a collision as well. I have not had any flashes of intuition, but I listened to clasical music all day, craved graham crackers, and wrote poems. I have my own site relating to this research....I am open about the process...
October 22, 2002: As strange as this may sound Ms. Elizabeth Taylor will be hospitalized for a drug (pills probably) overdose but she will deny taking any. The Green River Killer is the Sheriff Reichert who is
in charge of all the investigations except the FBI's. And machine guns will be stolen from a base in Europe by an Ex Marine for al qaeda. You won't laugh and I won't either cause the Army will bang on my door. I sent all this out. I accidently sent the paper that had not be edited. Please send this information about the Green River Killer on please. There is also over 2 BILLION doses of smallpox vaccine in a room under or near a bowling alley on a military base. It was stored in 1970's and it is 60% good. Those 90 million doses that Pasteur offered the U.S. was given to them to certify and package for the U.S. Program back when we stopped the immunization program in the 70's but when we stopped the program our
government just forgot about it. Pasteur had to keep it because it was U.S. property so they just stuck it
on the shelf and the execs sold the 90 million+ vials and pocketed the money.
No private company makes up 90 million doses of any vaccine. That is more than they sell in 20 years. If
it was theirs they would have stored it in France orsince smallpox was active in the third world in the
70's used it in africa. There is enough for half the world or more in that vat. If you want to locate
great. There is also Bubonic plague vaccine and few others in there. Maybe at Dugway. I have a friend who is a U.S. Senator Aide who helped me locate it. The Pasteur insitute owes us the cost of the vials as well as the rest of vaccine. Lets make a class action suit.
In the email that I sent the Douglases congratulating them I stated that there were two terrorist cells
planning attacks on them. They are the greatest of Americans and Icon that we can trust and believe in.
These are what the Taliban want to selfishly take from us. I told whoever answers his emails that they must
give them to him when they find out the she is pregnant or they will be held criminally lible for gross negligence. I also told them I would send the emails again and nothing has been sent back. Any
suggestions, without sudden movements? I'm trying to help here and the FBI seems to think I want to show
them up for having predicted many things before they did. Go to http://www.psychicpathways.com/precognition.html then to Oct 6 2001 where I predicted the Golden Gate Bridge being a target and the Taliban offering the U.S. Osama Bin Laden. The CIA confirmed the Talibans offer 7 days later and the FBI the Golden Gate Bridge becoming a target on Nov. 3.
On Sept 13 2002 I called the head of security at the Golden Gate Bridge and told him that was the date of
the attack. (I'd never called them before.) The waitress in Georgia over heard them say the date so
they changed it. It's going to happen soon. There are many things that are going to happen soon.
In mid November I told the FBI there were 100 terrorist cell in the U.S. that were going to strike
simultaneously. They know this but they don't even tell the president. I am dead serious. In mid December
they announced that there were 150 cells. They have not struck and if they struck once every 3 months that
would go on for about 35 years. They don't want it to happen that way and they are used to always having
their way. but Osama does not listening to them and they don't understand that. We don't get our way all
the time like they have so we understand what they don't. Call me and I'll tell you just about anything that you want to which is of God. I'm attempting to get vadidation in whatever area I can at this late date. That is the why of solving the Green River Killings. Then there is a little ~5'4" CIA director who thinks
he might get his little group and kidnapp me. The pieces of s..t who think they are God should be shot
by thier own people before they stupidly get us all killed. The little idiot should have gone into
business with his dad when he had a chance. He won't live longer than a month if he continues with it. (I
apologize to the rest of the people reading this. The CIA has this one guy who thinks he is God and is
willing to bet many millions of American lives that he is. He's worse than some of the Taliban and he doesn't
believe in anything but himself. He goes right on anybody's email he wants. He removes them. The truth
of the matter is that God can go over to the other side in a second and the U.S. can go to hell very
fast. Please call me 928-203-9202 Thank you for your help, John Ted Alsup
September 27, 2002: I had a dream that something bad might happen on November 11; it could
involve water and a bug of some sort; maybe contamination of a water supply.
September 19, 2002: Liberty here again - very good news. Dream last night: a dark-haired female spiritual guide sat across a table from me, showing me Akashic Records for America and the world, beginning late 2002. She has the following announcement. These words are taken from her, verbatim, as is: "There has been a shift. Good will prevail. I cannot inform you how President Bush leaves the White House, but his exit is ordained and is now unavoidable. Do not feel lack of compassion for him. On our plane he is a great force who has by his actions galvanized the powers of Good, and thus has engineered the Shift to LIGHT that has been so long prophecied for all you people. Nod to him with grace. He has made the new age possible. Here is what will occur. A new President comes, who has feminine energy. He or she has traveled in Europe and brings back ideas from the Continent to make America strong. Those who are on Good's level will greet the changes with sighs of relief. Those in Darkness will gnash their teeth and find these changes suppressing and suffocating.
September 18, 2002: Within one year after the attack on Iraq, the USA will roll into an economic downfall. The most likely cause of this is deflation. But sure is that USA's economic and military power will vaporise within a very short period. Then comes the more interesting times of man on earth.
September 17, 2002: I saw that Saddam Hussein made a deal with Russia for enough Plutonium to make 25 bombs. The cover is that it is a lesser grade of Uranium but the boxes themselves come from the 'plutonium place' in Russia which should say 'wake up it is too late.' I have many deleriums of ultra realism on my web site.
September 12, 2002: I have been afflicted with dreams for as long as I remember. I will not bore you with past ones. The last one that seems to be important was about
2 weeks ago and was very short and simple lasting only about 2 seconds and,
as usual, symbolic. For some reason, orientation is very important in my
dreams providing important clues to the meanings. I was laying in my bed
facing the sky and my head toward the east (although I realize now that my
head really faces the south southeast). I see the sky above but with no
stars in the background and I see a light...actually looks like the flame
from a missile... red, white and blue, but I can't really see the missile,
I just assume that it is one. And it is a single light...there are no
more....and it is travelling at high altitude from my feet to my head (west
to east or maybe north northwest to south southeast). My interpretation is
that this has something to do with Iraq or Israel but I can not make any
more sense of it than that.
September 11, 2002: I had a vision of April 4 involving the Golden Gate Bridge. The number 44 looks like the Golden Gate Bridge. I did some research; George Bush is our 44th president.
April 4th.1870 Golden Gate Park established by City Order #800
August 5, 2002: My May 29th predictions concerning scandal at ABC News may be about to come true. First, I said,
July 28, 2002: have a feeling that something terrible, much worse than 9-11 is going to happen sometime between August 15-20th. I don't know what it is, but it is going to be huge. I have also seen a huge water catastrophe in New York, it kind of looked like a giant tsunami. Many will be killed because they won't believe the warnings and leave when told. I have also seen a tremendous earthquake spanning at least 3 states. And stragely enough, California is not involved in this earthquake! I also see terrible fires raging across vast wooded and grassy areas, spanning two states. George Bush will see a second term, only to be assasinated. World War III has already started, but the climax of the war will be the most torturous war ever seen. And the climax of the war will be fought on the American mainland! There will be such a huge draft for soldiers that women and men will be drafted. Andd finally, I see the "War on Terrorism" stooping to new lows with the use of biological and nuclear weapons by the end of 2003. These predictions are terrible and I hope that I can come back and read these later and see that they did not happen.
July 24, 2002: Well lets see now....Ok...my thoughts become reality when I do not share them so these things may not come to pass...but anyway #I see New Orleans being swept by water..canal street will be a canal again,but only for a short time so there may possibly be a hurricane to hit the city. #I saw a man lying face down with a helmet on..a pilots helmet,flight suit...his body rigid...probably one of those gruseome Time magazine cover photos...
#2003 will be an idol year...whatever that means.. #This really sounds crazy but I see an island coming up out of the sea soon...maybe near Mexico....a city #I think we are giving terriorist more credit than they are due...they started plotting 911 after the 93 towers bombing failure..that is my belief...2001 just happen to be the year it all came together..could have been 1999 for all we know... # People told me I was crazy for closing my 401k in 99 and buying a condo...hmmm
July 20, 2002: Nostradamus predicts a time period when America will lose its civil liberties. The American people will realize how much they have taken their rights and freedom for granted. Over time, America will re-gain its civil liberties and gain a new appreciation for them.
July 8, 2002: Psychic Friends: I believe the following keywords would best describe the current and next presidential eras. The Bush presidency would regrettably be marked by "frustration". This doesn't necessarily reflect Mr. Bush's persona. Our next non-Bush presidency will be noted for its 'return' or 'come back' factor. A previous vice president, a past unsuccessful presidential candidate, or a politician within earshot of the White House will be our next president. The flexible, and in the extreme, the deceptive element of this 'return' factor could somehow bring back Mr. Bush to another 4-year term at the White House; however, this should not be confused with the post-Bush presidency where unexpected returns and comebacks are the norm. Needless to say, how lucky will our 44th president be in serving four more years. Submitted by Emile Farran
AND
A gaze through the prophetic sphere points to this worrisome vision. The fate of the Sears Tower in Chicago is directly intertwined with the World Trade Center towers' in New York. It is the 'event after', a 'next in line' reflection of its doomed precedent to the east. After all, could it be a mere coincidence that both towers lend their floor heights to a most ominous of numbers- the 110, which in my book translates to "prelude of evill". I wish the Sears Tower was built or increased to 117 instead- 'The Untouchable One'. But given what we have, prepare for the 110 doom. However, beware watchful eyes, whereas evil hands triggered the awaiting doom of the World Trade Center, the Sears Tower will come from an incidental fire within. Trouble or the 'Enemy' will come from a totally unexpected source. Interestingly, the tower will be out of luck at the zero moment- an advanced, supposedly reliable element that should have worked, won't do so. Timely, and I pray, not too elusive clues are due as of this summer. Hopefully, alert miracle workers would then save the tower. Submitted by Emile Farran
Currently the October premonition will bring great sadness on a world wide level. October will not turn out to be a good month. Anxiety, sadness on a great level. See two great losses/incidents.
June 27, 2002: A MUST READ!! GOOD NEWS!! On May 1, 2002 I posted the following here at Psychic Pathways: May 31, 2002: On February 6, 2002 I wrote the following: "Today
(Feb.6) my guides have told me that there is an 83-86% chance that Dallas, Chicago and New York will be simultaneously nuked on July 4, 2002." ..... I consulted with my spiritual guides yesterday (Thursday) for an update since July 4 is just 5 weeks away. The following information is what they provided: Chances of attacks has increased from 86% to 89%. Two additional cities have been added: Jacksonville, Florida and Seattle, Washington. The time of the attacks will be between 1:00 pm and 4 p.m. Eastern Standard Time....End of relevant guide info.
Last night (June 20) I again contacted my guides for an update since July 4 is just one week away. Here is what I was told: "No so-called "terrorists attacks" will be forthcoming on July 4 as the
powers that be that control the attacks fear a major backlash from the citizens of the U.S. Since September 11, 2001 the penedulum has swung against their efforts as the American public is now more informed and have become doubtful that Islamic terrorists perpetrated the 911 attack.
Further, the patriotic fervor has waned as the public has become more suspicious of those in power, what they knew and their political motives and agendas. Due to local law enforcement's (not federal) hard work in everal large cities, many of those who were to carry out a July 4
attack have been removed. The powers that be are not feeling confident at this point in time and are running scared. However, they do feel that there are other ways to carry out their agendas without causing permanent damage to America and the public psyche." (end of guide info)...
I have checked with my guides every week inregards to July 4 terrorists attacks since posting the May 31 posting. At one point a couple of weeks ago the probability of another attack was as high as 93%.
After completing the communication with my guides "The Mall of America" near Bloomington Minnesota seemed to be important. I have never been there, but understand it to be the largest mall in America. I would be careful if you are planning to visit there on the July 4th weekend, or
possibly change your plans instead!!
June 27, 2002: This is NOT a prediction but a fact. In the near future it will come out that John Kennedy Jr.and Princess Diana were both murdered so they could not interfere and/or expose the
911 cover-up and its true perpetrators. Those in power have planned the 911 attack for a decade or more and have systematically "removed" anyone who would get in their way or prevent the plan's success.
There are many dots that can be connected when one studies the 90's. (from assassinations, plane crashes, Y2K, the dot.com blow-out, Wall Street rip-offs to the tune of 200 Billion and now Enron to Global Crossing, World Com. et al) All dots can be connected to the same bunch of elitist crooks in the politically connected intelligence community who also brought you the Savings and Loan scandal, HUD rip-offs and Iran/Contra of the 80's. Some of these same elitist political crooks go as far back as the Kennedy assassination.
Ever check out the number of Senators, Congressmen and Governors who have an "intelligence" background??!!!
The American press turns a blind eye and presents these same elitist power mongers as expert commentators?? Go figure!! David Danader@webtv.net
June 18, 2002:
June 14, 2002: I sense our gov. knew abot n.y towers ,i also fell the seound coming of Christ is within the next 4yrs. that the propaganda with thecatholic church, is how they will introduce the 1 world religion on citizens. go to fonts on your computers, then weblings type in QNY 33 you the fed. # of the 1st plane to hit towers- you will see a synbyls of- aplane-crossbones &skull-jewish star david-towers. scarry but true caps on letters U IN The MOON Raven
June 12, 2002: News just in: President Bush is not as weak-witted as he is pretending to be. I have done a Tarot reading, and this is an act calculated to deceive the Western World. To supplement the dreams and images I have unfortunately been receiving about our international situation, I began doing Tarot card readings about world affairs beginning in January 2001. The first reading, done January 31st for a client who asked what Bush's Administration would be like, foretold, "It will be a dark time for minorities. Bush will invent or create something during his time in office -- Three of Coins -- which he expects America to obey and submit to. Once it is clear to him America rejects this invention, he will show his true colors, and it will be the worst moment in America's entire history." Until now in June 2002, I thought this prophecy referred to the weird tax stipend Bush offered early in his reign -- the $200 to $400 "refund" some Americans received. Now the true meaning has become clear, and from now on I will be constructing a webpage with up to date Tarot readings on this Administration, because what the cards are really talking about, I think, is the sweeping new reforms in domestic surveillance and this Germanically-named "Homeland Security" Department.
June 10, 2002: I hope this doesn't happen. Dream this morning showed a large city, late morning or late afternoon, cloudy gray sky. Jets passing over city, then one airliner crests in out of nowhere and crashes into several buildings near a very large, broad city bridge. It looks like the jet was having trouble landing. Its landing gear were extended. The jet may be out of fuel, because there is less fire than usual, although a great deal of smoke, and the destruction is considerable. Dream showed thousands of people turning to run, screaming. Surrounding buildings in complete panic. Most people run in an east direction. The explosion of the jet and its crash were shown to have happened in the southwest part of this city. Some of the people running away were movie industry employees. There was mention of a movie filming being interrupted by the crash. The words "The Day Bridge" or "Daybridge". Also the word "Dale" or "Dell" was involved. City resembled Chicago in some ways, Los Angeles in others. There was water nearby but I didn't see it. In the dream I was more concerned with running away. The whole scene was panic chaos.
June 8, 2002: Bombing of a Nuclear Power Plant in Ohio in retaliation for a bombing by America in the Middle East. Dream approximately one week ago.
June 8, 2002: Mexico City inundated with cloud of dust containing the plague.
June 8, 2002: In the early morning hours (approx 4am) I was shown a tall sktscraper in a major metropolitan city. This buiding has some correlation to automobiles/cars. The sound of Auto Tower or Car Tower/Building was uttered. The only connection I can make is the shape of the building was much like the "Chrysler Building" in NYC. At the base of the building I was a man and a woman who was supposedly his wife whom he was forcing to enter the building with him. He wanted to blend in and look like tourists however she knew his intentions. Even with the threat of death she pulled away from him in horror screaming for help. The man enters the elevators looking to get as high in the building as possible. He is wearing a jacket somewhat like an army camel colored fatigue coat. Underneath he is strapped with explosives. Looked more like packets of C4 than dynomite. HE is scruffy looking bearded, medium complextion. Though his hair looks lighted its a bad coverup of darker hair. He has left a clue to his intentions online. Apparently he has mass emailed a list of his demands or perhaps his manifesto. It appears almost cartoonish in nature which would require a certain amount of computer skills. The deadline time pops out from the screen to me and the rest of the message is blurred. 3:30 PM. I see no date the vision ends. Pray for change and enlightenment. Remember much of what we "see" are the futures IF we stay on our present course. Change one element and we change that event. Peace to you.
June 4, 2002: Today, i witinessed something unique. As I went to break from work, I sat and had my ususal cigarette. It was extremely hot her in Miami the last few days and looks like there is no relief in site. But as I enjoyed the warmth of the air from being in airconditioning all day.................i saw something that quite amazed me. a time line coming back as if i was in a warp of physical beings long since who have grown older. It was my cousin and her husband as if they were young again. i gazed at there faces thinking I have seen them somewhere before but when I looked closer they were individuals I had known for most of my life but didn't put two and two together. These two individuals had reverted back or I reverted back seeing the youth they once had. The station at Miami International Airport for departures was crowded as I sat and perched myself for that satisfying smoke. But in an instant, all had disappeared besides these two youthful figures. They spoke in Italian..........not that the significance of language had any bearing on the actual moment.................but............it was there faces I was drawn to. I finally thought that time was now changing for all. A funny inside feeling came upon me that didn't exactly feel normal. It was like I had entered into a dimension that I would only be allowed a small glimpse of. When my thoughts had finally reached sanity levels, the two had walked down to the entrances of the main airport.........E departures and never saw them again. The platform suddenly became teamed with people as if that five or six minutes of sight had disappeared. The feeling of oddness still persisted in my stomach. I got chills and couldn't figure out why I would see relatives in a younger state. Was it because time would be changing for all of us? Let's see what else might happen in the coming days. I have been the person who was describing the feeling in my throat not too long ago.................That since has subsided and has developed into a new sense. I think it's facsinating that elements of physical disturbance are finally developing into psuedo psychic awareness. I will update soon. As I stood up to leave an American 767 shot upward towards that unbearable heated afternoon. It's grace, which once I regarded as a marvel of human ability to enhance itself..................suddenly seemed a curse. D
May 31, 2002: I also predicted the nuking of India by a rogue Taliban in the Pakistani AF (see: December 28, 2001). I predicted that Osama was making nukes for NY, Washington, rome,etc.here was a mistake though in a way. The three or four that Osama are making may only be atomic bombs. Those will be used to start at war so they can get about 70 more.
Those will be used in the US and elsewhere, not the three he made. Oh, yes. It will look like Americans did it. That is why the Medical waste and other stuff has been found. So it will have the signature of an American bomb. It may involve a Paki fighter made to look like a US
plane. That starts off a lot of things. John JA
May 31, 2002: On February 6, 2002 I wrote the following: "Today my guides have told me that there is an 83-86% chance that Dallas, Chicago and New York will be simultaneously nuked on July 4, 2002." I consulted with my spiritual guides yesterday (Thursday) for an update since July 4 is just 5 weeks away. The following information is what they provided: Chances of attacks has increased from 86% to 89%. Two additional cities have been added: Jacksonville, Florida and Seattle, Washington. The time of the attacks will be between 1:00 pm and 4 p.m. Eastern Standard Time. End of relevant guide info.*** If you strike a line across a map of the U.S. connecting Jacksonville Florida to Seattle Washington and then strike a line connecting Chicago with Dallas, you will have drawn an almost perfect cross, the head pointing East. According to the Knights of The Templar: Sept. 11= 9, 11 (9+1+1)=11 July 4= 7, 4 (7+4)=11 Study Knights of The Templar. It is a religious War (Crusade) after all!! And we are poorly armed!! In my opinon it's going to be a long 5 weeks!! danader@webtv.net
May 29, 2002:
May 29, 2002:
May 29, 2002:
May 29, 2002:
May 28, 2002: I recently have come down with a severe case of allergies. Never had them before but in the last 2 years, I have noticed my body changing. The symptoms are not of the stardard cases with watery eyes or nasal dripping but with the tightness of the throat. The attacks come on slowly and I can feel them probably for a day before the onset of a severe tightning of the larynx and throat area. All right........so what you are saying. Well, I have found that immediately after, something disastrous will happen on a scale of the degree of tightness. This occured before each recent news event..........the amtrak derailment in florida.........earthquake movement in california......plane mishaps throught the world.........etc. Just today........the feeling of the strange allergy has started again and I feel something is about to occur. The tingling effect is almost like there are hands surrounding the neck area. I can take any medication for this and nothing seems to help. The feeling will always be there until it decides to leave on it's own. I believe something big is coming. I don't know what it is but it will happen within the next week or two. When I actually pinpoint events and feelings of this odd physical behavior and how they correspond, I will try and write in with more specific information. But for now I want to wish everyone God's Grace and Be Alert. Know your surroundings and Watch for Things that do not seem routine. D
May 23, 2002:
May 22, 2002: I'm not sure what exactly will happen but something of a large scale will occur on or near May 26, 2002 changing many lives. I sense a great sorrow at this time. The "vision" involves something to do with trains. Perhaps all the recent train mishaps are just precursors to what is to come. We are being prepared. Since February 2002 I have been getting messages in dreams. I am not sure if the dreams and the visions of trains are related to the rest. First I was shown something about a train that crosses a bridge that looks somewhat like the Golden Gate in San Francisco. Many will perish others trapped inside. Then also I was shown a City in what looked like the North East. I saw a building that was brown with a semi-circle/crescent edifice.I also saw many children near this location.( or children had been there in the 1960s& 70s) I saw an address on the building in old Frank Lloyd Wright style block metal lettering almost an antique bronze color. What I could see of the address was 55 Borlan. I was shown that in the 1930-40s this area had been a place where a famous mobster was gunned down in the streets. The news reels would have used the phrase " the streets ran red with his blood". Out of curiosity I did a search on mapquest and there is a 55 Borland Street in Brookline MA. Still not sure if that is the right City or State. I'm not sure if this is where the event will occur or if the perpatrator will have some connection there. The only significance I could find on the web regarding the date was that a Full Moon will occur on 5-26-02. That date is also Vesak a Buddist holiday. (The day Buddha attained enlightenment) as well as the Holy Trinity for Catholics. I pray this was one of the dreams that is only a dream. If not, please pray for the souls that will be involved/affected.
May 19, 2002: I had this dream the night of 05.09.02 I was walking with my son in Georgia..(I have never been to Georgia) it was a coastal city.. I could see the water was so beautiful.. it was in the evening..I remember walking down the road and I saw antique houses turned into museums/gift shops.. I remember there were aircraft carriers parked about a mile or two away from the bay.. we were walking along what was a restaurant row.. I remember hearing planes coming in for landing.. they were jets.. they were colored blue and silver..my son pointed up to the sky and right in front of us.. about three or four planes went down.. they exploded.. we started running away from the water and as I was running.. I heard someone saying that Pakistan was responsible for the planes going down.. they used a new technology called "crystals" that were placed in the water and were triggered by noise.. causing huge explosions.. as I went running I was wondering what Pakistan had to do with Georgia and why or how did the "crystals" get this close to American shores... end of the dream.. mpp1827@yahoo.com
May 17, 2002: I feel that an earthquake will happen in western washington within the week. possibly around a 5. quake
May 16, 2002: June 2002 I had a dream of great porpotion involving the heat wave that has hit the south west region of the United States. Water will become like gold, much more vanuable than money. I saw a great fire consuming a whole city. Water will become the south west's main concern.
May 1, 2002:
April 30, 2002: Nostradamus predicts Pope John Paul II will be assassinated, along with his entourage, on May 1st in Belgrade, Yugoslavia. He also predicts there will be a disgrace in the Royal House of Windsor. The Prime Minister will be killed in a plane crash. A bomb on the plane will cause the crash. His death will cause a scandal in the royal family.
April 15, 2002: A strange thing either has happened or will happen soon in the Kandahar area with some 'Alliance troops'. They were being made to repackage the Plague I think (or Botulism) and one had a very bad accident. They thought the cans had plastic bags inside and inside that was the plague. They were wrong though. The plague was inside and there was no plastic bag. Some of the material they are preparing for our men (so the battle for Kandahar comes to a very short end) comes from the Korea area, some from Iraq and some from Russia (they all package their Biowarfare agents differently). Anyway, one of these men opened a can and the vacuum created lifted some of the plague up in the air. Suddenly the wind came up and kind of just rolled that plague across the camp infecting about 50 men and answering the prayer of a thousand troops who want to know what the Taliban is getting ready for them. About Saturday April 20, 2002 those men will come looking for medical treatment. Some will die in the street. They will look for some real professional
treatment but their senior officers will try to keep them away from the Americans. Good because Plague is pretty infectious. Of course our medics could patch them back together and maybe do it in time to kill our troops in about a week. This is about the only warning that our troops will get before the men at Kandahar are annihilated in one big crushing blow. It will take about 15 minutes to kill them to the man. They will use everything short of Nukes. Those they are saving until later. There will be poison gas and it will be so fast and so complete that the Taliban think there will be no way we can find out that they used gas. They think that
but the cannon shells crudely painted white are in plain view by the hundreds beforehand. Hundreds of men will use bullet proof panels and lots of high explosives. They will already have their cannon sighted in beforehand when a shot is fired on an area a little away from our camp but in an arc to it (to get the right distance). There will be skid marks from the tracks of the cannon that was swung around. I have seen this and even Nukes going off in the U.S. for many months. There is even stuff going to happen near my house and
nobody even wants to know. Big stuff that would blow the lid off of the Taliban and al Qaeda. Even Russia
will stand exposed with it. John at the pretty lady balsackab@yahoo.com
April 2, 2002: A helicoptor filled with several important people will crash very soon. Probably within 48 hours of this post.
March 21, 2002: This is going to occur soon. There will be an attempt to hijack an airplane but the passengers will not let the man. I see him shoot himself up through the chin committing suicide that way. It is probably NOT symbolic. He is a sympathizer of Sheik Omar Saeed and it is an attempt to use the plane to barter for his release. Like I said it does not work. The gun is a brown handle automatic that is given to him by a flight attendant who has a gripe with the airlines and is getting even this way. The gripe is very old (like a year or so). It's a military issue pistol. It's shoots a 1200 fps bullet, probably a 9mm. I hope he doesn't kill everybody. There are others in the plane who are going to help him once he takes over but they never get to act. The plane may go down. John balsackab@yahoo.com
March 6, 2002: Had a vision this morning.. I saw a U.S. Continental (?) Airplane.. trouble with the plane..was going down fast. No fumes or explosions. As if the plane was being forced down. mpp1827@yahoo.com
February 25, 2002: I feel that western Washington,Puget Sound area, will have a 3-5. earthquake before March 5,2002 wolffwind
February 25, 2002: On February 23, 2002, I had a dream showing there is much more to the Georgia crematorium matter, than people know at present. Police investigators using DNA methods will prove there has been long-term involvement with necrophilia, by one or more of the owners and workers, meaning those folks had been having sex with younger female corpses. G. B. Clark
February 24, 2002: The weather will become more abnormal every year. At first, the Winters will be warm and undistinguishable from the Summer. Then, the Winters will become colder and the Summers will become hotter.
February 23, 2002: 02.23.02 several premontions: First: an urgency to focus on Europe.. especially Italy and France.. something is being overlooked in that region.. Second: October.. Third: Bush must be careful where he travels...Fourth: saw Saddam Hussein in a meeting with several leaders.. not just Muslim leaders.. All of these visions/premonitions came seperately..I am not good at putting things together or interpretation.. I only see or feel these things.. mpp1827@yahoo.com
February 20, 2002: Had a vision three nights ago.. today is 2.20.02.. saw the country Russia.. will be receiving "news".. something important coming up with Russia.. conflict or heated disagreement..
Had another vision last night.. saw Saddam Hussein in a private meeting with other "leaders".. he is "planning".. interpreted by me that the world will soon find out his plans after they have been done..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
February 19, 2002: There will be another simultaneous attack on Washington D.C. and New York City.
February 18, 2002: from a friend i predicit emptyness unless the world follows peace
February 17, 2002: Bloodshed breeds more bloodshed. These words, disconnected, came, and I do not know all of what they mean, I leave that to you: take hold of...land pyramids predestine...in loco parentis...DNA antiquary going to come out...spirit...immigrant...promised land induce misname...kismet...make one's mark...sensitive mental...halt catalyst sign appropriate reverberator African temporary...Archangel..."found a friend in Mary"...reductio and absurdum..."do you understand?"...Hungarian...John's book...self-contained...Masonic..."call a spade a spade"...in the
clear...heretic...in the offing...disc, red-shift...wolf release Judas Tree...magic...give one rope fight backgrapple...land mine blast...Kyrie Eleison...target...in nominus Deo...agape nativity Muhammedan Janus-faced...Horse...Interpenetrate...at large...equinox...ghost word...Cassandra...bring to justice...fitting...gnostic...Hawthorne...bloodstained, bloodshed...journalist...repatriation. T.J.G.
February 14, 2002: I had a dream and in the dream God said he was releasing the horse in the form of money. There was a courtroom and I kept seeing a $50 bill and someone was saying something about a $1000 bill, like they were compairing the two. The dream has bothered me ever since so I am posting it here. I am not much of a Bible student, but after this dream I opened my Bible (for the first time in years) to the book of Revelation and found a passage starting at Revelation 6:5 that resembled my dream. Would like to hear from anyone who has knowledge of Bible prophesy regarding my dream. bdande@hotmail.com
February 11, 2002: had a dream last night.. I was driving through a city.. large city.. I turned around to get on the freeway.. it was raining , cold and dark.. I kept seeing the time 7:45 over and over..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
February 6, 2002: On January 20, 2002 I predicted the following: "The world will be glued to their televisions some time between February 4 and April 1, 2002 as again "bogus" terrorists attack America." Today my guides have told me that there is an 83-86% chance that Dallas, Chicago and New York will be simultaneously nuked on July 4, 2002. If you take a divider and place one end of the divider on Dallas and the other on Chicago, then swing your caliper from Chicago eastward, your caliper will land on Long Island NY. From Chicago to the south your caliper will land directly on Pensacola, Florida. Located in and around Pensacola and areas to the east are numerous Navy & Air Force installations. Are these equal distances a coincidence? Danader@webtv.net
February 6, 2002: Al Qaeda notices our interest in Afghanistan is lessening, especially Congresses (The fourth plane was headed for Congress. Our who involvement in Afghanistan was planned for by them (Those bunkers that the Taliban are in are hidden from ground search and that is unheard of so they planned for us to invade before 1999. See my web site at http://www.elijahisback.com for complete details. To keep us looking for them in Afghanistan they will create at least two terrorist attacks in the US. They need more time, ask me why I saw a news stand with a stack of Wall Street journals. Up to the Right in prominent display was the USA Newspaper. Below it were several papers and perhaps to the right two to a few LA Times. Upper left were foreign papers. Magic saw the Sears tower and later I said that's it. I keep thinking near the north edge so it must be east or west. (Perhaps two planes). Under the Lincoln Memorial there must be tunnels as they will set it on fire or try to by filling the underneath with perhaps LPG. The flames will go for several blocks. It will be in the early morning and probably before the Sears tower airplanes are hijacked. This may not occur at the same time. There will be a probe on Kabul of several hundred men but we won’t know that. For us it will be ‘of indeterminate strength’ as they want very much to elicit a full response in order to gauge it. Men near our bases will be watching through binoculars and counting. Best plan is to send planes out of alternate airfields and hold back some. Either that or just hold some back. I keep hearing 'over run'. I don't know if that is us or them though. Also do not take any prisoners. They had their chance to surrender. Surrender should not be negotiable now. The Taliban forces are often said to fight to the death. They are of a nomadic race that cannot take care of prisoners so they only take those prisoners that they will torture to death. Elijah/John/Mohammed and Magic SenDom
_______________________________________________
February 6, 2002: Incidentally in this dream, as we ran screaming the name of the airline towards the people emerging from their houses to see what was going on, I had a strange feeling come over me that spoke, "It will be found out that another airline has been doing this to American Airlines. Very sad. It will be learned.
February 6, 2002: I deeply regret having to put this here. Dream, 2-6, at 6:00 AM: I and some friends are seated outside in a brisk wind on an overcast day. The air seems subtropical and this may show the location where this could happen. We were cheerful and commenting on the wind, and calling out our predictions for whether the next breeze will be stronger than the last one. Suddenly, looking up, I hear a roar and see black smoke that I think is a stormcloud. It is not. An American Airlines jet is actually flying backwards across the sky, low enough that we all see the logo on its tail very clearly. We are amazed to see a jet flying backwards and then it sinks in that something is very wrong. The jet tips tail-up and seems to start whirling slowly in the air, head over nose, nose over head, as if something is trying to force it to fly backwards and then crash, but the pilots are literally wrestling with it, trying to keep it in the air. The jet is trailing sparks and black smoke from its underbelly. My friends and I watch in horror, and the jet is so out of control we fear for our lives on the ground. After a terrible, valiant, surreal struggle, the jet goes down nose first in a plowed field. There is no explosion at first, but we assume all aboard are dead. We run screaming to people in house nearby "American Airlines! American Airlines!" Someone's voice says DC-9. There is a neighborhood near the crash.
February 4, 2002: had a vision..look to Nice and Italy.. kept seeing Nice and Italy?? I dont know much about that region of Europe..I saw these words exactly.. "forgotten..Nice..Italy.." repeated over again.. mpp1827@yahoo.com
February 2, 2002: Regardless of the planned security at the Superbowl, another "distraction" will occur.
January 28, 2002: Pakistan about to see major changes. It is strongly felt that within 4 years, Pakistan will no longer exist as one unified country. There may be an attempted coup by bin Laden sympathizers within 8 months, suddenly and overnight. The effort will fail as many Pakistanis have an ethnic grudge for some reason against bin Laden's sympathizers, do not care that these are fellow Muslims, and are erratic, unstable and unpredictable. Bloodshed will be intense in some places and the violence will be severe. A nuclear attack is being planned there against Russia and the United States, but it will fail and in fact that same attack will backfire and be used in Pakistan, against Pakistan. Many wounded, irradiated and dying will try to cross Kashmir to India for food, relief and medicine. India will see unrest as many Indians surge unbidden to the Kush to drive the dying back.
January 25, 2002: This is not a shocking prediction. Maybee for the dutch people. I predict that the royal marriage in The Netherlands will be posponed because of the death of one of the grandparents. The marriage is scheduled for February 2, 2002.
William van Es
January 22, 2002: Nostradamus predicts a small earthquake will occur in
Italy and will cause the "Leaning Tower of Pisa" to
shift and stand straight up.
January 20, 2002: The world will be glued to their televsions some time between February 4
and April 1, 2002 as again "bogus" terrorists attack America.
January, 15, 2002: Something kept telling me to come to the psychic registry. A hindsind of something that I let get by a little. While staring at the convenience store as I pumped gas at 8:30 a.m. on September 11, 2000, I thought of how lucky our country was not to be occupied by foreign troops such as the Chinese. That was all. Magictodo28@aol.com
January 15, 2002: dreamed on January 3 that I saw two men putting one carry on type bag into a car trunk and then closing the trunk. It seemed as though they were in an airport parking lot. I sensed danger and had a foreboding. The dream ended.
January 13, 2002: dreamed last night I saw U.S. planes bombing a city.. people here against the bombing.. red dirt/sand.. no tall buildings in the city.. small warehouse type of buildings.. I saw five or six U.S. pilots.. wearing white.. some did not make it through the bombing.. died in enemy fire.. I saw on t.v. their names.. one was from California.. one pilot was female..
January 12, 2002: The death of Prince Karim, Aga Khan. I don't know if by violence or natural causes. Time, probably sooner than later, these precognitions (in distinctive dreams) seldom take longer than a few weeks. Usually much less.
ann_muir_@hotmail.com
January 9, 2002: I was born in july 1977 23rd day I know that I hold the secret to the identity of the antichrist cause I can end the terrorism cause the world depends on who I am and what I know about LSD. I know my familys don't believe me cause they want to be me cause they are all cops and they have lied to me for a long time I figured the governments lied to everyone and drug war and I hold the name of God Orginized partners of crime the bible was written by the godfather LeRoy Sutton I was a FBI deepest secret to stop terrorism I figured out the bible on my own but the terrorist is DEA I know who he is and his DEA dad cause they told me their cops but suprise IA international affairs (Iowa owes me the world) fbi/dea are the real gansters but not no more. cause my family beat the world for the people and I know that they left it to cause they are cops and Omaha or Iowa can't entrape me US owes the biggest debut cause of drugs so that is why I will get my chain of casinos real gangsters are christian me I just know what the fuck I'm talking about.
January 8, 2002: The death of Madonna in 2002/2003
January 7, 2002: Unfortunately China will join forces with terrorist forces worldwide and attack the U.S. or try in 2002...
January 5, 2002: assasination of Arafat Jan 6, 2002
December 28, 2001: There may be a limited Nuclear exchange between Pakistan and India. Pakistan will start it and only use a few bombs to get India to respond in kind. This is being done by rouge elements of the Taliban within the Pakistani Air force. They want only the bombs and their attack is only a smokescreen so they can steal them! They are willing to kill hundreds of millions of innocent Pakistani’s and Indians in order to do so. . It is going to result in 200 million dead and it will destroy Pakistan.
India will respond more vigorously with a large over 5 MT bomb (maybe 15MT). The Taliban will split the loads of ~70 atomic and 3 Nuclear weapons into two shipments. One going on train near by and the other one across desert area in trucks to two airplanes. Those will be in the US and being used against us within 2 weeks.
December 26, 2001: I have seen the atomic war starting soon between Pakistan and India. It will stop at about a dozen or so and leave both coutries in ruin. The entire purpose of it is so the Taliban can sneak off with the entire Nuclear and Atomic arsenal of Pakistan.
December 22, 2001: I forsee impeachment of our current President, after CIA complicity in 9/11 and Anthrax attacks are revealed. A "True Greek Tragedy" of Epic Proportions says the World Press. Watch the headlines. Cheney heart attack leads to loss of support for Bush, and those on the Supreme Court that put him in power will turn against him. Gore rightfully installed as President before Jan. 20, 2003. Until this happens, you cannot trust a word out of the media.
December 18, 2001: I've had several dreams lately which seem very meaningful. The first one was in the spring or summer of this year, and I hadn't thought about it until recently, until something reminded me of it and I realized that it was a very eerie dream that I could still recall in vivid detail, even after several months. It was about a guy in my unit at work, who I don't really work with or associate with on a regular basis. He was complaining about his insurance company, because of a claim he filed with them regarding the garage of his house. In the dream, the guy kept saying that he was fighting with his insurance company to pay for damage that was done to his garage. But the insurance adjusters kept denying his claim because they said that his insurance policy didn't cover damage from something called "Ultra-Lights". The guy didn't give any detail what these "Ultra-Lights" were, but just kept saying that the insurance company's claims adjusters kept denying his claim because they said that one of the
The other several dreams that I've had have happened within the last two weeks, and are like reoccuring dreams that I almost had back-to-back in separate nights, but seem really frightening. They were all exactly the same - I was on a massive roller-coaster of a huge hight. The roller coaster seemed really sturdy, with all sorts of steel, brick, and mortar around. Then the roller coaster suddenly collapsed, with pits and holes developing around all the steel and cement. People didn't die, but they were falling from massive heights, and getting hurt with horrific pain. The main injury that they kept having was massive pain in the abdominal area, and they were all so scared as they kept vomitting. They seemed to be crushed into things, and were screaming out in fear as they were vomitting really violently.
December 17, 2001: Rethinking this word: Obiad. Now even more uncertain about its meaning...saw a news piece on TV about Ramzi Yousef (WTC bomber 1993)..this word was on his computer, with flight/date/etc information. I don't know for certain what this is or what meaning it has, but it is significant. December 2, 2001: I don't know what significance this has, but I woke up this morning with the word "Obiad" going thru my mind over and over. Obiad is Polish for Dinner. Now, if the word "dinner" was going thru my mind, it would not have such a significance for me. Obiad forced me to pay attention to it. I don't know a lot about Advent, but I believe it starts either today or yesterday. There is some significance with Advent/Catholic Church/Obiad/Polish...the Pope is Polish. Watch for events around this time.
December 15, 2001: April 17, 2002 - on the 41st anniversary of the Bay of Pigs Invasion. A major 'earthquake' will hit the west coast of USA. A pyramid vision seems to suggest San Francisco. Could also be an explosion. Location could also be Pakistan instead. Regardless the death toll will be very high. I hope I am just crazy :)
December 12, 2001: Registery: Date: November 12, 2001 at 12:41:40
Subject: nightmares of children..
a few months ago I basically dreamed about a theme park/full of children getting hit with a plane..
but in the last few nights, I've had dreams where children are looking at me.. and they are bleeding from their mouths .. they are looking at me and yelling.. it's weird and scary.. but what I noticed they were little boys and they had school uniforms on.. black/navy jackets with a button up white shirt and khaki shorts.. they were clean cut and had tall socks on.. looked almost like European children. (?) This nightmare came back two nights in a row.. they looked angry and were bleeding alot.. this is a terrible nightmare and I havent been able to sleep. Hopefully it means nothing. mpp1827@yahoo.com
December 12, 2001: A vision of a girl w/ a older man's voice saying "Gay Lord"
Demember 11, 2001: There is going to be a major offensive in Afghanistan. A rout that will leave the commander without his head if Americans don't listen to me and do what God tells me. It can be a sound defeat for the evil of this world if Americans listen. Afghan soldiers who recently came over to the side of the Northern Aliance will infiltrate and get close to our men as our men get sick. First it will be thought to be stomach flu, etc. It is a resistant strain of Tuleremia. Why don't I say something 'safe' like 'Anthrax'? Or that it is from bug bites (there are no bugs to bite in December). Because it's Tularemia that was given to our soldiers in food, drink and smoke. 'Oh, I saw him drink from the bottle or take a toke just before he gave me a swig.' No they didn't the Afhani just held the hash pipe to his mouth but didn't inhale or he didn't drink from the bottle. And this is just the beginning of about 8 major germs Americans will see. It will take a double dose of Ciprofloxacin just to slow this one bug dowAs our doctors try to figure out how they got Tularemia in winter they will start to be surrounded by Taliban turncoats. Suddenly they won't have to worry anymore since the mens throats will get slit from ear to ear. These are probably going to be the Marines. Then come the fighter aircraft(from?).
TA balsackab@yahoo.com
Oh yes. The tape that the president is going to release of Ben Laden will prove out what I say but not the part released to the public. The part the government keeps so that you won't get frightened. What business do they have not telling you that you could die? They are nuts to keep this information from you.
When the roof falls in remember who to be angry at. Two hundred 'events' are planned.
There is going to be a major offensive in Afghanistan. A rout if Americans don't listen to me and do what God tells me. A sound defeat for the major evil of this world if Americans listen. As Afghan soldiers who recently came over to the side of the Northern Aliance infiltrate and get close to our men, our men will get sick. First it will be thought to be stomach flu, etc. It is a resistant strain of Tuleremia. Why aren't I a good boy and say something like a 'bug' or 'Anthrax'? Because it's Tularemia and it is just the beginning of about 8 major germs we will see. It will take a double dose of Ciprofloxacin just to slow it down. It's a special strain because someone breed it to kill and there is only one thing that will kill it. I'll tell the president what will cure it and who gave the Taliban this God awful stuff and will supply the other 'vermin in a bottle'. Forty soldiers will probably have to die before they in though. I'll be sure to include the names of the people who do not help me in my letters of TA balsackab@yahoo.com
Oh yes. That tape will prove me out but not the part release to the public. The part the government keeps so as not to frighten you with the truth!
Remember this. The FBI can cause the destruction of the United States not by doing anything but by doing nothing and allowing no one else do anything. This includes giving the president any advice at all.
The FBI have done nothing so far. If they accomplished anything or would allow me to tell them what to do so that they could accomplish something then that would be different. But who are they to say anything to anybody until they prove themselves in this arena? And it seems they won't allow other agencies to help Americans either. It seems they are so selfish and that they don't want me to help. They would rather have those deaths on their hands it seems. Millions it seems. So remember, they caused it. Tight ass mother fuckers.
Two hundred 'events' are planned and I know how to kill Osama Ben Laden too.
If I am put in ‘custody’ the Northern Alliance will fail. A week and everything falls apart. Ten days and that is the end of this world. My nature is light. If I stay free and thrive we can win. Those are the two choices. Light or dark.
December 7, 2001: Dr. Win Ho Lee is going to run! There may be a counter offensive in Afghanistan. A large drive down from the Hindu Kush in the NNE (near Bagram). A large fifth column will be involved. Gee, those last 1200 turn coats did look like they were foreign die hard Taliban. Plane(s) from a neighboring country privately absconded with by pilot(s). (It may be more than one depending on several factors like how fast the first is shot down. All told the forces will be about 20,000. A charge of Hannibal (the second in command) from near the airport. Those fifth columnist could sneak in around our guys and use those knives on them. This attack is mustered primarily against the US forces to destroy the US forces. This can be stopped if the right persons read and act on this information. TJA
December 3, 2001: I can see a plane exploding. The Taliban is going to make a counter attack. Multiprong includes forces across on the other side of the airfield (in the north Afghanistan). Men will attempt to slit Americans throats. There are three stingers. Maybe three scuds. One maybe more fighter planes that defect from another country. I'm missing a lot of things. That number two that the 'US killed with a bomb'. He is on the other side of the airfield. This could end with the US getting kicked out of Afghanistan. JA
December 2, 2001: I don't know what significance this has, but I woke up this morning with the word "Obiad" going thru my mind over and over. Obiad is Polish for Dinner. Now, if the word "dinner" was going thru my mind, it would not have such a significance for me. Obiad forced me to pay attention to it. I don't know a lot about Advent, but I believe it starts either today or yesterday. There is some significance with Advent/Catholic Church/Obiad/Polish...the Pope is Polish. Watch for events around this time. Gidget400706@aol.com
November 29, 2001: I had a dream this Thursday morning (11-29-01) and it's the first dream i've had about the terrorist situation. I was scrolling through a terrorist plot on the computer and it had a sketch of the Statue of Liberty. kwarp2000@yahoo.com
November 27, 2001: A dream November 27th: two explosions in two cities. I was told Los Angeles for the first one and Salt Lake City for the second one. "So this was the threat to the Midwest," someone said. Terrible destruction but loss of life not as bad as NYC.
November 25, 2001: These are not "new" predictions per se, but I have never "published" the information I have been given by my guide. However, in my diary, I have written down the following (and am "buzzing" and am expecting more information soon...and will publish as it comes in to me). I realize because it is "old" and is not published online or anywhere else other than in my own personal diary, it loses some credibility for many, but I also feel very compelled to put it out here. Anyway, here is what I have, exactly as I wrote it in my diary Dated 11/24/00: Another "Gulf-type" war...somebody named simon, sounds like simon. When? Beginning end of 2001.
And my last entry is information I was given, after I had asked for further clues on this war and what may happen in the future, dated 09/26/01: This is a long one. they hide and wait. There is more to come. They come down from the green mountains. They have guns and rifles and other weapons. they are waiting until we are "comfortable" again and back to our daily lives. Rebuilding will have begun and the economy will be on the rise. There will be more policing of public places and people will feel a false sense of security because of this. They will strike again, this time in ground combat, quickly and efficiently. Their aim is to destroy as many and as much as they can in the shortest amount of time. they are not after monuments or buildings, but out to destroy lives. they strike in cowardly ways, hiding, sneaking, retreating and striking again in increasingly vengeful ways. They will strike again at or around Christmas. THIS is the event that will take us into a full-blown war. Be cautious of mid
They will strike at the masses-NY again and again, rudimentary bombs, simplistic ways of destruction. Fires will burn for weeks. LA. Chicago, Seattle, Whatever is in Utah, Nevada, Phoenix, Dallas, Austin, San Antonio, Louisiana, Atlanta, DC and another Virginia location, Mississippi river, New Hampshire, Maryland, One of the Carolinas. they want to "exterminate". They will come in the night. there may or may not be some form of nuclear attack..they have some resources, but not enough. "Troops" will invade major shopping centers. they will just drive vans thru store fronts and begin shooting.
Move into the countryside, away from mass populations. Check banking institutes thoroughly--any with mid east or oriental connections will fail. Invest in European or American stocks/markets only, especially Germany. In the next 5 to 10 years: As we go into a deeper war, America will close her borders. Trade will fall off. We will seek ways to become more self-sufficienct. Canada will close her borders. The military will take over air travel, trains, bus lines. There will be guards at each state border, although we will be able to freely travel within our own country.
The attacks will have stopped. Our banking and financial system will decline for several months...depression levels. Those who have lived in excess will fall the hardest. We will be forced to rely on ourselves and each other. Japan will no longer be one we will have open trade with. No more credit cards. But financially we will survive and come out stronger than ever. Oil prices will drop sharply. Fincances will drop to 1960s prices. We will cut off our need for oil products. There will be enough reserves and activity toward self-reliance that we won't need to buy from mid eastern companies. We will be a society similar to that which we knew in the 1950s.
The war will last many, many years. We will survive but must adapt to the changes. Our government will change-it will still be democratic. Our "departments" will not change but the ways in which we do things will...priorities and policies will have been forced to change. Many jobs will be with the government initially, but then eventually will return to the private sector...lots of "service" oriented careers..medicine, social services, etc.
In order to survive: 1. Move away from the cities. 2. Avoid large areas of spending and events of mass population. 3.
Keep up your health and endurance. 4. Learn to be more self-sufficient and within a family/community unit.
As I receive additional information, which I feel may be coming within the next several days, I will post it here. Gidget400706@aol.com
November 24, 2001: Based on Nostradamus's prophecies and astrology, a huge event will occur on February 6, 2002 that will affect the entire world. kwarp@yahoo.com
November 22, 2001: through out the past year or two i have had reacuring dreams about tornados, but they would come in a group of 4 or 5, every time i tried to see my way clear of going one way there was one there, they were destroying everything in it's path, my feeling of this dream is that the world is in for many hard ships, our country is spoiled with riches and what goes up must come down, could it be our country needed to see how we live and treat others, is it distruction that would surely bring us together as brother's and sister's? sad to say but perhaps it is true, while i was so busy with my life and you so busy and concerned about your's...we neglected those less fortunate, it is time we come together as family or the best way we can, love is a lesson for us to learn, to feel, and most of all to give, we create our distruction now we must stop so we can rebuild "together"... J.R
November 20, 2001: Dream: This is a dream I had the night of November 19th. 85% of my dreams come true, but occasionally not literally, because they have to be filtered through my consious mind. So, take it as you will.
Ultralights (if this is what they're called). Individual ultralights falling as "bombs" upon people in a field. I remember seeing "ultralights" and then one falling smack to the ground, killing the person. Someone then shouted "we're being bombed", I looked up and saw another one falling, and moved after someone called out my name and before it hit me. This ultralight was powered by an Australian and he made it to the ground without dying, because he knew how to land.
November 19, 2001: GUYS I WANT U TO REMEMBER THE NAME SHAWN BISHOP LIKE IN A PRIEST BISHOP FOR HIS LAST NAME....I REPEAT SHAWN BISHOP.....I HAD A DREAM 3 MONTHS BEFORE 9/11 ATTACKS AND I HAD A DREAM THAT SHAWN BISHOP WAS IN A COURT ROOM BEING ON TRIAL BY ARABS OR MUSLIMS PLEASE SOMEONE EMAIL ME IF THAT NAME MEANS SOMETHIN PLEASE!!!!! MY EMAIL IS KEVINKEVINUS@YAHOO.COM
November 18, 2001: I saw during my waking hours this morning.. Jesus saying to me.. "I have loved you as many aeons and aeons ago".. ("you" meaning all people)mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 15, 2001: Nostradamus predicts a bomb will be placed in New York harbor. It will blow up the Statue of Liberty. It's a new type of nuclear weapon that kills the population but leaves the buildings intact. (Neutron Bomb?)
http://ozarkmt.com/prophecies.shtml
Kwarp2000@yahoo.com
November 12. 2001: I saw this a few weeks ago..I almost foregot about it.. I'm not quite sure if it is a dream or vision.. but I saw a church type of building with a "dome" on top on fire.. there was a small cross on top of it..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 9, 2001: P.S. That information the man demanded was in English. Neither of the men spoke English and could not read it. It was a raid/trap/setup from the get go. The ladies keep a low profile and did not have any literature in Arabic and nothing that could be construed as promoting Christianity. They were there simply to help the Afghani people, something the Taliban didn't want as it showed them up. Jpinel
November 9, 2001: The two young ladies who were being held prisoner in Afganistan were killed. A man came to their room and demanded to know about Christianity. He pointed to a paper they had on the desk with a cross on it. They handed it to him. not knowing who he was. They then asked for it back when he began to leave. Another man came in, the girls demanded the paper back but they pushed the girls back and frightened them. Thinking the first one was drunk and that they were going to rape them, they let them take the paper to get them out of the room. The paper explained Christianity. It was only an informative paper. It did not promote a Christian point of view. It was non sectarian and very balanced. In America the men would have been held and tried for trespassing, assault and coersion. The young ladies did nothing wrong. They passed quickly to heaven took a while to get their place (seating), turned around and returned to Afghanistan as avenging Angels. Watch out Taliban, these ladies are going to be after you, all the w
November 9, 2001: During my waking hours. I saw these words "the media is lying". The feeling I got was that the whole truth is not known regarding current events. mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 7, 2001: On 11/7/01 I dreamed I was standing in a tall Hotel looking out a plate glass window upon what looked like a Football stadium. I saw what I knew to be a bomb, placed in the stadium. I ran down and out the Hotel and looked up and there were concrete ramps/freeways, at least 2-3, it was very sunny. I ran into a smaller hotel that was kind of rundown. I felt uncomfortable there and my friend and I left and ended up in what was a gymnasium, basketball, maybe high school or YMCA. It was heavily constructed to withstand earthquakes. I needed to go back to the seedy hotel and I was told that the apt was on the 9th floor. We kept expecting the bomb to blow up any minute.
November 7, 2001: I had a dream I looked to the sky and saw either meteorites or missiles falling from the sky, they hit a helicopter and a university, the man standing next to me was killed by the shrapnel.
Leah
November 3, 2001: 1. It’s not 6 bridges. It’s 6 events. Only one is a bridge. I sent this information to the FBI before they said it was 6 bridges.
2. A lot of questions about the Anthrax like why he put in the letter it was anthrax and why they later found out he mailed the first letters from near his home can be answered by reading my prediction on Oct. 18. He wanted to get it tested for free. He sent it to the news so he could get the answer on TV. He worried a secretary somewhere would be misdiagnosed as having Pnenonmia, die and then he would never find out the results of his free test so he put in the letter that it was Anthrax. He was expecting a little comment about halfway through the news about anthrax. Then when he knew it was real he would go Big Time. He went nuts when it went Big Time on it's own so he just kept doing the same old same old.
3. Also on October 6th on this site I predicted one suspension bridge would be hit. I was three weeks ahead of the government (scroll down to Oct 6). It’s not 6 bridges, it’s going to be 6 terrorist attacks only one of which is a bridge. (I sent this information concerning 4 different events in the US (and two abroad) to the government before they issued the '6 bridges' statement.) It was a punctuation error that caused their misunderstanding. It was written on a piece of paper by a non-English speaking person. Read the following:
I am going out six times this week starting tomorrow to the beach to buy a hot dog with a nice Anthrax condiments, sit by that new 'hot dogs' sign, wave to our Anthrax mailer standing over in the distance and watch the airplanes land a little over a half a mile away in my light jacket.
How many times am I going to go out? How many times am I going to the beach? How many hot dogs am I going to eat? That sentence is quite cofusing except for: DO NOT EAT ANY HOT DOGS AT ANY BEACHES.
balsackab@yahoo.com
Novemer 3, 2001: I was walking across green fields. I think I was walking home. Although it did not look familiar to me, I felt I was walking home. Then someone told me to take a different route home, and when I got there I needed to leave as my home would soon be under the ocean. I think it was a guide/angel. I did not see him but I heard his voice. When I got home, I packed some things, and left. I was on foot walking across green fields again. I talked to him as I went walking, I asked him why my home would be under the water. He said that when the poles shift many homes would be under the water. All of a sudden I saw the earth from space, and I saw the the earth crumble into itself. I saw Europe fall into the inner part of the Earth and the left side of the Earth expand over the rest of the "top layer" of the Earth. I can't explain it too well.
When I saw this. He said that after the poles shifted many changes will occur rapidly, he said it would be the start of a new beginning. End of the dream. mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 3, 2001: During my waking hours this morning, I saw the word "Argentina" twice. I had the feeling of a catastrophic event there. mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 2, 2001: My psychic friend has been getting a vision for several months now, which has increased in frequency lately. She sees a handsome man standing at a podium in a tuxedo, on national TV, and someone shoots him. She was worried about the Emmy awards, and was relieved when they were canceled. She stopped having the visions for a while, but now they've come back
November 1, 2001: I had this dream in mid Oct., I can't quite remember the exact date. I wanted to share it with someone but I didn't because I felt kind of weird talking about it. I wouldn't want anyone to think I was trying to be some kind of psychic! Anyways, in my dream I saw two dark skinned men of mid-Eastern descent under a large bridge (at the area where the bridge meets the land). They carried no tools, no bags, but came out quickly and purposefully. The feeling I had was that they were going to do something to the bridge. It scared the heck out of me. I woke up in a panic. A couple of weeks later now we're getting warnings that further attacks could be forthcoming. I'm feeling very anxious like most Americans and this is probably one of millions of bad dreams people have had. It's so hard to go through all of this. I'm praying...I hope everyone else is too. I love our country. God Bless America and protect us.
October 31, 2001: Came Sun Oct 28, details filled in on 29th. Attack on nuclear power plant in the NorthEast US between now and Nov. 17 I see two possibilities - explosion and partial meltdown, although not as serious as terrorists hoped, or takeover with hostages, the explosion scenario feels "heavier" to me.
October 30, 2001: Please pray that an incident does not happen at the Yankees Stadium game Halloween night. Pray for peace surrounding this event and all the players and their families. Pray for protection of the spectator audience. The reptile force trying to control America would love this terror opportunity: it is televised before millions and the results would be psychically catastrophic. CONCENTRATE ON PEACE SURROUNDING THIS BALL SERIES NOW. PLEASE.
October 30, 2001: US presidential troubles. US vice president Cheney will die from a heart attack. US president Bush wil not see the end of his term. The next president of the US will not be elected.
October 29, 2001: prediction of terrist attack happening on Halloween this year wednesday october 31st...or a series of many in various cities in the US....
October 29, 2001: Vary soon, possibly days: underground fire, probably Texas. Also, a large, above ground water pipe with gasoline in it. Also believe it's Texas. by a Retired Psychic Also Bin Laden headed for NW end of Afghanistan, to leave country
October 28, 2001: I see an explosion as I look accross the street.To the right side is a 4/5 story high dark grey building.
To the left side a 4 story white / light coloured building. The bomb detonates in the foyer / lobby in between the two of them.
Shrapnel and breaking glass flies out onto the street in front of them. Altogether some 90 - 100 people are killed and wounded. This will most likely be in south-eastern London. quite possibly on Halloween or within the next week. Northern irish loyalists, not IRA, don't want peace! I was given 5 days notice for the Swiss tunnel accident, but wrongly predicted it would be in Austria. I was given 10 days notice for the terrorist fuel-air bomb, yet wrongly assumed it would be in Israel. Let this be the test. It is now the 5th day from this warning. AKS
October 28, 2001: by the year 2020 the world will be divided into four power blocs. This will come gradual but it will be clearly seen by 2020.
1/ the western world, Europe west of the Urals, the USA, canada and mexico,
2/ Islam, the current islamic nations, plus some small conquests in parts of now christian africa and south east asia. Israel will be no more by 2050.
3/ the techno/communist states. China, (now united) Asia east of the Urals, Parts of South America, Possibly Australia and new Zealand.
4/ The destitute states. The Southern half of Africa, The pacific islands, those parts of South america which are not communist.
Bloc 1 will have a pretence of democracy, you have the right to vote, but only for the options presented to you. You live to consume and work as if this cycle is broken the states fall apart.
bloc 2 Rigid devotion to Islam but much as it is today, a mixture of strict and moderate states, but no secular islamic states. Feudal agricultural states make up this bloc and technology is the work of satan in their eyes, only for military use against the west. The west does not interfere for fear of bio weapons and nuclear retaliation. The islamics do not attack the west as the ruling powers are less religious than they are power hungry. Mutual assured destrution keeps he peace.
bloc 3. Not so much communist as it has been in the past, but each small village or settlement regulates its own affairs and does not interfere with others. Recycling is the way of life, and population control limits the need for new resources. In each village or town or hamlet, the people live in their own small worlds and have freedom of thought, and freedom of expression, so long as they submit to the majority rule of their village etc. and do not seek expansion. These people are happy. what passes for military is more a consolidation of identity as a whole bloc than a threat to others but the solidarity is unnoposable.
bloc 4 Its a jungle out there. I mean it, it ranges from MAD MAX (Road warrior film) beyond thunderdome to jungle warfare, to robinson crusoe cannibalism, it is a fight for survival. economics consists of kill or be killed. as their resources for export are depleted, their fall further into savagery and slowly the other three blocs take the land for 'lebensraum'
This shall come gradual and be seen to be happening as the wars of the early 21 century set west and islam apart and unreconcilable
by 2070 it shall be complete and last a few hundred years until the fourth bloc is fully absorb by the islamic and western colonisation.
stevehudson2001@yahoo.com.au
October 27, 2001: from the land down under one will come who claims to be the light. beware of him, he is evil and subverts the pure heart of the true. i see him falling near the end of 2002, however his people will fall first.
October 27, 2001: I have had many dreams and visions of Christ walking the earth as a man. Only women believe him.
He has lived many years in Canada but is now in Australia. He was born in 1944. He accuses the United States and England as being ruled by demonic forces. He accuses the CIA as being the terrorists behind the Twin Towers and Pentagon destruction. He accuses the CIA as being the instigators of the Anthrax attacks on US citizens. He says beware of the Israeli Government and its hidden agenda. Beware of a man named Lieberman.
October 27, 2001: Novemeber 8 2001 Julian date ends with 2222, will see Jupiters position in space will be 777 by the 9th. Isaiah prophecy of the coming of the Lord. Increased Anthrax attack in America. CIA revealed to be the 'terrorists' who take orders from George Bush Snr. Links to military government revealed. More information and proof will come from Australia to impeach Bush. Al Gore is set to take presidency, Liberman set to take control of the US behind Gore. Liberman is the Jewish Messiah the Antichrist. All is a controlled plot. Jesus is in Australia, the true Christ.
October 26, 2001: Watch out for liquid soaps used to wash dishes, especially around Christmas season. A voice is telling me that there will be bacteria in soaps...They will be able to open these, not sealed. Criminal element involved. Anxiety. Be careful. The chemical is a weapon, used for mischief, and to frighten. Be forewarned and take precautionary steps. Do not use.
October 25, 2001: Dream last night: It will be found out John F. Kennedy, Jr and his wife were murdered by operatives and the crash of the plane they were in was deliberately caused by sabotage of a skinny little white cable that looks like fat fishing wire. This is located inside the underbelly of the plane and it is sticking out at an angle right now where the plane is being held for study. It looks munched and chewed but it was sawed by a man who works for the CIA, who was wearing black gloves. He squints a lot, has sandy-silvery hair, reddish suntanned skin and does a lot of stuff out west for Wackenhut Security. He's one of GHWB's best friends and they go way back but he has served as secret service for presidents starting with Ford (?). This man killed JFK Jr and it was done to damage George magazine so none of the weird stuff happening now would be reported on. I was told by the dream this information will begin to leak out November. 2001 or 2002 was unclear, but November was very strong, around date John John's father was assassi
October 24, 2001: Liberty says: Prepare to be startled by crackling sounds of gunfire across the world in unexpected places. Men wearing spectacles, learned men, break into unusual buildings and fire upon the instigators of the coup against US. You will hear strange places at first. Budapest, Prague, small towns in Europe and Asia and Canada. Assassinations of unlikely people, such as "hackers", "software designers", etc. Almost all of them men, these will die. Then the killings continue and start taking out names you recognize. Yugoslavia has tie to Bush conspiracy. The death of this man will trigger a landslide of public evidence, and a man (from Australia?) with an accent will finally step forward with enough compounded evidence to make a case. UN hearing. "Impeach Bush" cry many voices across world. If Bush is not impeached or worse, this will end in the courts. Light has made inroads. Better end is possible. War may not occur if you concentrate on peaceful specific outcomes now. Meditate on these EVERY NIGHT AND DO NOT F
October 24, 2001: More from Liberty: you may not think it so, but you will see men and women in America and other countries, but especially my Republic, attired in the buckles, stockings, ponytails and breeches of olden time and Revolutionary Era. These will march in the streets of Washington, then other major cities around the globe carrying my image and shouting for change. This will influence fashion. You will see it so. A new party, The Patriots' Party, will emerge in America. Believers are well advised to vote for and support it, for these are after my own kind and are forefathers and mothers of a new democracy. This will be the end of the Republican Party. Democratic Party may be absorbed into TPP. It is up to them and them alone. TAKE CARE: the internet may become subject to domestic viruses soon, planted by the supporters of the coup against you, my children. Trade passwords now to protect your communication when this begins; do not open any message from an unknown bearer, no matter how enticing..
October 24, 2001: "January 1, 2002?" i think something big is gonna happen on 1/1/02. July 11th was a life changing day for me. two months later, the terrorist attack occured on September 11th. November 1st is gonna be another life changing day for me. Something big might happen on January 1st. a huge disaster. ohn1@lycos.com
October 23, 2001: Dream occured about 3:am Tuesday, Oct 23.Dreamed I was asleep, then awakened and told I must leave very quickly.Ilooked out the window at a scene of desolation,not so much of damage but of the absence of people.I knew that some type of attack was coming and I had to flee.When I awoke the feeling of doom stayed with me. I had the same type of dream and feeling of doom in the early morning hours of Sept 11. Hector.
October 23, 2001: What will be attacked in the United States. Many things, including the dam at St. Petersburg (is there a dam there?). Bin Lauden is in Pakistan with his troops. Under cover. He has made it difficult. Bin Lauden is Muslim faith, he (Russian) believes it is his duty to attract soldiers for his cause, he wants to annihilate the United States. Pakistan. Where will the next attack be in the United States.... On the West Coast, where..Oregon...it will be a dam or filter...ground missile attact hurt people, near the coast, they are coming. Russia. Bin Laudin field soldiers will assess the civilians and make damage...he will plant damage weapon of terror destruction...explosion...near mine field, near the west coast...prison.
Channeled message.
October 23, 2001: #1.I "see" a man, 5'9", dark hair, eyes and moustache, inserting via syringe a "poison" (cyanide, botulism? I am no chemist) into scores of containers of bottled beverage (it appears to be water)...he appears either to have access to a bottling facility or a large distribution warehouse, so that many may be "infected".November 24th came to my "ear"...he therefore has a mechanism to re-seal the bottles. This is currently in planning stage. One person. known as a 'misfit" , a pudgy "geek".He is Locally a joke...not so much terrorist related ...more like Columbine kids=revenge. ...the numbers 27 and 31 have to do with him.He is an adult.Though the media reports of danger will stop further consumption of this beverage, a number will die prior to this news coming out.
End #1.
#2. Bin Ladin has NOT left Afghanistan. He is under armed guard in the northeastern portion of Taliban held territory- a 'bunker" domicile of sorts...guards have orders to kill him if coalition forces get close...this will make him a martyr. Taliban leaders most concerned with their way of life continuing...One man in particular with flashing black eyes and a scar in his right eyebrow who hates women ("the necessary scourge of our race") will engineer events so as to martyr Bin Ladin, and discredit US motives so as to try to deep six the coalition's unity. He will nearly succeed. 2003 (August) sees major events with regard to him. He has many affiliates in many countries and access to much money...some of it from Bin ladin himself...but much will be lost to assets being frozen. This man smells of smoke somehow...he is a sadist and his confederates know it...a serial killer who in our country would be called a psychopath...this behaviour ultimately trips him up when his nearest comrade shoots him in the back iannaly@webtv.net
October 22, 2001: SOMETHING TERRIBLE IS ABOUT TO HAPPEN IN LONDON: BETWEEN THE 22nd OF OCTOBER (TODAY) AND THE 31st OF OCTOBER OF 2001. I WOULD NOT WANT TO BE THERE.
October 21, 2001: I saw these words, two weeks ago, flash before me during my waking hours: "the time to leave is now, the time to go is now" mpp1827@yahoo.com
October 20, 2001: I was watching a major network, the scrolling tape read "No vaccines available"
October 20, 2001: I had a premonition that the muslims of the world will unite overtly and covertly to fight against the Western powers. India will joijn the west in a big way and will play a key role in the fight against terrorism. This war will devastate huge polulations and will eradicate a large portion of the world muslims and christians....and finally there will be peace. this peace will last a long time. countries will learn not to initiate wars. and mankind.whatever will be left of it will be happy and peaceful.
October 18, 2001: Deep, rolling black waves overcoming many people. Chaotic energy. Much fear. Inability to evolve.
October 18, 2001: With the blessing of God I got one prediction right. Since it was the only one I said would happen right away the others I made still come true. On October 6 I said: He(Ben Labin) is being forced to move today. He may be handed over to the US today or within a few days. The Taliban made the offer about 6 days later but the US refused! I also made a prediction about a teacher sending anthrax.
After I wrote that prediction down visions of another person involved in sending Anthrax started coming to me. From where I do not know except these visions are unusually clear, I was able to see the man almost as if I were floating next to him. (I was having this vision of him as I drove to the school.) I once worked for the police on some murders as a psychic but the visions were no where near as powerful and directable as these.
This man is far more insidious than the teacher. I saw a ~5' 4" Arabic man, who sent the letters from NJ. This was simply an experiment as he wondered if what he had was real anthrax. He doubted the illness and death would even be diagnosed as Anthrax so he took little care to go out of his way when he mailed the letters. He is associated in a way with Ben Labin. He is a creep as far as the women are concerned near where he lives (an apartment) and nearby. Otherwise, he makes perfect sense. He got the powder from several sources away and thought maybe it was no good. Now he knows it is good. He is thinking of about 5 methods of distribution. If he had more time he would take flight lessons. He has a scar near (within about 1 inch) his hair line. It could be going into or is in his hair. Diligence is all that is needed to catch him.
October 17, 2001: I dreamed on 9-13-01 that the terroists would attack "pharmaceutical". Tied to Nevada and possibly California
October 15, 2001: On waking this morning I realized that a teacher is the person who sent the Anthrax. Makes his feelings known to those around him including students. One student may become inspired to contact the FBI. Two others have doubts about the teacher. The teacher has been investigated before bythe FBI. He had to move before quickly from where he used to teach under cloudy circumstances. Where he is at now he has had an affair with a with a student and a female teacher or administrator who was married (or else the wife of a person at the school). He missuses some kind of prescription pain reliever. TBA
October 14, 2001: I had a dream on the 9th of Oct. It had to do with Christian churches on fire. They had been deliberately set. They were all over the U.S. Sorry no cities. Then on Oct. 11th, I had a dream of a domed church. It was not a mosque. It wasn't on fire but felt that something major was going to happen with the church. Then at the end of the dream the bold letters of LDS appeared over the church like someone had written it on a picture. It felt like these things were to happen before spring of 2002.
October 14, 2001: I am in agreement of the attacks prediction given on Oct 14, 2001. I have seen the same of a Bush inpeachment when he was elected and his cabinet was to set a war economy and mentioned it to a co-worker. I have seen that Americans are behind and knew of the attacks and let them occur not realizing how successful they would be. I also see that pres Bush is a puppet for his fathers power friends and Cheney is the real source of power and will demand more secret operations that will put us in a short world war. I have also seen a deadly black cloud desend in CA from the Southwest and contaminate our waters creating a shortage of water and food. I am also under the impression that this black clowd is fallout from the activities in Pakistan that is caught up in the wind stream and brought here. We will find our actions in the war is far more deadly for us than we Americans anticipated. The Administration has decided a war was needed to bring back Republican power, gain more power and improve the Frances of Santa barbara
Francesj14@home.com
October 14, 2001: No 3 was about a new hippie movement in this country that is coming and dwarfs the one of the 60's. No 4, the last one, ended with prediction of Christian-defector terrorist's revelation of information causing Bush administration to collapse and staff members to flee, possibly flee the country and free world. According to Liberty, this was a coup by Un-Americans, pro Nazi illuminati members, working from within our own country, against America itself. It will be scary for a while but this domestic coup will be UNSUCCESSFUL. Thank God.
October 14, 2001: A somewhat brighter day awaits. There has been a shift in the future. Things are still unstable in our future but there are bright points I am led to share. 1) a Mexican pop group will emerge with the name "TV" and the number "5" associated with them. They will resemble the early 1980's pop group Duran Duran and will rise to almost unbelievable level of international fame and renown, bringing joy at a critical time just as the Beatles did following Kennedy assassination. Mexico will be into new wave, 1980's style, Brit influenced keyboard music in a big way. Look also for a Latin female with unusual short hair and colorful, tight clothing, the name "Elejra" or something electric or electronic to her name. This movement will end the N.Sync Britney Spears era for America and world, and songs will become more pointed, intellectual and political. Watch for this. My feeling was, since I saw this, I assume there will be humans alive to listen to it and buy it, so no cataclysm in future. 2) Busy resign from network. Cannot release his name, but he is Canadian and this will get him into trouble. 4) Hard-line Islamic terrorist preparing for terrible strike on American soil (he lives here). BUT he is an alcoholic and Islam has had trouble breaking him of his addiction. He will be in hotel room alone night before very terrible strike he controls in America. Watching fundamentalist Christian TV network by accident, he claims he is "healed" of alcoholism "by Jesus" and becomes outspoken Christian. He will refuse to carry out plans to harm US citizens and reveal detailed, abysmal information about planned death strikes against Americans on American soil. The people planning these strikes are Americans and of European dynastic descent, and are in power in our nation. This terrorist's unexpected defection to Christianity and revelation of sensitive 411 will directly implicate some big names we've all heard about. Watch for Bush administration to fall in the most spectacular, horrific impeachment/p
October 12, 2001: I BELIVE WE ARE SEEING THE SIGN OF OUR TIME. WE WILL SEE IN OUR LIFE TIME ARMAGEDIAN.
October 12, 2001: These insights come from dreams I have had over the past few years which seem to have some bearing on current events. These dreams seem to be more of a remote viewing nature as I find myself as either a participant or viewer of situations which have nothing to do with my own life experience. In one type of dream I am aware of people crossing a border, it impresses me as either Southern Ca. or Northwest Canada, with weapons and electronics. I feel These items are hidden for later use. That time is now.In another type of dream I either view or participate in some sort of special forces action on what appears to be off shore oil platforms and in other dreams a castle by the water. I feel that the search for Bin Laden may end up here.
wisewood@aol.com.
October 12, 2001: My cousin has a "feeling" of danger on Americans for October 22, 2001. Please be careful on that day. My husband, who works in the Sears Tower, is staying home that day at my request. This could be nothing (hopefully)., but I felt I had to pass this on.
October 10, 2001: I sense that the anthrax threat in Florida is not a result of a foreign terrorist attack. They will
find out soon that it occurred from someone associated with the building...maybe a ex-employer...definately a man...very intelligent but disturbed...definately taking advantage of the current state of terror that is occuring in the States at the moment....This premonition came to me intuitively...
October 10, 2001: I predict the Second Coming of Jesus Christ within 50 years. I predict the 1000 year reign of peace and the establishments of God's holy kingdom on Earth
October 10, 2001: According to NDE's and prophecies Jesus Christ will return within the next 200 to 300 years.
October 10, 2001: January – February 2002: A savage land, a studied hand; but minds not fit to rule. The dead will speak, their light yet shine; a cleansing energy prevails upon the East. Great Plague from another time, in Vishnu’s guise, now radiates upon the frenzied psyche of the algomas. Mars does indeed rule for a good cause. After the storm, calm.
October 10, 2001: October - November 2001: A bright future momentarily dimmed; while the pols and generals strut, the Antichrist devours America's young. The Archetype is keeper of the key; to know the Archetype is to understand the Antichrist. No thanksgiving for survivors.
October 8, 2001: I have premonitions often but since the mid-1990s they have been worse in nature. This came to me in a dream October 4th, 2001. I saw an Amtrak train derailed and in pieces in what appeared to be the Sangre de Christo mountains in America. I saw no smoke, no fire, and the scene was quietly attended by 30-50+ unharmed persons (passengers, I hope?) standing staring at the wreckage. Then the scene shifted to the mountains and canyons, and I was told the derailment was caused by one single terrorist of Middle Eastern male identity, and that he was alive and had fled into the hills hoping to escape. I saw FBI men with dogs barking chasing into the ravines searching for him. As the dream ended I was told the terrorist was captured and in his interrogation he accused Iran or Iraq as being behind his actions and having given him his orders. Also, and this is new and scary: specific information was given that the WTC attack was American in origin and that CIA has known / planned (?) it for decades.
October 8, 2001: The date 10-13-01 or 10-31-01 will be a day of mourning. I believe it may be due to the pope's death.
October 8, 2001: Looking back to the World Trade Center tower incident in New York City on 9-11-01, I have no doubt that the root cause of the tragedy lies with the number of stories of this structure, that is 110. For according to my research with this number, it literally translates to "prelude to evil." I fear the catastrophe would repeat itself through man-caused, natural or other venues should this tower be rebuilt again at 110 stories. Submitted by Emile Farran 10-8-01.
October 6, 2001: My vision was of a suspension bridge overlayed with a 747 as the next terrorist target. I see the concrete with one large crack in it but the bridge is not destroyed. I felt it to be either NY or SF. I don't know of any suspension bridges in NY. That and the fame of the Golden Gate bridge leads me to believe it to be the target. Whether it involves a plane or a load of nitrates in a truck I have no idea but I am pretty sure they aim for the suspension or its supports. I saw Ben Labin stays a lot in the Pakistan town (Peshwar?) that he used to live in and he flew back and forth without a problem. This is in the past. He stayed upstairs 2 floor or higher in a Hotel with a ceiling fan where children played outside. There were two guards of his outside the room.
He is being forced to move today. He may be handed over to the US today or within a few days. The Taliban has no illusions as did Hussein in 1991. The Taliban were in complete awe of the US in the Gulf War and held thier breath for six days. They think the US satellites can count the hairs on their heads. They are in awe of the US weapons because of their experience with 'Stinger' missles. They are quite gutless. All their oppresive measures are to show everyone they are otherwise.
TBA
October 5, 2001: My husband works 3 blocks away from the Sears Tower in Chicago, Illinois, USA. He has been home with me due to a surgery I had on September 11, 2001, and will be returning to work on Monday. I do believe that the terrorist acts are going to continue. They will try to hit the Sears Tower, and they will try to hit the White House, with what I cannot see clearly. I say try because there is always a chance that their plans will be foiled, which I pray that they will be. I believe that this 'war' (I place it in quotes because we are not quite sure who we are fighting at this time) will be fought within the White House walls as someone of power is providing information to others that want to hurt America and American citizens. This is far from over, and will come to a close, be it the end of the world as we know it, or an end to a war between 2010 to 2012. I believe that there will be survivors, though our world will be a shadow of what it is now. I know what I have written sounds a bit 'gray' a
October 5, 2001: O. Bin Laden is hiding where we'd least expect it: Russia. He entered Russia via underground aides in China.
October 5, 2001: Jesus will return for the true Christians soon. Those that have not accepted Him as their Lord and Savior will believe the lie in why so many Christians disappeared (maybe the "terrorists secret weapon" made them disappear?) Now is the time to repent of your sins and accept Jesus as your Lord and Savior. If you are left behind, you will be facing the worst seven years in history of the earth. If you accept the antichrist's mark (digital angel or some other implant) that he wants to force you to receive on your right hand or forehead, then you will be forever tormented in hell. If you refuse the mark you will most likely be branded a "terrorist" and will not be able to buy or sell. If you become a Christian after the rapture (removal of True Christians before the tribulation) you will be beheaded for your new-found faith (which will be MUCH better than spending eternity in hell) NOW is the time to decide to accept Jesus' free gift of eternal life and accept Him as your Lord and Savior. Putting it off ANY longer it may be too late to escape the seven years of tribulation. Jesus said He was the Way, the Truth, the Life and NO ONE gets to the Father (God) except through Him (Jesus)
October 5, 2001: KEEP CHILDRENS CLOTHES CIEAN WITH CARE
October 4, 2001: I drempt that terrorists had highjacked a big oceanliner. Officers of the ship were speaking with a British accent. When I awoke from that dream, my digital clock by my bed read: 9:11.
October 3, 2001: I have had two dreams about a terrorist attack on October 5, 2001 in the USA. In the first dream I was speaking with an unknown person who told me that Airports would be the safest place to be on Oct. 5, 2001. The second dream, last night, was stranger as I was accused of doing nothing to stop the terrorists by a group of people.
My feeling from the second dream is that the attack will be violent and many people will die, including children.
I hope this is a dream.
October 2, 2001: "Attack on London and New York City"
*This prediction is very disturbing!*
Nostradamus predicted this attack. I also saw this in a nightmare several years ago. I saw adults kidnap babies on the steps of people's homes, chop them up and eat them in my nightmare. Nostradamus predicted this will happen during the war with the Anti-Christ.
New York City and London will be attacked with biological germs. The city will be quarantined. It will take awhile for the disease to appear. People will walk around with deformities. Limbs and appendages hanging from their bodies. The disease eats away at the tendons, ligaments, and flesh. There will not be enough de-contaminate for everyone. There will be a food shortage in the city. People will be stealing bread off the shelves to feed their children. The government will try to distribute the food evenly but they will have their hands full trying to control the masses. There will be examples of cannibalism that will shock the world. In one case, a group of adults will steal a young baby, cut it up and eat it. The city of London will learn from the chaos in New York City and will react in a more civilized manner. http://ozarkmt.com/prophecies.shtml
kwarp2000@yahoo.com
October 2, 2001: IT IS OCT 2ND 2001, THE WORLD WILL BE FOREVER CHANGED IN THE DAYS TO COME.. I PREDICT THAT THE US WILL HAVE MAJOR DESTRUCTION IN CITIES BIG AND SMALL. I CONTINUE TO SEE THE SEARS TOWER IN CHICAGO BLOWING UP, AS WELL AS ATTACKS THROUGHOUT THE REST OF THE NATION. BRITISH AND AMERICAN FORCES WILL DESTROY A LARGE PART OF THE TALIBAN IN THE FIRST FEW DAYS OF ENGAGEMENT, BUT THE TALIBAN AND BIN LADEN WILL STRIKE BACK HERE IN AMERICA AND EUROPE. MAY GOD BLESS OUR CIVILAZATION AS WE KNOW IT NOW. IT WILL BE CHANGED SOON FOREVER...... MDOCBME
September 30, 2001: This morning, I awoke after dreaming that I saw aBoeing 727 jet over Hartford, CT, take a sudden dive and 270 degree hard bank to the left, toward two lower jets flying in the opposite direction (in my line of sight). The shock of seeing the sudden change of path of the 727 caused me to wake up. In the dream, I was on the ground, looking up, and I knew it was Hartford, Connecticut, and I recognized the air carrier, but now I don't remember which airline it was. I do recall the colors white and orange on the tail. 9/30/01, @7:30AM PDT time of dream. What could this mean? I have no connection to Hartford, nor do I plan on being there any time soon. I have not had a premonitory dream since I was a child, when I had a few. Any comments appreciated. This upset me.
September 30, 2001: Had a dream wherein the governor of California (Davis) was on a private jet with 23 other people. Of the 24, 4 became seriously ill after touching down in the Los Angeles area and were placed under quarantine. Davis was one of these. They had gone to some major conference and were heading to Los Angeles for a followup one. I'm a little concerned now that it has been confirmed that the governor will be contracting a private jet in response to security concerns. Twenty-Four and Four were recurring numbers throughout the entire dream.
September 30, 2001: Recieved: Late August/1st week of September
Time Due: This winter
Type: Sound and Visual
I am thinking that this winter will bring a famine of sorts to the middle of North America. I saw a combination of urban winter scenes combined with the audio of people crying from hunger pains. I believe it will have a combination of causes, more than likely an interuption of transit lines between the east and west coasts of the United States along with a type of crop failure never before seen. I hope I'm wrong. This has been haunting me for awhile now. With the recent events I thought I should post this.
September 28, 2001: I've had two premonitions about a nuc bomb exploding
in my hometown in NC. capo\tal.
September 27, 2001: have been intuitive since childhood, but I do not usually register them. The Sunday before the attacks I woke up with an urgency to go and shop. I bought a lot can goods no boxes of dried food and 20 gals of water. I felt follish because I am not a big water drinker and I did not know where I was going to store the $200.00 worth of food. I have since bought even more can goods and more water even when I say to myself I have too much already. I do know our water is at risk, how chemical or nuke wastes and we need to stockpile water. Food prices will rise due to a shortage of quality water. Frances of Santa Barbara
September 27, 2001: I'm not sure about the exact date of the dream, but I'm positive it was several days ahead of the Alaska Airlines incident, because at the time I felt satisfied that the vision was merely a twisted indication of that. Now I'm not so sure. In the dream-vision I'm in California, on-loan from my wacky boss to work temporarily for another company. (That would likely be in the Los Angeles area but I don't know) The offices are tiny, busy and intricate like a catacomb of closets. Everyone working there is busy and no one really notices me. The place I'm living is some sort of weird, big green boarding house like apartment building. Noise and hub-bub send me running outside the building to investigate and I look up to see grey airplanes (at least two) in the sky. People are confused and becoming uneasy. Then the air becomes thick with poison smoke which begins choking everyone and we crawl along the ground. I try to breathe through a cotton baby diaper as I crawl in horror. Next there are gas masks in place. I don't wish to identify myself, and I've never openly discussed my dream predictions. There are two reasons why I'm sharing this one: 1)On 9/8 I dreamt about being at an airport and the FBI freaking out over a terrorist highjack. 2) I'm about to have a baby. The cotton diaper part of that freaky dream came flooding to mind the other day when I picked one up.
September 26, 2001: I had a vision shown to me of the events of April 11. I say "shown to me" because I had no interest in world events and did not recognize the arab shown to me as Bin Laden until I saw photos of him on the fateful Tuesday. The premotion was so strong, it interrupted my own thoughts and was given to me by an outside, unknown source while I was deeply relaxing after a hard day of cleaning. That being said, I must say I am in particular sorrow and guilt for not letting this information be known to the public beforehand. I had only told my fiance of the disturbing vision of seeing body parts, a horrific explosion with flying debris from an impact of some sort, faces, arab faces, with a lasting impression of the last shown to me of a triumphant Bin Laden. I am posting this now because there is one part of the vision that I have not come to realize.........and it may be still to come. In the vision, Bin Laden appeared slightly distorted, as if viewing him under a thin veil of moving water. The asse interpreted the last part of the vision correctly, or, perhaps he's busy poisoning the seas, to have an even more far reaching effect of his evil deeds on the world, but there is definately an association of water with him. This will come to pass. I feel obligated to tell whoever wants to listen because I do not want to have this heavy burden of guilt ever again. If I recieve any other visions, I will post them here again as a warning to all. Anybody know of a good psychic counselor? I've been sleepless in NJ.
Thanks for any advice. Jonee@mail2art.com
September 25, 2001: Today, September 25, 2001 at 1:30 EDT I had a vision or, more accurately, a remote viewing of Osama bin Laden onboard a small oil tanker hiding in an empty oil tank. He was not happy in these surroundings. I saw yellow piping on the deck of the ship.
September 24, 2001: The US has reached a point where there is no turning back. Early October will see the US strike first, but to little avail. The 'Eastern Coalition' will strike back, hard. The US will ultimately be overwhelmed, Major cities will be targeted and several destroyed. All this will happen very quickely.
September 22, 2001: I had a dream last night. I dreamt that I saw a plane come down and kill many many children in a park area/theme park area.. it was huge.. on many acres.. next to a highway..I remember walking on the highway and looking to my right and seeing the burn marks on the grass.. it was blocked off by the military and I could only see parts of where the burn marks were. I pray that my dream was not real and it is only my subconscious mind being devastated by the NY incident..
September 21, 2001: I dreamed that the state of california,had a major,earthquake just before Christmas of 2001.And the destruction will be so bad. that we will lose 25,000 people. And many bridges will be destroyed.
September 21, 2001: I have noticed the second date from my dreams keeps coming up a several times; this date is Oct 15th of this year. I did a quick search on the Internet using this date; the only thing I could find that could be of world importance is the IWA World Water Conference of 2001 being held in Berlin. It deals with the politics and the privatization (ownership) of water. mdocbme@hotmail.com
September 21, 2001: Todays date is Friday Sept. 21st 2001, Ten days since the WTC attack. I predicted that about a month ago, I now predict that we(USA) will have another terrorist attack within 48-72 hrs.With another loss of innocent lives. I hope that i am wrong, but i usually am 90-95% correct on all premonitions i have. May god bless our nation and people. mdocbme@hotmail.com
September 18, 2001: upon the time 10-02-2001 the reflection of the past will come fullcircle and WWIII will begin at that time the holly war will have ended and the world safe for only awhile and the oppressed will come back sad for they will only live for a short time the end will come and it is fortold the land shall be bare no need for shock for we no it comes usa and the alliance shall crush them again they run but they cannot hide and it will happen and again 2003 march 2
September 18, 2001: upon the time of reflections shall a great war begin it is nearer than we think and will last only a short while the cassualties high and the day like hiroshima will not be forgotten the day 10-02-2001 and the world will just begin WWWIII
September 17, 2001: I think I'm entitled or at least try to encourage Americans who are dealing with this terrorist attack crisis to calm down and not be terrified. Yes, we should have sympathy for those innocent lives who were taken away, but God says in Scripture Matthew 24:1-24:13 that the beginning of sorrows will begin with wars and earthquakes. Even false prophets will come claiming they are Jesus but "he who endures to the end shall be saved." This situation is in God's hands so don't forget that He will come and unite the nation. We must be patient and have faith in the word of the Lord. This type of situation we are in might be what He is reffering to. Remember to always be precautious. Amen!! Clarissa Martinez
September 15, 2001: Yasser Arafat will be killed by Israel. It will be an accident. romtech@geotec.net
September 15, 2001: My daughter is 14 she keeps having a dream of a girl with long black curly hair. Ii believe to be chandra levy. She describes seeing her body laying in like The marshes you see when the tide is out at the beach.And she can see a silver watch>..Does anyone have that kind of detail about her was she wearing a silver watch?
September 15, 2001: I believe that the world, has never been in such pain and see so much pain. I believe that it is now the beginning of the end. Imbrace your loved one and live life as full as you can, be strong and tell those you love them for it maybe be your last chance.
September 14, 2001: I predict that many people on earth will become Magis. Like Jesus was and convert their faith to practicing Yoga individually to discover the rulership of their own faith! www.mp3.com/mcfunklord
September 14, 2001: As everyone knows, the Trade Center incident occurred on September 11, 2001, hence 9-11! Please read Revelation 9, 11: They had as king over them the angel of the Abyss, whose name in Hebrew is Abaddon, and in Greek, Apollyon. (Abaddon and Apollyon mean Destroyer.
September 13, 2001: in 17th months from now a series of nuclear weapons uncontrolled blasts attempting to end an unfinnishable war will ruin our buildings our cities our past will end up slowly with life in our cars will send us to live like thousands of years ago our descendants much later much much later will see the last war as a legend i see peace after the pain and the woundes are erased from our kind breathing in peace at last our past will be agreed to be forgotten and flags will have no value nothing will care.
Setember 13, 2001: On March 15 2002 the fields the country and nature will harbour the life and the city will die as a museum of past goodbye through the war and the insult to civilization at last but beware because many shan't survive to the blast
September 7, 2001: I have had a dream every night all week where Chandra takes me some where. She wants me to
follow her, so I do. We go through these trees and down this road and into a park like setting where there are two trees sitting to gether growing in a v shape from below the ground. It is important that I know that their roots are together under ground but not above the ground. there is a rock or broken piece of concrete on the dirt between these two trees. When you stand facing the trees from the side with the rock the tree on the left has something on the left side of it about 12 or so inches up. It is a round mark or something I was never able to see what it said. It is just like a round mark about the size of the top of a mayanise jar. this is what she showed me. I think she is out there in the cosmos looking for some one who can find her. I also see there is a very strong connection between her and Eric Storm the guy who came forward saying he saw her killed. I do not think he is telling the entire story in public, but I do think she went out to meet him that night of April 29, and was killed as he says. If she was pregnant it was with his child. It was not her on the computer and no one saw her after April 29th. the gym guy got the days mixed up and is scared to tell the truth now.
August 17, 2001: The New Moon @26 Leo will be on the midpoint of Israel's Mars/Zues. Transit Mars is opposing the US Mars 7-4-1776. A restrained Israel is about to bring out the big guns and it will effect all of us. Transit Neptune is conjunct the July 4th So. Node and if the US waits too long, the next 21 days will go down in the history books. I think the entire middle east will be a firestorm. Once again oil will be the issue and Iraq and Egypt will not sit this one out. Rachal2337@msn.com
August 11, 2001: Clifford T. Phifer further predicts that Mr. Clinton will be abducted from the building mentioned in my other prediction on September 18 2001, the first day of Rosh Hashanah.
August 11, 2001: I, Clifford T. Phifer, have seen a vision(?) of President Bill Clinton being abducted by men, who are mostly white anglo-saxons, while he is speaking from the porch of a large building with large square columns two stories high, which faces a hill on which are wooden bleachers for the crowd to sit on. These abductors are dressed in light gray clothing which looks exactly like jogging suits. They are covered from their boots to the tops of their heads, and are wearing a new type of light-weight, hard body armour from which bullets will ricochet, making it impossible to bring them down by shooting at them, and the bullets would richochet into the crowd. They land a group of small helicopters, (black,) and take Mr. Clinton away, with the crowd being unable to see which one the former President is in.
August 11, 2001: clifford t. phifer predicts, (I believe this revelation came from God,) that by ;the year 2004, a cure will be found for ALL disease, through DNA research, specifically, on liver disease.
August 6, 2001: domino effect with collapse of world stockmarkets starting with japan and latin america defaulting on debts. us dollar falls while interest rates rise.
August 5, 2001: A shift has begun which will become more evident as time passes. It has been noticed but ignored or simply shunted to one side because it seems so unlikely. Astrologers, astronomers, and scientists will have to do major re-calulating of the celestial bodies because of this dimensional shift. The astrology predictions or even astrological profiles will be getting less and less accurate as this shift increases adding fuel to the fires of the ones dead-set against any form of metaphysical occurances which are not explained as acts of God. The religious up-heaval against even scientific findings and logical pursuits will cause deterioration back to that of the Middle Ages as predictions keep failing via current astrological methods.
The enlightened and more open to the new changes will retreat into a silent majority while the ones fearful of the changes cling to the old methods and beliefs with such loud protests that they will seem to be the majority. There is also a cleansing going on which will see many drastic changes within each person's life and not just on a public level. People who have not made their life changes and are not in the proper localities or with the proper co-habitants are being forced to make changes whether they want them or not. This will be increasingly evident over the next five years or so. The restructuring to suit the new climates, knowledge, and awakening will take place, despite the protests of the orthodox and the closed minds of the verbal minority. The more closed and rejecting of those changes one is, the more problems and grief will continue to fill that life. All beliefs and paths will eventually lead to the same conclusion...that of oneness...but the ones going against the flow of events will find it harder to see the end or even to reach it until those thought patterns change. As this split between the structured and the new widens, it will become evident that the dimensions between the two is widening and those with the new will go forward while the others remain in the same old rut. This, too, is part of the cleansing.
August 2, 2001: Chandra Levy is alive and well, living with her new husband in Savannah GA.
July 29, 2001: Since the election of 2000 , I see a grave time for the United States. It will be the four years of sorrows. The flag will be athalf mast more times than ever. All living presidents except Clinton will be dead by 2005. I see 2 or 3 Presidents filling out this term. There will be a major scandel thatwill rock the congress many long time members will fall. The mid term elections of 2002 will be more distressed than 2000. The econ.
of the US will nose dive . The republican Party will split into 2 seperate parties due to the life question. 2004 election a Democrat will win with a huge margin. world affairs will be just as troublesome.
July 25, 2001: I had a vision that Chandra Levy would be found inside of something circular. It was rather large and corroded on the inside. Its overall shape was that of a large watering container for cattle, although it could be some type of well. It was probably passed over or missed because it is covered with debris, or some junk or debris has been intentionally placed over the area. It seems to be located in an area with a lot of vegetation. That is, it is not located in a barren area. The large circular container is metallic, probably tin. Its inner surface is corroded or broken away and within that area is where the debris is located. The body itself has been placed there without care - as though thrown or dropped. She is, of course, dead.
Ikon Rahu
July 23, 2001: Dream. Aprox. 3am July23. Children (aprox 4 - 7 yrs old) running from front door of building with steps. Beside building is small embankment and wall? Woman running with children. Man with handgun chasing them and shooting. Woman runs out of line of view. Feel that man shot her. Man shoots at children. Shoots child (4 yrs old?) aprox. 4 times. Child rolls down embankment. Keeps shooting children. Other children try to drag wounded kids away. Shoots them. Another man runs in and tries to wrestle gun from shooter. (Dead and wounded kids lying about, lots of screaming) Shooter pulls up gun and other man grabs barrel. Shooter has gun to other mans forehead. Other man still gripping barrel tries to move gun away but it's too late. Gun goes off as man is about to scream. I wake up feeling very disturbed. Before these events occurred I heard the phrase "The bells for 9 toll at 5" and it stayed with me after awakening. (Sure hope this was just a crazy dream)
July 19, 2001: I don't believe Chandra Levy is dead. I think she is pregnant, and was asked to disappear until certain matters could be settled. She is in a tropical climate such as Tahiti, Brazil or Costa Rica
July 16, 2001: CHANDRA LEVY
Listed below is what Rog at Email: heltrim@aol.com wrote in concerning the Chandra Levy case.
I see a truckdriver with route going that time from DC to Delaware (he started out delivering 2 states below this), on into Pennsylvania, New Jersey and then on to Maine. After Maine, his last stop was in St. Louis, Missouri. From there, I see him going NW near Casper, CO.
The trucker came to DC within 36 hours of Chandra's disappearance. The driver is between 34-35 years old, short blonde hair, blue eyes, 5 foot 6 or 7, 135-145 pounds, German ancestry (Father or Grandpa was from Germany and came here before start of WW II and hated Jews) dirty looking skin which is wrinkled and leathery for his age. He carries his change in a leather pouch in his right pocket and on the other side is a black undetermined object.
The contents of the truck cargo were technological (industrial computer hardware) which were wrapped in between with cloth like dividers. It contained precious cargo in dividers. There is an A on the boxes with a square in black ink with nothing on it. The company name he is delivering for is somehow connected with Automation Electronics...and the driver was perhaps delivering stuff to sewer treatment plants...or municipal water plants. I see an upside down angular mushroom symbol in blue. The driver's dispatcher could be between Hotsprings and Washakie counties. He works long hours (up to 19 hours a day) using different books so as not to get caught breaking trucking rules.
He is married with two children (1 girl and one boy). He is depressed and mentally unbalanced and laughs at things that are not even funny.
He is an owner/driver. The truck has a computer like device between the driver and passenger seat, closer to the passenger seat) which is fixed to the truck and somehow he gets his route from there. The truck is white with blue deco from the fender halfway over the doors and the name of the model is Kenworth, it has good tires, chrome wheels, and there is a red and perhaps blue diamond on the front of the truck radiator, lights are across the top of truck like torpedoes and two big airhorns are on the driver's side. Truck is clean and pretty inside and out.
Names or initials of the driver's namemay be an R and A..and a name Babcock which could be Mother's maiden name). Too many names, though, came up (Rapport, Randy, Austin, Adriana, Conklin, Christopher). I see he has something shiny, about 6" long in his hand.
I see Chandra depressed, crying and upset...walking along a road. She is offered a lift and decides to go along wherever the journey takes her. She did not know the driver and wanted to escape, even temporarily, from her problems. The journey took her to PA. There, I see her getting out to take a walk to stretch her legs and was hit in the back of the head and was killed. She was sexually assaulted before and after she was killed. I see him dismembering her arms and legs and leaving them in DE, NJ and PA the main body is in Maine off a truck stop off of I95 in a black tightly tied black garbage bag and was thrown over a fence within 20 feet of sight. The truckstop is 1/4 the way up into the state of Maine.
July 2, 2001: I originally had this vision 2 years ago. I feel it is now inevitable or else at a point where others reading this prediction will no longer affect the outcome. (These things are highly impacted by prayers and other peoples wills so I have been praying alone to prevent this from occuring. There will be an atomic attack on the hottest day of the year
by Pakistan on India. It will occur on the hottest day of the year, though I am not sure if that is the hottest there or in the US. At least 9 missle warheads will be sent. I see a pattern like a clock forms at about 8:35 with the points of the hands and the point at which they are attached to the clock 'hits'. The top one is large but I think it misses the city. However there are others. Pakistan has little reason for the attack that I can see. Except maybe to forestall problems at home just like Argentina attacked the Falklands in order to divert attention at home from their economic problems.
India retaliates with their massive warheads including at least one nuclear warhead that is multiple megaton.
There are more of Indias. Maybe thirty total warheads. Up to half of Pakistan is uninhabitable. Returning Pakistan soldiers are not welcome home because of radiation fears. Some Pakistan warheads do not explode and India digs these out of the ground for their own arsenal. It took only three warheads to destroy Indias economy. Pakistan is returned to the stone age. I think about 200 million will eventually die from direct and indirect effects. I don't have good 'clock' or time on this though it feels like preparation is now occuring. That is the Pakistani's are now locked in.
june 11 2001 i predict that john walsh host of tvs americas most wanted will be charged with the murder of his son adam in the fall of 2001. i have had three weird dreams about this cant seem to shake it off. i hope im wrong i like john walsh. blrjsmith@earthlink.net
February 1, 2001: I see a major and devestating earth quake in the area of riverside in southern ca. 8.+between 2/13/01 and 3/13/01
May 15, 2001: This premonition came to me the way they usually do, not in a dream, but instantanious understanding, a vail listed from my mind. I've had similar experiences all my life ( of over 60 years) and they've proven extraordinarally accurate. I now understand that most antisocial behavior has a chemical cause. This cause is usually an addiction to adrenaline. the truth has so far gone unnoticed because of the nature of this naturally produced but highly addictive substance. Criminal behavior is, for the most part, merely an unconscious attempt by the "criminal" to place themselves in a dangerous threatening situation in order to cause the body to manufacture adrenaline. Anti social behavior will be treated more as an addiction. Prisons and jails will be devalued as correctional facilities. I do not recall the exact time/date of this revelation but it was about the middle of summer, year 2000. My e mail address is lonepine_theking@bigfoot.com.
May 1, 2001: In a dream I had this morning (May 1, 2001), a (possibly galley) fire on board a passenger jet spread too quickly for the crew to land the plane safely. From high altitude, the aircraft spiraled into the ground. My experience with such dreams has been that when I dream that I am on board the aircraft, and in the dream I experience the physical sensations that a passenger would experience, the dream is often premonitory in that a similar mishap occurs within hours or up to six weeks after the dream. This has happened to me only three times in the past thirty years, but with startling accuracy in many, many details except for geographic location. I hope all aircraft crews will take special precautions against fire, especially in the galleys. I do not consider myself to be a psychic. jogar@javanet.com
April 21,2001-I completed my prediction which is a major earthquake that will hit South Korea.In the area of 100 square miles of Seoul at 8.5 to 9.2 with thousands of people that will be killed by this first earthquake.As a result titlewaves will hit the Sea of Japan on both sides from Qingddo to Taiwan and Wakkana to Kyushu that will kill 3,000 thousand more.Two to three days later a earthquake in Pusan at 9.5 will hit causing titlewaves on both sides again of the Sea of Japan to Kyushu that will kill hundreds of more.Suzhou and Shanghai will report the most killed by the highest titlewaves caused by the earthquake in Pusan.Titlewaves from the earthquake in Pusan will also hit the north coast of the Philippines and move from Laoag to Samar without killing anyone.Major damage will be done to the Philippines coast.
Prediction made in Oct of 2000 while looking at a Atlas. Nancy D Sheedy at drumdove@aol.com
April 1, 2001: predict that there will be a serious earthquake 8.1 the center being Seoul with the followup of titlewaves hitting the coastline from Qingddo down to Taiwan and both sides of the north coasts of the Philippines.Japan will also be hit by serious titlewaves as a result of the earthquake from Wakkana to Hiroshima.Kyushu will also be hit by serious titlewaves.People in the 10 of thousands will be killed mostly in Seoul when the first earthquake hit.Than a second eartquake in Pusan 7.3 will follow two to three days later with more titlewaves hitting the center of the coast of Japan and Shanghai both taking the most damage in deaths by titlewaves.This will happen no sooner than 6 months to 2 years from this date 4-21-2001.I see temperatures in the lower 80's when this happens.
January 16, 2001: I predicted the election outcome and I have other thoughts coming through that are somewhat political.I predict a demise of a former president very soon .I also see california struggling with very dangerouse insects .I see a cure for aids.I see a famous entertainer coming from Australia soon to be discovered and he will start a new hair style in America.I'am Shay Litreal the psychic.
January 25, 2001: I had a dream about two weeks ago.. I dreamt that I was outside with Jesus..he was standing in front of me.. he had a white gown on..and I saw blue skies behind his face.. he said to me "those with the light will shed blood, and those who shed blood will have life".. that was the end of the dream. Mystical Rose mpp1827@yahoo.com
January 3, 2001: Cal. Nev. bdr, Mammoth or Tokop, perhaps Reno quake 4.5-6m next 90 days 90% confident, seldom wrong. Martin, Natural interpretive center for earthquakes, Victoria B.C. Canada, and Tofino. Guppydog@home.com
January 3, 2001: I dont remember my dreams. Somehow I have been left with a strong impression of a metallic object crashing to earth (Tropical area, India or Africa, perhaps Amazon, very large and started fire near small village, people beside me watching almost in slow motion as the object grew nearer, filled with dread and ran, felt ground shake and blast of heated air. Burned smell everywhere but not fuel smell, just superheated metal like welding smells. No sound throughout but shock struck moment before object hit ground and huge roar. Woke up to flames all around me, alone. Ran as fast as I could, but injured and face and hands hurt, stinging. Wondered if it was where I lived in Tofino but didn't seem like it. Hot and dry type landscape, felt like Africa or India. Comm Guppydog@home.com. Thanks, any insights?
December 30, 2000: Registery: This has been posted at http://www.sollog.com/prophecies/newyear
squake.txt
EARTH QUAKE WARNING
AN EARTHQUAKE OVER 7.0 ON THE RICHTER SCALE WILL STRIKE WITHIN 72 HOURS
IN WHAT IS KNOWN AS THE MIDDLE EAST REGION OF EARTH THE EPICENTER OF THIS EARTHQUAKE WILL BE LOCATED WITHIN 500 MILES OF JERUSALEM THE FOLLOWING AREAS ARE IN GREAT DANGER FROM THIS QUAKE ISRAEL, JORDAN, SYRIA, IRAN, IRAQ, SAUDI ARABIA, TURKEY, EGYPT
GREECE, THE WARNING TIME FRAME FOR THIS EARTHQUAKE STARTS AT 3:01 AM EST 12/29/2000
THE WARNING TIME FRAME FOR THIS EARTHQUAKE ENDS AT 3:01 AM EST 01/01/2001 I AM
SOLLOG IMMANUEL ADONAI ADONI
I AM THE WORD OF ONE
Matthew622@webtv.net
December 11, 2000: he pope will die feb 12th-14th. If not this year then the one after. From steve_omega@hotmail.com
December 4, 2000: I have a strong immediate sense that within 7 to 14 days, we will all be astonished by the news from the field of science.. it will be revealed that both water and intelligent life have been documented on the surface of Mars, and we will know that we are not alone in the Solar System. From a dream on December 3rd, 2000
November 7, 2000: a great fire followed by harsh weather some major country
November 7, 2000 - 5:05 a.m. Al Gore will win the presidential election in 2000
November 2, 2000: VERIFIED PREDICTION OF SOLOG (PLEASE SEE OCTOBER 31, 2000 PREDICTION by Solog)
: As predicted, The walls of Jericho falling!
> Israel pulls back tanks But despite the peace bid a Palestinian is killed in clashes near Jerusalem
By Mark Lavie 2 November 2000
Israel has pulled back tanks from friction points and Palestinian police have restrained rock throwers in the first tentative steps towards implementing a truce agreement reached by Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat and former Israeli Prime Minister Shimon Peres in an overnight meeting.
Israeli attack helicopters and tanks fired at Palestinian intelligence headquarters in Jericho overnight, in retaliation for Palestinian gunfire at an Israeli army outpost where a reserve army officer was killed, the military said.
November 2, 2000: Had a premonition.. saw a silver plane with red and blue stripes.. American.. international flight..
saw the number seven.. bombing or ?.. problems with the plane..mpp1827@yahoo.com
November 2, 2000: Had a dream a few nights ago.. I was in a huge white room.. I had one eagle on each hand..they were both talking to me.. one was angry.. then I saw a line of v.i.p. walking in.. at least 30 men.. all international people, saw Chinese and different cultures.. I saw the Pope walking with them..rushing through.. the Eagles flew away..the Pope touched my hands as I walked up to him..he said something to me.. his hands were warm..he wore white with a black sash around his neck.. then they rushed him away out the door.. then the eagles flew back to my hands..I dont recall what the eagles said or what the Pope said..but the feeling I remember is to trust in God..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
October 31, 2000: This is the prophecy of Sollog, Do not be decieved by FAKES. There will be a massive earthquake in Ft Lauderdale FLA within 250 miles on Dec. 26 2000, IT WILL be greater than 6.5, THE WALLS OF THE JREF COMPOUND WILL CRUMBLE SOLLOG HAS SPOKEN, DO NOT MOCK THE PROPHET, SOLLOG RULES RANDI denies the power of SOLLOG - SOLLOG RULES. Well, that'll certainly put a damper on Christmas cheer.
Rejoice, the Lord hgas come,(on dec 25th), Woe to those qwgho disobey the white horse! There will be a eclipse on that day(dec 25th) also, which will bring about the end to the tyrranical reign of the black king! crossing the map, the eclipsed sun will show the signs. Who puts an end to it? The white horse is in that region now, soon the days are that that horse will
> ride in the new region, where the eclipse will reign tyrrany before and after it, there is fighting there now, and there will be after, the peace the white horse brings will bring great wealth and an overwhelming demand for them to
> be concieved into the WTO! The walls of Jerico may fall, but the white horse will live on! These words are not of adonias, nor will they ever be, This is in noway a challenge to sollog nor any of his fans, > I have not nor will I deny the fact of a true prophet. Have mercy on those who do not see or hear righteousness, or its words of wisdom, and allow them to have dominion over their kingdom, they will not understand a true prophecy and it is a waste of time to try to tell them what the Lord would tell them. And the sun will become dark as sackcloth, on that day (dec 25th), know the parable of the fig tree. This prophecy was posted a few days ago, I hope that both come true! The first one was a fake, Sollog did not write it, lets see if it comes true! The second one was mine, after I read the posting I had the vision.
>
Matthew622@webtv.net
October 28, 2000: I just wanted to point out that prediction #254 (posted on August 18, 1999) has been FULFILLED to the letter! An earthquake did in fact strike Athens, Greece (my home city) on September 7, 1999. About 250 people died and a few dozen buildings (including a factory) collapsed.
October 15, 2000: I had a dream about Jimmy Stewart just days before he died. Last night I had the same dream about Bob Hope. I think it's his time.
October 7, 2000: A dream Sept. 12 or 13, 2000: In my dream I and other female members of my family (no males, oddly)were enjoying a sunny afternoon in a large area something like a park. In the dream, I was watching one of those anonymous (UN)white jets that spew their filthy chemtrails all over our skies as it "drew" lazy patterns off in the distance. I stop and watch these jets every time I see them during my waking hours, and their customary flight pattern is extremely high, maybe 40,000 feet, so high one can barely hear the engines. Knowing this, I was quite surprised in my dream when I saw that the jet I had been watching seemed to be in a descent; it was growing larger by the second as it dropped in altitude. I watched it fall steadily and realized it wasn't a white jet I had been watching after all, but some sort of object with a white fuselage that I initially mistook for a portion of a rocket. To my utter horror, I suddenly understood this was not a rocket but a missile, a nuclear warhead falling rapidly to earth. I watched it swiftly descend in its trajectory, saw it whizzing overhead over the park and knew that it would strike some 2000-5000 yards behind us, plunging into the more densely inhabited area of the town. I awoke with a fright before the impact. I could not bear to experience the certain result--the entire town, including myself and family, were wiped out. I believed the Chinese had launched the missile.
C.F. - Hammond, LA
October 5, 2000: There is going to be an earthquake in southern California. It will be preceeded by a 5-6 Mag quake in the Bishop area, followed by a larger quake in the area of 29 Palms/Landers. These two harbinger quakes will then be followed by a quake of larger magnitude in the area of the LA basin. I see the above series occurring during the month of October, and will go 1,2 and then after a period of up to a week the third will occur. So folks, after number 2 put away the good china.
September 19, 2000: I recently had a dream of a West Coast Earthquake. I sensed San Francisco, but possibly L.A - high
magnitude - 8-10 on the richter scale, possibly occuring on the weekend of September 23, 2000.
Take care all. Valincan.
September 15, 2000: In october there will be a crash of either a space shuttle or rocket it will land in about 20 to 30 feet of water off the coast or maybe just inland i was watching tv and i drew it and the date was dec 1993 when i saw it this 2000 year is the time
September 14, 2000: prediction made sept 2000. The "dome" will suffer a fire, but will it be an accident?
willowcroft@ic24.net
September 6, 2000: I predict that southern california in the next month or so will have a major devasting earth quake and will turn the whole to a complete stand still. i predict at least magnitude of 9-10. myeys@aol.com
June 7, 2000: I had a dream last night that I was standing in a room with a huge water fountain in front of me. But in front of me was the Pope kneeling on his knees in front of the water fountain but the Holy Eucharist was in the gold colored like a pole that holds the Eucharist in a glass see through slide. This pole that was holding the Eucharist was in front of him . I was standing behind him. This room looked like an open room in the middle of a church or castle. He was praying. And to his right was a man . He was dressed in white but I he looked so dark and evil. This man was seemed to me to be his "right hand man". Seemed he was the next highest to the Pope. He was telling the Pope to do things the wrong way with the Eucharist and to tell his people things that werent true. The Pope didnt want to but he was threatened in some way. NOt sure what. But I felt the Pope's deep sorrow and yet I felt his faith also. He truly believes in God and I could feel his love for God and Christ. This man to the right I never saw his face but he had black hair. I also remember he had many many "troops" or followers and some knew what he was up to that he was evil and most all didnt. I also felt some sort of pain or injury to the back of the Pope's head like the base of his skull on the right side..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
June 5, 2000: Dreampt of orange cards with personal infromation on them. I belieive these will be used to keep track of persons before mass registry and tiny bar-code implants are placed in the body, I beleive in the wrist, like they have for tracking dog owners, and salmon, only for people.
The orange cards/"tickets" they were called, have 3 "tickets" on top, then a section for receipt, then another ticket on the bottom. I'm not sure what these were for.
These tickets were very prominent in the dream.
Sakura Shen sakurashen@hotmail.com
May 29, 2000: I see in the next 20 years a high level "Alsace-Lorraine" type of conflict between Canada and the United States over territory stretching in a corridor from British Columbia all the way to Quebec after discovery of new maps and reexamination of very old treaties. Canada will try to counter with claims to Washington, Idaho, Montana, North Dakota and Minnesotta that could forseeably lead to war. Canada will see this as an attempt by breakway Quebec to secure a seaport on the West Coast and will shut down the St. Lawrence Seaway.
May 24, 2000: Some other predictions: a large comet will hit Hawaii; the uppermost area of Africa will be "smudged out"; President Clinton will face an assasination attempt in Chicago as he discusses space research and an agreement with China, probably in the summer of 2000. --psychicdick@aol.com
May 24, 2000: I am predicting a large event to occur on June 10, 2000. I suspect it is a natural event, like an earthquake, rather than a terrorist even. It will be noteworthy in its devastation and will require the help of many people to aid the injured, etc. This is from a dream. There was also an older man with white hair in this dream who has tried to tell authorities about this date but noone is listening to him.
May 16, 2000: I predict a terrorist bomb attack, a fire with major loss of life, or a stampede at the Perkins Park disco and video lounge in Stuttgart, Germany on 7-15-00 or later, information from a dream on 5-16-00, corroborated from information publicly available on the internet., p.s. I have dreamed of URLs before.
May 4, 2000: April 23, 2000. There will be an earthquake of 6.5 or greater in Anchorage, Alaska on June 23, 2000. LahTera@Compuserve.com
May 4, 2000: Date of dream: April 19, 2000. Dreamed that an explosion goes off near Clinton as he exits something like a plane, perhaps a car. I couldn't see what he was leaving. The date of occurrence should be June 19, 2000.
May 1, 2000: : Rremember july 16 "Shoemaker-Levy" the string of pearls arrived from the far side of Jupiter. NASA still does not know, Brookings still does not know, but sofeware from a programmer in Germany tracking the moons of Jupiter had them on july 15, the day previous to impact in direct alignment facing the on coming string of pearls inpact. the did swing just past the incomming projectiles just hours before impact. If they did not clear, the moons of Jupiter would have been spread
all over our solar system. Likeso, all of the planets but for Earth will be on the other side of our Sun on May 5, 2000, and what a time for ET to explor them. We have no way of seeing on the other side of our Sun on this day or what to monitor for as "look what we can do" is doing things to our other solar system planets. Hubble doesn't even have a sighting. If we are so creaver we would have figured out by now Shoemaker-levi had exquisit timing for arrival. May 5, 2000 is just another opportunity for our f r i e n d s to run their test on us. Brooking has no talent left. NASA has lost its charm. good luck ormazd
May 1, 2000: The Anti-Christ was born on December 4, 1971
April 27, 2000: I predict a major earthquake for the southern california area. Magnitude 6.0+ less then 100 deaths with in the next 5 months.--Patricia Peters
April 26, 2000: 2003: Paul Newman passes away on the set of a movie in a small Indiana town after an auto stunt goes awry. Read from newsbox in dream 4/28
April 23, 2000: Model/actress Elizabeth Hurley is pregnant.
April 22, 2000: I had a vision that some forms of cancer (perhaps all? but doubtfully) will be linked to viral
infection and will be stumbled on by accident. A cure for these growths will follow and may be linked to older forms of medicine, perhaps herbology? It will likely not be released to the public for some time, but
it will eventually be brought forward with much resistance from the medical establishment. The medical establishment will take some hard knocks from the public. It will also be found that some cancers are linked to childhood vaccinations that either caused the cancer themselves, or were perhaps contaminated by pathogens that were unknown, or were thought to be harmless.
The cancer cure will be linked to AIDS research..SakuraShen@hotmail.com
April 22, 2000: My name is Guy William Conklin, and I predict an earthquake will hit Seattle on May 5, 2000. I base this on a number of things. First,I have a strange feeling about it. Also, it is known that Seattle is overdue for an earthquake, and Mt. Rainier has magma currently rising underneath it. Then there is the planetary alignment on May 5.
yugnet@yahoo.com
April 8, 2000: i did predict that Microsoft do mot have to devide it's company in sevral company's but pay a amount af moneay evry time they sell a product that is against the law of a monopoly.That money will put in a fund that the company who have a loss because of the momopoly product of microsoft will receive
Christian De Cocker
April 2, 2000: My vision....the reborn Christians are wrong, the world is not ending, there is no anti-christ, every person must look within, there is NO reason to fear. pvvp
March 28, 2000: I see a tragedy for a space shuttle STS-101 resulting in several deaths, though some of the crew survive the event. The problem is due to an electrical failure. - Steven R
March 27, 2000: Had a knowing that something devastating will happen in Peru. Many people will die. Natural disaster. Big City. mpp1827@yahoo.com
March 25, 2000: i have been getting physical symptoms for yrs of coming quakes and volcanoes. this week been steady build up of smyptom. feeling for sure within 4 days a quake of over 6. mag. not sure of location thinking Ca. or japan. dont always know placecause pushing off feeling sick. but strong one coming in shortly . ju
March 8, 2000: had a dream 3 weeks ago.. have not posted due to fear.. there will be military families and US citizens evacuated from Europe.. was cold very cold snowy but it was Summer.. there was a code blue declared and all US families were evacuated by white vans.. was told in this dream that not very many are prepared and will be caught with no preparation.. prepare yourselves..be ready at any moments notice.. was told that US had declared war against China..many will not be ready and will be a surprise..many countries including Italy and France will be our allies.. mpp1827@yahoo.com
March 6, 2000: I spoke of an earlier prediction in which the recently deceased people rose from the dead. this was a while back can't remember when but you didn't put it up on this site i just wanted you to know i wasn't joking i can see why you didn't put it up because the thought of people's loved ones returning to life to attack the living is frightening to say the least i haven't a clue what will cause this but like i have heard around the May 5, 2000 to june 10, we could start to see these things occur if i'm wrong thank goodness but if i'm wrong God help us. anyway i'de like to thank you for having this site and i enjoy reading what others say about our future i would like to see more updates. or make this more like a message board system where whatever someone writes it's posted as soon as it's written.
March 1, 2000: i dreamed that there will be an incident that could involve a child and a attache. Please do not take or be responsible for any unknown child no matter how simple the request may be. It has been revealed to me that there could be dire consequences if you do. Please do not agree to take care of, hide, or send any unknown package. If you have some method of divination or reading, please use it before you take the responsibility of someone's property. This phophecy is for the period of mercury retrograde feb-mar, 2000. I reserve my e-mail address. peace.
February 26, 2000: Long, stuggling days, as Naustradaumus predicted, but now in the seventh month....shortly after. Feeling of doom, time standing still, only those with faith in higher power will survive.....days of gloreous reuninon, no sorrow, only joy for those who clasp stong to their faith in mother earth....keep still, and hold strong, my children!
February 18, 2000: A strong gazing experience, took me to a place of turmoil. A long road into darkness. Beside the road were traces of stone that shined in the night. The feeling was of today and tomorrow...then a strong surge of energy, confusing computer linked individuals, companies and countries....total chaos....then nothing. The year I saw was 2002, and it was, or had become winter. (Countrybtm@aol.com)
February 12, 2000: Say Farewell to Elizabeth Taylor -- I have a psychic feeling that she will die either naturally or from some kind of drug.... This will happen this year -- can't pinpoint what month. John, Houston, Tx. johnnyappleweed@yahoo.com
February 11, 2000: I think the Endevor will Crash as I had a dream that it would and I confirmed it with astrology
mars and jupiter
February 10 2000: I had a dream that the Pacific Northwest coast was essentially gone along with all the cities Along the west coast... Seattle, Portland, and all the towns in between. The earth shakes and gives, all the way to the Cascades.There aren't any computers and little if any electricity. The only cars that work are the ones without microchips for brains... The big cities break up into smaller towns. The Northwest isn't the only place experiencing natural disaster... The South turns into a dessert. Diseased land won't grow anything and even if it could, the rain doesn't ever come.Meanwhile the east coast floods. Maine will be an island, along with Miami. Small wars break out all over the country, that's still trying desperately to maintain some sort of power and
control over its people. I've had this dream about every four or five months for the past two years. It will either be an earthquake or nuclear war, within the next five years. Compounded with the harsh weather conditions due to El Nino directly caused by global warming, it will be a very interesting decade. Without sounding like an alarmist, the wheels have already been set in motion...Jessica Enouf @ tulie60@hotmail.com
February 8 2000: I've been studying the work of Nostradamus and have come to the conclusion that he knew nothing of our time he predicted that Ted Kennedy, would become President in 1984 and he saw a third world war on July 7, 1999 which didn't even near happen plus probably his biggest flop was the May 1988 prediction in which California would be hit with a massive earthquake and fall into the ocean. he also foresaw the collapse of the United States, not the Soviet Union like most people believe. and he gave us a date to all this 1994 what i'm saying is Nostradamus is a fraud, but for all those believers their is one last date yet to happen the September 11, 2000 prediction says that the earth will be struck with a terrible virus from space and during this time nearly 99% of the population will die i got this information out of an old Nostradamus library book that was printed in 1980. if anyone has any other forth coming Nostradamus predictions you can E-Mail me at Jodhad@intop.net
February 8 2000: This is sadly the last days of humanity i have peered into 2001 and all i see is empty buildings
silent streets and no people. whatever this means is a total mystery, but i don't believe it was nuclear because everything seemed to be intact and their was no damage it's almost like God snaped his fingers and we all vanished. i continue to try to unlock this vision and it's possible meaning but i still seem to be coming up blank someone or something doesn't want me to view this event for a reason unknown possibly supernatural beings at work here who knows
February 6 2000: Bill Cosby, please be aware of guns. Bill Cosby, please be careful with guns. Bill Cosby will have an accident with a gun if he is not more careful. We all understand your pain. Please try to be more aware of the guns or you will be involved in an accident.******* I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge.
I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns
with this knowledge. *******Bill Cosby will have an accident with a gun in 2000 if he does not receive this remote view. Peace be with you and all things. This is not any kind of threat or dire prediction, it is simply a peaceful prayer. It is well intentioned and meant to protect Mr. Cosby.******* I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns
with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. I ward away the guns with this knowledge. Remote viewed on Feb. 6th, 2000.*******
February 3 2000: George W. Bush Jr. will lose resoundingly in the South Carolina primary, and shortly thereafter his candidacy will collapse. Senator John McCain will be the Republican Party Nominee. This will not be the end of the Bush political dynaasty however... Jeb Bush will mount a successful run for the U.S. Presidency in 2016.
February 2 2000: I often have very real and powerful dreams. Many have come to fruition, others I have failed to interpret correctly. In this dream it is late in the year 2000, clinton is President and the world is at war. This war will start between the USA and China and quickly, (as in a matter of weeks), involve the entire world. There will be no place to hide from the death and destruction. There is martial law in the US, no more economy or jobs as we know them. We are all fighting for our existence. I saw myself and my wife working in a hospital converted to a morgue. All day we take the IDs from the dead, catolog the information and send notification to their families. All people in the US find themselves doing things they never imagined our country has become a military nation state with one purpose. To defeat an aggressive Asian state bent on taking over the world. There will be limited nuclear exchange, however the main method will be conventional warfare as our president will not use nuclear weapons after seeing the initial destruction they caused. There will be no discrimination as to who goes to battle. Near the end men and women between the ages of 16 and 65 will fight and die side by side. The outcome was not revealed to me.
January 30 2000: This summer i predict will be the coldest in a hundred years i see the northern part of the U.S. only reaching temps of about 60 degrees in mid july! i believe their will be snow showers in the north west until at least late may or early june as for the south i see extreme heat waves and drought that could last the entire year as for florida they will be hit with a series of hurricanes unlike any seen on earth before the winds of these will rip through the man made structures like pieces of straw even the tallest buildings in this area will be destroyed the hardest hit will be Miami, with much of the city looking like a nuclear bomb went off and the death toll in the hundreds of thousands the deceased will cover the streets for weeks as crews continue the cleanup.
January 15, 2000: My son was 9yrs.old in 1996.He told me he had seen some kind of vision about the next[black] pope.He also saw the Antichrist [an Arab] with connecting beard and mustache,pointed nose,black eyes.He also saw a large comet hitting the earth and a huge tidal wave.He keeps telling me we ought to move away from the coast.bible22@hotmail.com
January 15, 2000: Volcano or major fire in Mexico/Latin America this year.
January 15, 2000: Many city will be devastated with hurrican force winds in Spring 2000. We are experiencing the self destruction of the earth. The gases inside the core are boiling and will cause extreme weather changes, rumblings heard round the world, many earth quakes starting Feb. 20, 2000. World leaders are aware of all problems and have no solutions. Gather food and water while you still can. mbrown24@uswest.net
January 15, 2000: I have received information from guides that we are going experience loss of power in the spring of 2000. I am in Arizona and we will be without power between 3days and 2 weeks, depending on location. March 18-23 will be extreme problems. Africa is going experience severve drought conditions, fire, famine, millions of deaths. Also, millions of souls are exiting this earth plane, they don't want to experience the devastion that is coming.
January 13, 2000: 7.5 to 8.2 magnitude earthquake in Santiago Chile
January 20, 2000. Mika at ( lee@damien.edu )
January 11, 2000: Major riot/social upheaval in Houston Tx, sometime in 2047, 350+ killed. drEAM, 1-10-2000.
Troy Tate
January 11, 2000 earthquake on march 11, 2000. Memphis, Tn is where i had dream, early January of 2000, location in dream unclear. Troy Tate,
January 6, 2000: For Molly Ringwald, two tragedies in succession. One in Hollywood, the other in France. From a dream, New Years Eve, 2000.
January 2, 2000: I'm not sure if this dream is a premonition or not. However, it was extremly vivid, scared the heck out of me, and stayed with me for quite a few days. OK, here it is....
I'm in a large city located on the Chinese coast.(I don't know which city it is)I'm walking down the sidewalk near the ocean. There are hills or large berms between the ocean and where I'm walking. As I'm walking I start to see a series of tidal waves or tsunami's looming high over the hills. I start to run as fast as I can to escape them. The hills hold back the waves at first but, another series of waves arrive. This time the hills don't hold up and the waves come crashing through. After it's over, I walk back to the area and for miles around, all I can see are building foundations and rubble. Here's the clencher; there are masses of people wondering around in a daze. As I stand there looking, an older man walks past me and stops, turns and looks at me and says "See what happened? China will experience a series of earthquakes off the coast and be hit by massive tidal waves." He didn't say when or what city this would happen to. C.W.F.
January 2, 2000: I dreamt on 1/1/2000 that the millenium whhel (the London Eye) crashed down into the Thames killing adults and children. This will be a very bad accident killing many. alderbank@mail.com
January 1, 2000: I made an earlier prediction about the Anti-Christ appearing in Russia but when i remote viewed these events i could not have imagined how soon everything has fallen into place, it seems that the new year has quickened the pace of world events and now with Boris Yeltsin gone things will quickly spiral out of control i am 80% certain that Mr. Putin is the Anti-Christ that i spoke of but i could be wrong i don't think i am but their is always a chance.
December 29, 1999: On January first two thousand. There is to be a chain of murders. None related by murderer. But, all related by time. This is an occurance that many believe will not occur. Orlando Florida shall recieve many deaths. As shall NY. GriM0iRE@aol.com
December 29, 1999 There will be several terrorist attacks on US soil BEFORE New Year's Eve. All be by Americans, either in the form or bombing or computer terrorism. The action will take place in a city that wasn't expected to have any threats on it.
December 28, 1999: i dream a lot of things normally just death.but recently i had a dream that all the cristians in the world would be as one on new years eve. there will be some minor troble but only caused from panic.and people wanting to start something for there will be no major problems here in the usa.russia will have problems of some eceltric for they are still not prepared but even
as china has some all and all and a matter of things will be well .so take courage stay at home and enjoy the new year may god bless you each and every one
marlinemiller@hotmail.com
December 28, 1999: Presidential candidate Al Gore's bid for the White House will grind to a halt when it is revealed that Tipper Gore and President Clinton had an afair during and after his 1996 ReElection campaign the story will go deeper when news reports surface that Al knew of the whole afair and kept his mouth shut. Clinton will atempt to ride out the last months of his Presidency but
with such pressure it will be impossible he will step down on May 5, 2000, to end further embaressment by the country. the House will also find Al Gore unfit to govern and inject the spreaker of the house to finish Clinton's term
December 25, 1999: A man calling himself the true Messiah will emerge in the southern United States, he will be a charismatic leader that will gain worldwide recognicion after he accurately predicts a series of natural disasters his ministry will sweep the nation and be adopted as the official reigion of America. (These events will have happened by 2001)
December 24, 1999: My last submission about a week ago concerned the terrorist that was caught in Seattle. With that I now have the impression that if an act of terrorism were to happen it could be at a large suburban mall and not necessarily in LA or DC but in the mid-West where it would not be expected. Hope it never happens. but that's the impression I get. wisewood@aol.com
December 24, 1999: i have Remote viewed these events and believe the Anti-Christ will emerge in Russia around the summer of 2000, he will seduce his nation with lies followed by a swift return to communism the new Soviet Union will launch a nuclear first strike on the United States in the fall and because America will be caught off guard it will be slow to counterattack the enemy will be barely touched by U.S. missiles leaving much of North America a radioactive no-mans land.
December 23, 1999: I believe that the only disasters we need to worry about will be the increase in looting and violence caused by religous fanatcis and many mentally disturbed people wanting to validate their criminal actions. There will be an increase in crime on New Years Eve that it will break record. I am more afraid of what people might do to each other than the natural disasters predicted to take place sometime in the future. My suggestion is that people, on New years Eve, remain in their homes with close friends and relatives and try to avoid drinking excessively. Avoid travel as much as possible. STAY AWAY from famous, polictial and religious landmarks that might be subject to terrorism. There will be more murders committed that evening and they will mostly be connected with issues such as racism and family disputes. There will be some gliches in some banking and telephone services, but will be corrected within a week. Again, it is dangerous people we need to protect ourselves against. So be a grown-up...use logic and reason before doing anything that you may regret. Have a happy and healthy New Year.
December 21, 1999: The world is coming to an end. Maybe not as the ball drops this new years but shortly thereafter. Mankind has deteriorated our world from what it should be and we all will suffer. We must limit our resourses and food intake for there will be no more as years pass in the 2000's. 2011--beware. :( A sad end to a beautiful polluted creation. Polluted with Chemicals and people. 2000 brings saddness, depression and famine. Pray for your sins! Help the world. Please.
December 19, 1999: Although most of my submissions are based on intuition gleened from statitistics this particular one comes about due to the recent arrest of a possible terrorist bringing in bomb material at the border in Washington state. I feel that the materials for a device of mass destructon may be inplace and that more than one person is bringing in timers and other bomb making devices.
This most recent individual may have been a decoy to throw off authorities. As suggested in some of my other submissions holidays are always a time for terrorists to strike. Its around this time of year that people get into the holiday mood and let their guard down.Also large crowds at our malls and other gathering places, allow for persons to go more easily unnoticed. wisewood@aol.com
December 19, 1999: The human race will evolve into its next stage those that have already evolved will help those that have not and world peace will be achieved by 2010 but not without loss of the current way of doing things
December 18, 1999 I had a reccurring vsion during meditations about a missle heading towards israel fromegypt in daytime seeing going towards low mountains.felt hot and spring of 2001. also getting a quake coming to alaska in jan. of 2000 by 10th. measuring over 7. lots of destrucktion. one thing coming latley in meditation is the ball in New york on news years eve coming down to celebrate 2000 and expolsion seems to be connected with dark haired man called abda abbu . also 7 states getting hit with terrorist acts one i think is in miinnapollis cant spell it . also feel something to do with nickle in bomb in new york. juju45@webtv.net
December 18, 1999: i have had visins off and on and one that comes to me is of a missile heading towards lower mountains from egypt to israel flying low i view it . its dr and hot but in day time . think by 2001 in spring. also feeling a quake in alaska in jan 10th of 2000. measuring over 7. Seeing a ball like times sqare coming down and expolsion in New York on news years eve for 2000. seeing something to do with nickle. and name abda abbu invoved.feeling sven states will be hit with terrorism before march 2000
December 16, 1999: Preliminary earthquake Jan. 2000 in NY
December 16, 1999: From a dream. In the future the earth will be divided into sections like longitude and latitude. There will be no more countries. Travel will be restricted. A person will have to obtain a permit to visit the different areas. There will be less personal freedom, but more order and security. From E.C. <conke@n-jcenter.com>
December 7, 1999 I believe that the earth will strive on and that us as humans will look at poverty and racism different and we will start to get along a little different treating each other like humans and not like animals. I also believe that anything that happens will bring us knowledge and grief or confusion because our society takes somethings to seriously.
November 29, 1999 These are not really predictions. Sky(clouds etc.) &animal signs and Japanese earthquake prediction (more like trying to forcast by network) websites informations and hints from my dreams which seems to match the informations.I wrote here because there aren't many places I can write to about this since I'm not a scientist.
Here in Japan,We are expecting possibly 3 huge ocean earthquakes in Pacific Ocean side at the moment,possibly starts December1999...Boso hanto(CHIBA in Kanto Area,Tokyo will be effected ),Tohoku(north)?,Then Later(2000) Tokai?....These details might change as they become more obvious. From the clouds'(Every trigger it's been appearing) size...M7-M8.Tsunami might be worse than shake.Timing seems difficult.Crows are warning hard by voice these few days.About the 1st one,some people say around 8th(new moon trigger), my feeling is...it will be postponed till 22nd or 23rd.Or even later.But the later it becomes, the bigger it will be.Not majority,but many people will know the timing just 1or2days before from TV S-shape noise,FM noise/open,computer troubles,catfish's behavier etc.It hasn't happened yet.I'm mainly addressing this to people who live in Japan but cannot read Japanese.'Cause this is not an official information since usually scientists don't agree with earthquake clouds etc.These are more like an old fisherman's knowledge.Very old and modern people forgot.I'm not sure if I can update this information 'cause I live in Tokyo and I'm not in a safe place,so I might get too busy. So please search these informations on Web with Language help.Apparently another strange activity of clouds in China,..East China Sea right now,this could be earlier.I heard some Chinese people are expecting this and watching now. I've been observing few ofJapanese Earthquake prediction sites every day.Although small(underM5) domestic Quake predictions are pretty accurate(M7-'s timing seems very difficult),Before Earthquake hit Taiwan,few sites had an alert on southwest part of Japan,M5.Then started to notice that Somewhere in Philipin Plate M7alert looks similar to southwest part of Japan's M5alert.So they had it right last few times.But this means it is still a developing thing & it's not 100%. So I just hope I'm doing the right thing. ...Y.L.
November 29, 1999 THIS WAS A DREAM DATED 11/16/99 INDIA WILL TAKE OVER SRI LANKA IN 2004. top2000@usa.com
November 29, 1999 saw a Llama standing amongst the valleys of mountains. These mountains are powerful and strong with the weather. The bad storm begins to roll in, never like before. This Llama appeared to me in great distress tied down to the ground with a rope and bolted into the ground. The grounds were stable yet the storm coming from the north are unpredictable and have shaken the Llama. The Llama senses the storm as the trees of willows and no leaves on them, possibly fall or winter time. It grows extremly dark and the clouds are massive. The Llama can not turn it;s head since the tie is gripped firm to the rope and bolt. It sees out of the corner of its eyes looking North as its back is against the storm. Its eyes lean left then north, following the storm rolling in. This storm is devastating and will destroy what is in its way regardless of what is there. There is no sympathy from the storm. The Llama kicks and frightens for its life and sees its bolt give way from the ground as it begins to crack way. When this happens the Llama breaks free but runs the wrong way-it runs for safety out of panic west, should have headed east. It is in the cascades or near and about to explode. The Llama has the prediction but there is no concern for the Llama, that is the reason it was tied down in the first place, weather warnings of Earthquake prediction. It is winter but no snow on the ground, there are no leaves on the trees and the winds wept them away. There is damp grounds but no rain on this day, slight snow caps far away can be seen, it is 1999 for this prediction. I shake for the fear of people including myself in massive deaths, some will get away but head wrong direction out of panic. Little is known for result, except the Llama dies, knowingly. Llamas live in the North near the North along the coastal lines of 3 mountains, there were 2 big mountains in the background of the Llama with
one bearing the name of "M" is all I see,. One significant thing about the Llama is that the storm comes up behind it's back, unpredictable earthquake of great magnitude. Sorry but we are at high risk in the north along the coastal lines on the pacific ocean. Dont get your directions mixed up and prepare to leave your belongings, they will be gone. The bolt indicates a well known solid ground yet stable yet it has been known for problems. These mountains are beauty and breathless to see. Sorry to give you the info. I too live in the North, I am leaving this area soon and get my directions acurate. It is coming, get a map and find your sense of direction. This is record history making in the area, I have the fever and chills and the off balance from thistrama about to occur.
November 14, 1999: I had this dream yesterday, but Art Bell's bulliten board wouldn't publish it. it is about Egyptair 990 and a future air disaster. It comes from spirits who call themselves the Veterans of the Light. There was something that bumped under the floor of the cockpit. There was a bump felt. A third person had knocked on the door and was admitted. He asked the pilot something and the pilot was getting out of his seat when the bump happened. The controls no longer worked properly. They were "out of gear" or "freewheeling" The people in the cockpit were knocked around. The pilot tried his best to restore control to the plane. They were very sorry that they couldn't. Also the Veterans of the Light are worried about a flight out of Cairo bound for Turkey.
November 13, 1999: I HAVE BEEN GETTING THE IMPRESSION OF A LARGE US CITY WITH THE LETTER/S "A" OR "AN" IN IT P0SSIBLY ATLANTA OR LOS ANGLES OR ANCHORAGE WHICH MAY HAVE A CATASTROPHIC EVENT SUCH AS EARTHQUAKE OR EXPLOSION THAT WILL TAKE LARGE A NUMBER OF LIVES BEFORE THE END OF JAN 2000.
WISEWOOD@AOL.COM
November 12, 1999: I predict that the mojeans crew will all be successful. That everyone who tries to hurt them in any way will regret their actions, as all attempts will backfire.
November 8, 1999: I have a prediction about trouble in Tanganyika or Africa - fire, military fire and possible involving missionaries. from Sun 11/7 (marsiel@yahoo.com) M. Ziel
November 4, 1999: Move away from the cities. Take a simple job in the service of others. Eat only a little, never full. Live a simple life. Raise your children with love. Remember,whatever is coming your way, you can handle it. After all, you asked for it, or have you forgotten. You don't need to know, it doesn't really matter. You are immortal. Laugh out loud
November 2, 1999: Joel632568@aol.com
I wasn't yet asleep. I had a premonition. Let's try this again. There will be an earthquake. The only thing I can tell you is that it was sandy, a desert, lots of rocks and I saw people falling off cliffs. The strength of the earthquake will be greater than 7.0 maybe 7.4. I am usually right about his but I am off with dates. I suspect that it will happen around Dec 1, 1999. My last prediction was exactly 1 month from event to premonition.
October 31, 1999: The world is due for another great disaster which will happen between the next 10 to 15 years or bfore.
October 31, 1999: That during the sydney Olympic 2000 games either during the opening or closing ceremony something bad will happen. I'm not sure of what but i think it may be something like a bomb
October 30, 1999: Over the past year, I've had predictions about the second coming. I still don't know the exact date, but it will be somewhere in the end of 1999 and before the end of 2000...he will send some of his very important angels to explain to everyone the meaning of life, heaven, and hell....many people still don't know the truth...I think there will be 2 of them, and the 3rd one Christ himself...possible dates may be anywhere from November 3rd to the end of 2000, I'm not sure yet which one...but when it begins, all evil will be taken away from the world and there will be a great change...I have much more information which I might give out at a later time, it's too confidential to give out now...and may sound very disturbing to many people...my sources must remain confidential as well.
October 25, 1999: I just had a dream that i was in my neighborhood. in this dream a series of natural disasters devastated our country. with all this weather phenomena happening it seems it's coming true
October 25, 1999: We will be recieving the knowledge that we were, are, and continue to be alone very soon. it will be a sudden event that could lead to the ultimate challenge of all.
October 23, 1999: Something is wrong....somthing hase come without us knowing about it i can sence strong interfearence i dont know what it is but it is bad very bad ......im afraid to say mor fore it may be my undoing
October 19, 1999: The return of the Christ is already here. People are unware of what form the Christ took, and cannot recognize this person, for again, the Christ will emerge from humble origins, and will be shown as one who most definitely
did not seek the Mission or the attention integral to it, but rather, preferred that the cup indeed be removed. Many will doubt the words of this person, but only because mankind is yet unprepared to understand and accept God's boundless love.
The Christ will reveal the truth of God at the appropriate time, much prior to the date of June 2001, slowly, over a period of weeks and months, emerging throughout until that time. The Return will be revealed in the form of a feminine energy, in order to show the perfect human balance and peacemaking nature of the woman, finally demonstrating why the Genesis story of woman and man is so important in understanding how to achieve peace on earth. As a result, the true Godly approach to love and marriage will be revealed, to heal the wounds of the sexes. This will illustrate why the solution to all healing of all problems: world economic problems, hunger, homelessness,abuse sickness and the deterioration of the family - can be found by understanding the Adam and Eve symbolism and the true explanation of the Serpent, Satan and the Beast. The true meaning of heaven and hell will be explained, for those able to hear it. The true nature of all love will be definitively shown.
The beginning of this period will actually occur toward the end of the 1999 Saturn retrograde, most especially beginning around June 2000. By 2001, the earth will have experienced major shifts toward recognizing the Anti-Christ. He will actually fail in his attempt, and will be understood as the figurehead of a very prominent Democratic team,that is already in power. This power structure will be toppled well before the end of the year 2000, before the United States Presidential elections. At that time, the second Satanic figurehead will attempt to rise to power but will be thwarted by the activity of an American journalist working to reveal the nature of the Satanic power structure and activity, and it will shown to have been working even within the United States government for many decades. The reason for the anarchy and mayhem that is now taking place will be explained; how to end it will be shown. The first Satanic figurehead will be forgiven if there is remorse, but he will nevertheless retreat, with his wife and child, to a more humble existence in order to carry out the remainder of his days. This figurehead will be forced to resign his current position of power.
The earthquakes,floods, and other such natural disasters will abate as all understand what the Christ has said about energy and its true nature. The principles revealed under the work of the highly enlightened soul Albert Einstein will again come to the forefront and recognized as the truth. Science and religion increasingly will merge.
-Anonymous
October 17, 1999: Before the end of Bill Clinton's term in office there will be another attempt on his life. The would be assassin is also targeting Hillary, because they fear she will be the first woman President. She will be in four years.
james.craik@attcanada.net
October 16, 1999: There will be a major plane crash in Michigan, i cannot predict how serious this plane crash will be, but i do see people injured.
October 13, 1999: While meditating on the shores of a nearby lake early in the morning 9/12/99 I had a vision of thousands of children infected with a virus similar to Smallpox but originating from other primates. I saw the new pox virus slowly spread throughout Africa and then quickly make its way through Europe, Asia, and America as if it were a fire. Many, many children and adults get ill and far too many die. I am not certain of the timing of these events, but it seemed as if it were beginning very soon and certainly spreading within the next decade.
jbfoiles@zdnetmail.com
October 4, 1999: Had a dream Thursday Sept 30, 1999 that one of the Reagans' will pass away before the end of the year.. I thought it would be Nancy Reagan..odd.. I never dream of politically involved people.. will die suddenly with no warning. Fibi
October 1, 1999: On September 28,1999 just as I was meditating before going to bed, I had,I guess you would call it a premonition. I heard the voices of many middle eastern women making noises. Then a voice, almost like an energy, said "February 27 th. It will start." then a feeling of China somehow being involved. I don't know what it means. I just know that I should tell people to be careful, and pray
October 1, 1999: Massiges come to me in dreans and trances. Last nigt I dreamed of a huge U.S.ofA. flag being burned on a massive cross, with the words RED POWER writtin in blood. I saw 3,000 thousand bodys with the Star of David carved on them. When I got up I notest on my mirror 3 upsind down Srars of David, fantly in blood red.
TO FIND OUT MORE love3_john at snap
October 1, 1999: The U.S.of A will go to war with China. That will leave our national securaty at risk.With Russas help thay will destory 2 Big US citys : New york And L.A..
September 30, 1999: An earthquake of 7.5 or greater will hit the Bay area of California in the early morning hours in the first week of December 1999.james.craik @attcanada.net
September 27, 1999: In the year 2010, people will have discovered that the new world order is a group of men who already control us thru media and laws. There will be no police due to the fact that all their police powers will have been taken away. vigilantes will then take over causing great grief and pain. later we will discover that the media and politicians were all in on it. that all those wars were planned and that they were only games played by the very influential. we will of course be very angry. there will then be no workers and people will return to the meek farmers who by now will have inherited the earth. since they are the only ones that know how to grow food. not like us who only know how to microwave and use a can opener.
#271: September 25, 1999: Today is September 25, 1999. Two weeks ago from today I had a dream that Demi Moore died in a horrible, unexpected accident.
#270: September 21, 1999: October 23- November 23. Earth quakes in Midwest St. Louis will be badly shaken. A major hospital will suffer extensive damages.
#269: September 11, 1999: On Sept.10,I "saw" a large flaming object or a large flash of light, either an explosion or celestial phenomenon, falling to the horizon, if you look from the west coast. This happens when it is dark outside. This does not hit the mainland directly.A tidal wave could occur, but I think that we are just spectators. It looks like halo or it has a circular appearance. No particular date impressed on me, but it will be before this time in 2000.
#268: September 8, 1999: My name is Joel and I had a premonition while I slept last night. My premonition is different from my dreams. Within 72 hours, an earthquake will hit San Fransisco regiestering at least a 7.0 or enough of a magnatuide to destroy a bridge over water. I don't think it's that big bridge but a smaller one. It's like the bridge was built right over the fault line, underwater. The bridge was broken with the road going to the left and the otherside going to the right.
#267: September 8, 1999: Ex-President of US Jimmy Carter will face life threatening experiences on the 28th Feb. 2000
#266: September 5, 1999: MicroSoft will be split into four seperate businesses. Windows will be controlled by a committee created out of the DOJ hearings, these events will occur by the end of the year two thousand and two. Bill Gates and his stock holders will win a class action lawsuit by the year two thousand and eight. Mr. Gates will then pass away by the year two thousand and thirteen. lsts@gci.net or goudabelly@zdnetmail.com
#265: September 5, 1999: India will have a new leader who will give long term leadership until he is assasinated. lsts@gci.net or goudabelly@zdnetmail.com
#264: September 5, 1999: Italy will have a war on their hands equaled by the english conflict. lsts@gci.net or goudabelly@zdnetmail.com
#263: September 5, 1999: In the year two thousand plus eight, the stock market will be at twenty eight thousand. This will also be a time of misfortune for many. We will have just finished a major conflict in assisting England with a war on two sides. lsts@gci.net or goudabelly@zdnetmail.com
#262: September 5, 1999: In the year two thousand eleven Alaska will be shaken violently causing millions in damage.There will be two new major volcanoes in the region. Just befoe the year two thousand and twenty eight the America's will have gained cuba as an island state. By this time Russia will have become two states. Later on these two states will become countries. Yugoslavia will become apart of one of these countries as another state. Raymond VanRiper lsts@gci.net or goudabelly@zdnetmail.com Want to know more?
#261: August 25, 1999: Less than a week prior to the earthquake in Turkey I had mentioned to some co-workers that the average number of major quakes in the world are about 18 per year and that we were way over due. Having said that the planet is still way behind so I would have to believe we are in for several more big ones most likely in China/India or South America and of course the US west coast.
#261-A August 25, 1999: Another thing that seems to come to mind with the large number of storms in the Atlantic is the possibility of two storms combing to produce a record hurricane in 2nd week of September.
wisewood@aol.com
#260: August 24, 1999: On sunday, august 22, while listening to the canadian radio news i suddenly realized that the plan is to delibertly shut off power in all the major population centers around the world at y2k.. hence kicking off the new world order, and the global 2000 plan in earnest. hope i'm wrong
#259: August 21, 1999: Ronald Reagan and Elizabeth Taylor will both make headlines, in the same month, before the end of 1999.
#258: August 21, 1999: Brigitte Bardot will also make headlines in the next four months.
#257: August 21, 1999: George Bush Jr. will withdraw from the Presidential race.
#256: August 21, 1999: A major lottery scandal will ruin state lotteries for years to come.
#255: August 21, 1999 A famous person, thought dead, will actually be found alive.
#254: August 18, 1999: There will be a disaster on Sept. 7th,1999, and a number greater than 150 people will die. I'm not sure if it is a natural disaster, or from terrorists. But I see a large area of rubble; it could be a building that has fallen or exploded. I first had the feeling on Aug. 15th, but I tend to dismiss the Turkey disaster because, September was strongly impressed on me.
#253: August 6, 1999: From prayerful study of the scriptures,'When 10 nations from the North come down to try to destroy the Jews and two Elders will be killed in the streets of Jerusalem and their bodies will lay there for 3 days and on the 3rd day their bodies will be restored to life and be taken up,for all the world to see.The battle will end with Jesus Christs return to rule the world for 1000 years. For more,ask Jacques at jalodo@swbell.net
#252: August 5, 1999: This is my third prediction. The first two unfortunately were very accurate and as such came true.
In a meditative state I viewed a passenger plane crash. This was strongly registered. These usually happen relatively soon after I view them. I received the airline name but I'm not sure I should post it. It is a major American airline.
#251: August 4, 1999: I predict a successfull Bush-Elizbeth Dole presidental ticket. When this happens I have a strong feeling Bush will be replaced by Dole about 2/3's of the way through his first term. I feel like it will come about because of a lethal but not fatel accident that renders him unable to continue in the office.
olehuss@swbell.net
#250: July 30, 1999:
For November 2, 1999: The Pope will commit suicide. Something undisclosed regarding his earlier life will drive him to kill himself, and several of his "closest" religious aides. There will be no other popes after this one. The Catholic church will dive into a tail-spin, looking for a sign of the end-times.. but there won't be one.
For January 17, 2001: Thousands will die as the result of tainted beef at McDonalds in the Northwest (near and around the Microsoft headquarters.) Bill Gates will die and leave his money to no one - he hasn't got a valid will! Moron! The litigation regarding his estate will last far into the next millenium.
March 23, 2002: A seemingly successful space mission will go terribly awry when on a return flight, the shuttle, or something similar to it, crashes into space garbage that is currently orbiting the Earth. A massive campaign will be launched to clean up space,.. thousands in destitute areas of the globe will continue to perish due to lack of government aid as the clean-up commences.
<<<THE END... believe it!>>>
#249: July 28, 1999: I had a dream some weeks ago of an aircraft making a crash landing on a road near Toulouse in France.The aircraft was a passenger aircaft,the seating was 3seats,isle,3seats. It may be something like a Boeing 757. It was dark,also i think some snow was on the ground. Some survivors from the rear of the plane. The road was almost free of traffic. survivors near a small village. I'm not sure of the timing of this. murrayg@globalnet.co.uk
#248: July 17, 1999: I don't know... I just have a feeling that when the world ends. It will end as the Norwegeins think. A wolf will swallow the sun. The planet will freeze. It will be the equvalent of Mars. I don't see why people are afraid of dying. It's only another faze of life. Now I don't believe in destiny. I just hate the idea that I'm not in control of my life, But I feel that the major things we do are meant to happen. I don't know if I believe in God. Or if I believe in Jessus, but I do believe there is something out there that I don't understand. And I can except that. Perhaps its the wolf at the door.Willow Kate Rosenbaum
#247: July 26, 1999: On July 25th, I went to see 'Notting Hill', and had a terrible feeling that a horrible accident was going to happen to Julia Roberts. I pray I am wrong. aeallen@asu.edu
#246: July 25, 1999: The world will be only one race. the people of the world will work together. religion will change. The Catholic church will let women become priest. There will be no more discrimination towards an religion.
#245: July 24, 1999: ABOUT THREE YEARS AGO I HAD A DREAM. a SPIRITUAL BEING WHICH I PERCEIVED AS AN ANGEL PARTED SOME CLOUDS AND ASKED ME TO TAKE HIS HAND. wE WERE SOARING THROUGH AN ENORMOUS CITY. tHERE WERE BLACK HELICOPTERS MAKING ROUNDS AROUND THE PERAMETER OF THE CITY. iT WAS DARK EXCEPT FOR THE LIGHTS ON ALL OF THE BUILDINGS IN THE METROPOLIS. WE SOARED BETWEEN SOME BUILDINGS AND LANDED IN A ROOM WITH A MASSIVE COMPUTER SYSTEM. ONLY ONE MAN WAS IN THE ROOM. hE WAS REAL SQUIRRELY WITH GLASSES AND DARK HAIR. hE SAID "IN ORDER TO DESTROY ALL OF THIS, YOU NEED TO DESTROY ME." tHE DREAM ENDED AND I WOKE UP.
INTERPRETATION: TECHNOLOGY COULD BE THE "BEAST" AS REFERRED TO IN REVELATIONS
IN ORDER TO DESTROY OR ADVERT THE PATH TO DESTRUCTION, HUMANITIES' OUTLOOK NEEDS TO CHANGE
#240: July 20, 1999: My friend and I were watching the on-going news about the Kennedy search.When I first heard of this my heart told me John was ok.Then as the day drew on it seemed more dismal.About 1 P.M. it was as if we had passed a thought to one another.The sister Lauren had "passed" through.Then around 3 P.M. same day, when we saw the area the Coast Guard was searching we immediately almost in unison said, 'they're searching in the wrong area! The area they were in was at GayHead. I knew they should be moving to the area of GayHead Sound.Myself not knowing anything about the area consulted an atlas.My mind led and my finger traced along the area I knew they should go to.What I did'nt realize at the time is the atlas I had was 50 years old!! I had traced around to Prospect Hill.I now know this area to be Lobsterville.Somewhere in the area of the GayHead Cliffs and Lighthouse my heart said this is the crash site.As time went on my friend and I decided to call someone, where would we start? The tv. So we each went home and called.Cold and callous they were.Then the Coast Guard. I was questioned on how I could have "seen" this occur if I was in Cambridge!How do you answer to a non-viewer.I sure by now the C.G. thought they had some KOOKS on their hands.Well wound'nt you know around four or 4:15 the C.G. started to move about the area we had targeted. Finally we screamed maybe there's hope.Next came startling news they were calling it a day.With disbelief I just stared at the screen before me.Back to the phones we went pleading to continue.John is still alive I said I know he is. He has a huge head wound but for now he's still alive!If you stop now he'll die for sure.All I got was YADA-YADA-YADA.As I had stated ealier my friend and I knew Lauren was gone but the lights had'nt dimmed yet for the other two. I did not sleep that night. My heart hurt and was saddened by the conventions of people to whom I could not explain how I knew what I knew.I felt like the character Fox Fulder trying to explain to his partner Dana Scully the difference between the 'greys' and 'greens' and the 'tall dark ones'.So with NO sleep I continued my vigil. I AM TERRIBLY SORRY BUT I AM EXHAUSTED AND IT IS 5:AM I WILL FINISH LATER IN THE DAY. TO BE ASSURED ALL OF THIS HAS BEEN DOCUMENTED BY MY SELF AND FRIEND. TO BE SURE.
#239: July 14, 1999: A massive accident concerning a train is on the horizon, probably around Arizona.but it is uncertain, Many people will be injured. I see this happening within a few months.
#238: July 14, 1999: A few months ago i had a premonition concerning the USA and what i saw, felt like it could happen within the proximity of 10 years. I fear great danger with the jewish people as intolerant groups and racist people will attack them just like they did in WW2. Another Evil leader, someone with the letter M in there name will cause much harm and will be similar to hitler.
#237: July 7, 1999: I sense an earthquake happening the end of August, 1999, Northern California or southern Oregon.. someplace that is not as populated although the quake will be only in the 5.0 to 6.0 range.
An airplane/airliner crash in the south about a week or so before the quake. In a state that has a prevalence of the letters "a" and "l" in its name.
Towards the end of July President Clinton will make an announcement that will stun the nation. Something
that involves his past..
Before the month is out we will have one of the worst hurricanes hit the Louisana, Texas area. It will be the
worst of the season.. and I see a figure of about 50 deaths or maybe a little more...
name: Mary moeller
email: moellersunflower@yahoo.com
#236: July 5, 1999: I too predict an earthquake will hit somewhere in southeren Cal. I see many very tall buildings falling to ground, people running for their lives in vane, fire everywhere. This will be the worst quake to hit US soil in history. It will be at least a 8.5, with thousands of people killed or badly injured. This will happen sometime within the next 4 months. I see a broken clock with the time 11:13. This could be am or pm. I also see many people running and trying to get out of a tunnel ( could be a subway ). Last, but not least the day of the week is Wedensday.
#235: July 2, 1999: THIS IS FROM WISEWOOD@AOL.COM. IT'S TIME FOR THE TERRORISTS TO BE HEARD FROM AGAIN. WHEN EVER TO MACH ATTENTION IS FOCUSED ON OTHER WORLD EVENTS THEY STRIKE. IN THE NEWS RECENTLY A WARNING WAS PUT OUT TO EMBASSIES IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES AS IT IS FELT THAT IT IS TO DIFFICULT TO ATTACK US TARGETS BUT I FEEL THAT THE SUSPECIOUS PERSONS SEEN AT THESE SITES ARE DIVERSIONARY AND THE REAL THREAT MAY BE THE US PERHAPS AT A LARGE EVENT OVER THE HOLIDAY WEEKEND. I WOULD WATCH FOR TROUBLE AT LARGE FIREWORKS EVENTS. AS ALWAYS I HOPE I AM WRONG.
#234: June 29, 1999: On the 19th of June I had a dream that predicted how god works. I saw God using us as his puppets, seeing our downfalls and mishaps so that in his ideal world there will be know slackers or poor people. In his ideal world everything will be perfect. Don't mistaken this as heaven,God just throws us out here and allows us to live seeing how we change through the centuries. In his ideal world all will be well no fighting,stealing,crime etc. What I'm trying to say is that we're guinnea pigs in an experimental age that allows God to examine our downfalls and form the supreme race kind of like Hitler.
#233: June 29, 1999: My premonitions come to me by way of visions which just come whenever. I do not know how to initiate them or can I control the length of the visions. Many say that Los Angeles will have another big earthquake. I see Seattle, WA as the city with the big one. It may have started already with warnings like earth sinking or land shifting. I see a tower falling near a stadium, but luckily the stadium is empty. This may mean that it will not happen on a football Sunday. The complete West coast will be affected with major quakes in California and even Baja Mexico. Since I just found this site, I will continue to contribute with input from my just completed book "My Weird Feelings" and current visions that happen.
#232: June 28, 1999: Former SNL star Kevin Nealon will be injured in a head-on auto collision in NJ, thus continuing the SNL curse. From a dream 6/27/99
#231: June 1999: Terrible Violence & Warfare, likely in Israel/Middle-East. A very psychic individual with good track record, this is one very major dream that felt global in implication. I was praying in a chapel when blood began to seep through the seams of the walls, as if the chapel were submersed in so much blood that the pressure of it was forcing through the weak areas of the structure. I asked God mentally what it meant, and He said, "It is because Simeon's brother would not let him in." I awoke with a VERY clear sense of the importance of this dream, not as symbolism of my own psyche but as a world event prediction. I am no religious scholar, but have learned there are 5 Simeons in the Bible, one of these being the son of Jacob AND THE TRIBE DESCENDED FROM HIM and wonder if anyone can enlighten me about where/who the remnants of such a tribe might now be. The symbolism of the brothers who would not accept one another certainly fits theArabs (descendants of Abraham and Hagar) and the Jews (descendants of Abraham and Sarah). Relatedly, would like to mention the Beastwatch website for an apparently (to me) sensible interpretation of Revelation. Regardless of all these dark visions, folks, we must focus on light, not shadow. Only love and good will can help us get through the coming turmoil. raphael_777@hotmail.com
#230: June 1999: Actor John Travolta will experience a tragic event in his life before the year 2001. His reaction to this tragedy will amaze and impress everyone. His reaction, comments and lifestyle will be instrumental in creating a new respect for God, Jesus Christ and religion. He will also make the statement he had an intense religious experience will performing in the role of the angel Michael (?). He reveal this event and state the reason he did not come forward with it prior to the tragedy in his life was because he wasn't completely sure that revealing it would not damage his career. After the tragedy, he will no longer care about his career and will continue to vocalize his thoughts and feelings which will send his already skyrocketing career higher. OklahomaT@aol.com
#229: June 1999: Beginning at the present time, and continuing for several decades, there will be a nationwide, then worldwide, return to Christianity and religion. Govermental bodies will allow the return of prayer into public school systems. As this religious surge gathers steam, a peaceful, loving serenity will spread across the nation and around the world. People will return to church in record numbers, and rather than just attending services on "special" days and holidays, they will attend every Sunday. People who are sincere, loving religious leaders, ministers, priests, etc., will be held in the highest esteem, a position they have neither known nor enjoyed in hundreds of years. Americans, following several natural and manmade disasters and horrific, violent, bizarre crimes, will prove they are no longer willing to accept the debauched lifestyle and times in which we currently live. We will also make a consciencious effort to return to a simpler life and time, much like the days in the late 1800s early 1900s. Vicious crimes against humans and animals will no longer be tolerated, nor accepted or overlooked. Apathy over crime, atheism and the status quo will no longer be accepted nor understood. The cyber-space era will do more for Christianity and religion than any other media source. People will begin "attending" church(es) on-line in record numbers. Laws against cyber-porn, movies and television porn, soft or hardcore will be enacted and enforced.
Those who resist the religious transformation and rebirth will not be shunned or treated with violence, but will be prayed for will startling results. OklahomaT@aol.com
#228: June 1999: The climate of the United States' "Heartland;" specifically, Oklahoma, northern Texas, Kansas, will change to closely match the present climate of the northwestern seaboard. Much like the climate of Seattle, wetter, cooler, far milder temperatures than what is normal now; hundred degree days and drought conditions. This change will begin in the Spring/Summer of 1999, and with few exceptions, will remain a permanent change by the year 2005. This prediction is not based on a dream but a feeling which I have had for the past 2 or 3 years. OklahomaT@aol.com
#227: June 8, 1999: I feel that there will be many deaths in the up coming 2 years. People will start to see the light there will be a new awakening in our country (usa). I also see more plane crashes. (I sensed the one involving american in Arkansas) I feel that United will have one crash and continental all within the united states. People will feel a change come on. People will want to move to different locations. I feel a major upset for New York city before the end of the year either a bombing or a terroist attact. Our weather unfortunately will continue and get worse at times. We must come together as one in order for our humanity to continue. Love one another. Respect each other and forgive. Look to your higher being for guidence and have faith. I feel also that definate alien communication is already going on and will be leaked out within 2 years.
Luv4dragon@aol.com
#226: June 2, 1999: I feel we are in the begining of ww3,all countries will break down and begin war amongst themselves,an accident due to unforseen problems will cause a bomb to go off which will be the actual start of the end.(be back with where it will hit), Weather catastrophies will occur in numerous waves,getting more severe each year.The temp will be warmer every year causing this severe weather. This time in history will be the most horrifying for all Aug 99and Sept 99 will be the monthes to watch for the most serous changes.That will effect us all in some way that causes great fear. Watch for The sleeping giant China.The USA will loose no 1 status as world power,and be ruled by a country so different than we've been use to,if there's anything left of us at this time.Dates on this will be 2010. 2012 complete devistation. How many stone ages have we already been through? isis13@adelphia.net
#225: May 29, 1999: There's going to be millions of people dying from aids. I am Mormon & I ate some dirt from the land
set apart as the grounds for the Independence MO Temple. I had the same dream three days in a row-ghosts flying through the air & funneling into the ground on this specific Temple site. There were thousands of ghosts streaming into the ground from the air. I prayed to Heavenly Father about the dream & felt the answer was "There are going to be millions of people dying from aids." I had the experience about seven years ago (1990) and none since I prayed about it. Paul Scherffius
2040 W 138 Ter Apt 107, Leawood, KS 66224 schrffs@swbell.net
#224: May 25, 1999: last year i had a dream of bill clinton in grave danger leaving an aeroplane the dream also involved his fourth in line but as to what capacity i do not know
#223: May 14, 1999: Wars will kill less than the weather will.,.,just know this , the earth is going into a great change causing earthquakes .,volanoes and their fallout.,erosion,.. floods .,.,famine.,.diease,.and freak weather.,in mid east earthquakes will destroy oilwells and citys near them due to fires.,in europe quakes and volcano will kill 1000s n ruin most crops of the valley region ..,in south amerecia water will claim about half the continent due to eruption n land displacement of earthquakes .,.,in calif again land will be lost to the sea but on east coast land will come up where none was .,.,tex n florida u.s. are the only 2 safe states ,.,they have no volcanos .,,.in africa and china diease of over population n famine will claim thousands.,.,in all told mother nature will kill millions within a couple of year as she is doing now .,if you live in a fault region or near volcano .,low lands or flood plains .,.,move to be safe.,.,the earth will always be changing but 2000 to 2020 will reshape the earth and the peoples way of living .,.,look to the history of the 1800's to see what and where you are in danger ,..,good luck and may god be with us all.,.,.,tj
#222: May 24, 1999: Power failure for Denver this July. T'Gene
#221: May 22, 1999: In the ancient world the sea crashed upon the rocks and the moon shone upon the sea. In the modern world, the same sea will crash upon the rocks and the moon will shine upon the sea. Time passes and the surface situation changes and changes. Yet there are things that move much more slowly, they change very little with the passage of time.
Human society moves, changes, grows. Long ago the ocean crashed upon the shore and not a single human being walked this planet Earth. Now the ocean crashes upon the shore and today the planet is filled with many, many people. Human beings have come to this planet and they have grown and grown and still they are growing and changing.
Human society is moving forward towards a new dawn, a new destiny where human beings for the first time in the history of this planet may build a true society based upon human dignity and divinity, a society that is well made, in which the basic rights and needs of all human beings are met. They will build society in which none are exploited for the profit and welfare of another, a true human society where none go unsheltered, uncared for, seen as low and worthless, where the dignity of every human being is respected. All the people willl be considered important and the welfare of the least will be the indicator of the success of the society. For none are worthless, none are unimportant. Each and every child is the son or daughter of that most Beloved Entity. Each and every human being holds within themselves a great destiny - to become that which is sublime. No human being is insignificant. When the dignity and welfare of all are taken to account then a truly dignified and developed society will become established in this world. And at that time, the waves will still crash upon the shore and the moonlight will
shine upon the ocean even as it does today, for there are those things which do not fade so quickly with the passage of time, which are lasting. Through all the changes, all the difficulties, all the struggles, all the successes, they remain the same. That guiding force, that Divine force which is the very wellspring of all humanity, remains continually the same, unchanging and eternal. But human society does change and will change in the future. And the time will come in the not too distant future when human society will be more developed. Human beings will live in harmony with all the creatures of this world and with each other. They will develop an interconnected, interlinked society, where not one human being will be ignored and discarded and even the plants and animals will be respected for what they are. Such reverence for life comes when human beings acquire an understanding of their own nature. And from this reverence for life comes eternal love. For it is in love that human beings have their origin and it is in love that they find their home.
So the new society, the developed society will be one that will propagate love between living beings, love among human beings. It will bring the values of compassion, universalism and respect for the dignity, the humanity and the divinity within each and every living being.
#220: May 22, 1999: Be bold! Follow Your intuition! Make Yourself a medium for love. Celebrate, for the future of mankind is effulgen
#219: May 19, 1999: People will search inside to realise their Greatness. Light will dispel darkness. The Divine is within each and every entity of this created universe. Do not fear! The Great is Your nearest and dearest. That Divine Entity loves You infinitely, and cares relentlessly for You wellbeing. You are not alone. Serve with Your heart wide open. Realise Your beauty! Love is eternal.
#218: May 22, 1999: The future of mankind is bright and effulgent. Be brave, oh human being! A new society, based upon human rights and love for all will be built within the near future. The eternal light is with You. The crimson dawn of the new era is here.
#217: May 18, 1999: Train crash in India, train over railing or bridge. Unfortunately, many fatalities.Late May,99
#216: May 16, 1999: Is the "0" factor really dead? "If the Scorpion finds the seat of power, the powerful shall find him-a dark place to rest."
JEF
#215: May 15, 1999: Within the next 7 years, there will be 7 catastrophes, the first will be misconstrued and will be protrayed to the public as an act of war, although it will be by natural causes. The second will be by water in the center of a large country, the third will be by a blinding bright light and everything touched by the light will die, there will be no place to hide. The fourth will be the sinking of a continent. The fifth will be a war involving 6 countries. The sixth will be because of a mesmerized public, and a mass murder suicide for the people will believe it will be better to be dead than to live in the way they will be told they must live. The seventh will be something to do with the shifting of nature? Earth on its axis or rearrangement of the land mass, technology will not outlast the radiation, most of the populace will be lost, those surviving will fight the next war with sticks and stones.
#214: May 14, 1999: Having meditated for over ten years,one of the side benefits that appeared was a "knowing" of certain eents before they happened,generally two months or so before they occurred.The past events,such as the start of the gulf war,the explosion of Mt Pinitubo,the Rawanda massacres have made me confident to say that the year 2003 will be a bad one for the world.Not sure if the cause will be late in 2002 or early 2003 so 2003 will be become a bad year.Unfortunately I wasn't able to hang on to the feeling long enough to get the feel for what the cause is - perhaps on a unconcious level I didn't wont to know. These events have just come to me,in a feeling sense only - a deep inward feeling,cold and far away,the same feeling one gets when you're trying to recall a name or face from long ago and you are looking for it in memeory.These predictions stand out because of these cold far away deep feelings.When the one for the gulf war occured I was able to hang onto the feeling for a bit and by asking myself what I felt was able to narrow the date down to the last days of July,very early Aug.
#213: May 13, 1999: I have had a reacurring dream about men in black military type gear running aroun with guns and they are shooting civilians. They are terrorists. I believe they are American. Its like we are at war with ourselves. I have had this dream since I was seven. patricia@zoomnet.net
#201: May 1, 1999: There is going to be a flood in Boulder.
#200: May 1, 1999: I perdict that the year 2000 will come and go and we will still be here. I perdict that man will again show how in all the years he has been on this planit he loves to kill and destroy both him self and his planit. Now he has infected the minds of his children with his hate and will soon reap the rewards there of. If the futher is what you are looking for, look with in your self and exspand your mind in the higher awarness. Stop killing every thing for sport. Plant the seed you will get the harvest be it good or bad.
#199: May 1, 1999: I saw a vision of Clinton arriving in a European country and an attempt is made on his life. I feel very uneasy about his foreign travel. I also sense we must carefully watch out for the Chinese and Russian alliance. I see bombs coming to american shores. Possible California, Texas for Florida. I sense a strong continuance of the current war in Europe.
I also sense our enemies attempting to weaken our military forces dividing our strength. Watch for out breaks of war in other locations worldwide.
#198: April 26, 1999: Stephen King will author a new book "The Last Knight" which will be number one on all publishing lists in 2001. This book will win him a Pulitzer Prize, and will be made into a movie starring Jeremy Northram, whom will also win an Oscar for his portrayal of the King protagonist.
#195: April 17, 1999: War will escalate in Kosovo, Russia will be found to be providing support and aid, ground troops are going in the month of May. The war will spread to a larger area of the globe and become like a forest fire. Clinton will not survive his term, illness or death remove him from office. Gore will never be president. Y2k will cause minor problems in US, public panic will cause the most difficulty. Banks will stop withdrawls of large amounts of cash in September. Three world leaders will not survive the year. Troops will be on the streets of the US. The world will not end, and just perhaps the changes are for the best. Keep the faith.
#194: April 12, 1999: In the next week Russia will join in the war in Kosavo...this will be the beginning of WW3.....I hope we survive....
#193: April 10, 1999: Passing of Ronald Reagan on August 3,1999 This was a dream. Saw various news reports of his passing. ODIE459@AOL.COM
#192: April 10, 1999: Just a feeling: I think that Boris Yeltsin won't survive 1999. Death will be the result of his
obviously deteriorating health, not by assassination or anything similarly evil.April 8, 1999: I believe that due to the alignment of venus and jupiter, the cubs will not win their division this year the 1999th year of our existance.
#191: April 5, 1999: Isee that peopel will be spending more money than they make and think that there bill will be erased but there is a chip being made now and is being tested in video games ect... and cults will have half the worlds peopel mezmorized in to killing there selves so they will not have to indure what they think will happen on new years eve of the 2000 year . if you would like to ask any questions e-mail me at Luchia123@yahoo.com
#190: March 31, 1999: I had a dream about a month ago that I was watching television and I saw a nuclearblast go off. It was during a war, but I don't know where. The date October 19, 1999 flashed on the screen#189 March 29, 1999: What I saw was in the form of a dream... I, along with some friends and family were for some reason preparing for something, collecting canned goods and water. Then a loud siren went off, an air raid siren. Suddenly I was driving north on a very straight road, I read a sign that said "Haystack" and then it happened... a nuclear explosion. I saw it over my left shoulder to the southwest, then I looked in front of me and there was a wall of fire headed for me, with cars, bodies, and other things being thrown around in front of it. I pulled the car into a ditch, put my head down and hoped, there was a sudden noise and then darkness.
#188: March 29, 1999: In the year 2007 the world will hit final climax of shifting forces. The war is about over, with it's final ending with mass tragity. The chosen survie in both colors of dark and light. Yet war is not over for them. Fate of the world next cycle rest in their hands. To welcome the greatest Trainquility or the greatest Hell of all posable imagnalbe. All of fate rest amisted the hands of the Imortalals. Xen
#187: i predict that a massive earthquake will hit italy in july
#186: I predict that all that have made predictions need to search inside themselves to understand why they are doing so! Life is an inside job. If you could use your insite within yourself, my God how we could create a world of everlasting peace and prosperity. Remember, what we see in others, is what we see in OURSELVES!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
#185: March 9, 1999: Another dream I had..was a few nights ago as well..I was in a concentratiion camp..seemed I was in the "shower" to die with others..we were not Jewish..we were all Americans..seemed like we were all Christians..seemed like the Americans had adopted Hitlers ways..we managed to escape from the showers and hid on top of a building under a shed covering..we decided to stay there
til early morning..it was raining and cold..then a soldier spotted us and climbed to the top of this building..he started to execute everyone..he was an American soldier..we were being executed because we didnt want to participate in the "ways of the Govt." I dont know what this means..but when he put the rifle to my head I awoke from this dream...what I gather from this dream is that
our own country will become our enemy..our own people will turn against us..not other countries..I beleive this dream and another dream I had symbolizes revolt of each country within its self..mpp1827@yahoo.com
#184: March 9, 1999: Another dream I had was a few nights ago..I was in a foreign country..every family was taken hostage..we were on a camp..and all men were executed..determined that men are the reason for downfall of people..in that country..seemed to be Arab or Iraq type of people..normally where in this country women are looked down upon and shunned..women will be given more rights in this
country..all men will be executed unless proof of contributing good to the community..mpp1827@yahoo.com
#183: March 9, 1999: I had another dream about two weeks ago..I was at my mothers house..I felt someone call me outside..I looked out the door and saw the Virgin Mary walking towards me..she was 3 ft off of the ground walking on air..I went outside and sat on the grass with her..I held her hand and kissed them..she looked very young like a teenager..she was dressed very poorly and had leather home-made sandals on..she was very happy to see me..she told me some things about my life..then she told me some things about my mother..which I do not which to disclose..then she told me that many people still do not beleive that she is the Mother of God..she stated that she hears all prayers and loves everyone..she stated she wanted me to pray for all to seek refuge in her before it was too late..she also stated that the time is near for all to come to her for protection..that we must pray for those who do not beleive..she was sad when telling me this..but she said that I have suffered much and for this my prayers would be heard on behalf of others..she got up and walked away..I told her how much I loved her..then I went in the house..then I felt her call me again..I went outside and she told pray, pray , pray..I promised that I would..I asked her why she was dressed so poorly..that she was too beautiful to be dresses this way..she said that she doesnt always come as the Glorious Virgin but also as a humble person so that all may relate to her..then I awoke..mpp1827@yahoo.com
#182: March 9, 1999: Another dream I had two months ago..I was driving home close to my neighborhood..there was alot of traffice backed up..as if people were leaving town..I parked my car and ran home..which was just a few blocks away..as I came around a block it was raining..as I ran further down the weather cleared..as I ran even further closer to my home there was a radius of maybe 1/2 block that was raining tear dropped shaped silver droplets..when they hit the ground it bounced off and burst into a silver powder..they were huge like basketball size..then as I came close to my home..it looked like and earthquake had hit the entire street..I went into my home but half of it was caved in..I waited for a few hours for someone to come home but no one ever came home..then I decided to walk outside and talk to other people..there were many people running around..scared and crying..there were others on their knees praying in the middle of anywhere..I walked to the beach which was close to my house..I saw the water frozen to a thick ice on the sand and close to the beach..there were wrecked ships in the distance..yet there were people ice skating like nothing was happening..they were laughing at what was happening..almost delirious..I looked in the sky and it was black and purple..with the sun barely shining..in the distance there was a bright orange glow in the sky as if there was a volcanoe erupting in the distance..the earth seemed to have folded on each of its sides..I looked up in the sky and saw many jets from different countries..I could tell because of the markings on them..they seemed to be flying over checking over the earth to see what had happened..I remembered telling the virgin mary that she was right..and that this was the end of all human kind..that I thought I would never live to see this day..then I turned around and made the decision to die peacefully in my home..I turned around and started walking back..I noticed a man crying and I told him it wasnt too late to pray to God for forgiveness..he said he regretted never beleiving in God..and he felt it was too late..I touched him and told him it wasnt..then I turned towards my home and noticed a statue of the Virgin Mary..I told her she was right...but I had confidence that I would be ok..I asked her to forgive all..then I went home..that was the end of my dream..I beleive this may take place later in life..I cannot tell when..mpp1827@yahoo.com
#181: March 2, 1999: I predit that Bin Laden will seek vengeance on the 1st anniversary date of the bombing..this year..near NY city..will attempt to bomb but I dont beleive many will die..some will but not alot..mpp1827@yahoo.com
#180: March 3, 1999: I have had several dreams of the future..since I was 17 yrs old..I am now 28..I dont know if these will come true..I predict these dreams to become reality around the year 2009...
My first that I recall at the age of 17..there will be a 3rd holocaust..I was in a huge church made of marble..a voice called me to the balcony..everyone went outside..there were only a few hundred people..i looked out and there was the ocean right at the balcony..I kneeled forward looking down into the water..a voice said "he has come"..then I heard a very strong voice which I beleive was God began to tell us that we need to beleive in Christ..that Christ has been forsaken..many do not beleive in him..that we must spread the word of Christ..that there were only few that would pass into the gates of heaven..then the ocean peeled back into a rolling wall..I saw images of Jesus Christ..with the crown of thorns and I saw him nailed to the cross..then everything turned black..I was then hovering over the earth..everything was charred black..no buildings..trees..grass or animals..those that were on earth were either dead or dying..I saw images of people fighting animals for food..the little that was left..I saw images of women and children bleeding and suffering..He statet that we must all prepare for what is to come..that we will be messengers for Him..that all will be called or receive a message from Him..we must all look inside and find it..
My second dream...I was walking on the beach in the nite time..I heard alot of crying and moaning..I looked out into the ocean and saw millions of souls floating in the water..I then saw a knight come out of the water carrying a young girl..he said that he needed help with these souls..he said this was my job..to help..he said that all these have lost their souls from I gathered to beleive was suicide..I asked who he was he said his name was Lazarus..He opened his mask and I saw an old man yet strong..he was dry also..found out later that this was St. Lazarus..
My third dream..I was driving down a freeway trying to get out of town..I had my little boy with me..everybody was trying to leave..the streets were filled with millions of cars..I thought to myself that it was too late..that I wanted to die holding my son..close to the freeway was a park..I grabbed my son and ran to the park..we sat on the bench..I held him in my arms and crying told him that we were going to be in heaven together and the pain would be short and quick..I told him that I loved him forever that I felt bad for not being able to spend more time with him here but we would be together forever..I held his face in my chest and repeated continuely that I loved him..then I looked in the sky and a flash of light flew over us..then there was a loud explosion and everything turned black..
I have also had several dreams of people in my life..of a friend getting married..of my family..and several with the Virgin Mary..some of the dreams have come true so far..will post more later..
mpp1827@yahoo.com
#179: February 28, 1999: I have no date on the happening, but I had a dream that a Kennedy was killed by terrist who could not get to Clinton.
#178: Feb 22, 1999: Jon Benet Ramsey was killed accidently by her mother.She was killed by a blow to the head from a golf club.
Pasty Ramsey was swinging the club in an effort to kill the male who was molesting Jon Benet. Patsy walked in on the molestion in progress; the male was so involved with what he was doing, he never heard Patsy enter the first time or the second time when she returned w/ the club. I've always thought the molester was John Ramsey, but know it was a male family member. OklahomaT@aol.com
#177: February 22, 1999:
1) There will be an earthquake in central Oklahoma, the summer/early fall of 1999, though I feel the Spring of 2000 is another possible time. There will be no loss of life; but the amount of property damage will surprise everyone. The physical damage will be so great, the majority of the state will be cut-off from outside assistance. A condition which will remain for several days.
2) I-40; a major traffic artery through the United States will collapse in the portion which serves as the downtown OKC elevated crosstown. This may be in conjunction with the OK earthquake.
Both of these premonitions have been with me for a long, long time. At least 5 years. I never visited this website before today's date; nor have I provided these premonitions to other websites. I have however, spoken about these 2 events to close friends and family.
I don't dream my premonitions; I just "feel" them, that's about the best description I can provide. I have had others happen, but only had friends/family to witness I'd predicted them. One of the first was a crash at the OKC Air Show and the other was the OKC Bombing.
There are others; but since I seem to only be able to predict accidents/disasters and other sad events, I will not provide them at this time lest I appear to be a Doomsayer or a crackpot. I've tried to predict good fortune; and have on a few occasions, but normally I just feel the above sort. Tracy Jean - OklahomaT@aol.com
#176:: February: My own feelings concerning Jon Benet: A teenage boy was involved, not the brother, but a neighbor. I definitely feel the presence of him and have since the beginning of the case. I believe the child has dark hair, not terribly short hair or long, and was between the ages of 12-15 when the murder occurred. ppathways@aol.com
#175: February 8, 1999: I predict that iinthe year 2000, the world is going to end as we know it; there will be no more technology
#174: February 6, 1999: feel that Illinois will suffer two if not three devestating tornadoes in march or early april 1999. These tornadoes will be sweeping across eastern illinois close to the indiana border. I see the early warning system comes under fire because many communitys will not hear the sirens. The south eastern areas of illinois will be hit hardest. zxsma@aol.com
#173: February 3, 1999: At some time in the not-to-distant future, there will be a concerted effort by the U.S. government to annex the principality of Andorra (a small country situated between Spain and France) due to the fact that it has been harboring terrosists and fugitives for a long time and anarchy between France, Spain, Morroco, and Algiers is imminent. Information received in dream within last three weeks. There is great debate about America's motivations on the European continent, and it sparks a flap with the U.N., Nato, the Pope, and the E.U. becoming involved. The dream also denotes a new pope, one that is from France or Spain, and not the present Pope John Paul II.
#172: February 3, 1999: Recently divorced pop singer Amy Grant will be killed in an air collision after leaving a concert
event in Augusta, Georgia in 1999.
#171: February 1, 1999: In febuary 2015, People will live on top of crushed landfills, the lucky ones will die early, those who are rich live in abandoned warehouses and nuclear plants. Birth defects will soar.
The y2k crisis is biiger than expected. We loose all modern technology and have no machines to build more. This causes a lack of jobs.
#170: February 1, 1999:
PERSONAL NOTE FROM PPATHWAYS - I DON'T KNOW WHAT TO THINK OF THIS PREDICTION SENT TO MY BY E-MAIL.
A long, straight, blonde haired, big, blue eyed, big forheaded, about 5 foot five hieghted, girl about the age of 13 will die in an alleyway somewhere in Illinois soon. She will be shot in the back of the head by a big, manly looking hand, white with wrinkles. She shakes a bit, and then falls backwards. When the paramedics find her she is long dead and the blood is already dry and caked.
#169: January 31, 1999: My predictions are neither the traditional psychic premonitions or dreams but a sort of meditative, mental rolling of dice, concerning the future, that envelope me at different times as very strong feelings about manifesting events.
Southern California will continue to have earthquakes, some minor, maybe two realy bad ones, but no worse than the past five years. The catastrophic earthquakes will be in and around the Blue Ridge mountains, downtown New York, and areas around the Mississippi river. One or two of these areas will show sudden activity within the next three to five years. These earthquakes will be catastrophic because the areas are over ancient fault areas that have been dormant for a very long time with the exception of the area around the Mississippi river.
New York will be hit extremly hard partly because of the population density.
In spite of all the sound and fury of the Clinton impeachment, he will remain in office as president untill 2001. Once he leaves the White House it will be as if nothing ever happend.
In 2001 we will have another democratic president. Hillery will remain married to Bill and run for president in 2005.
Sea level will continue to rise at an ever increasing rate but will not exceed more than six inches in the next five years because of the increasing global warming. Th implication is ever increasing intensity of local/regional storm occurances. Most people will adjust/live with these changes and political figures will continue to soft pedal what is happening untill an alarm is raised
over the hole in the ozone over the north pole (not the one we already know about at the South Pole), which will begin to enlarge at an alarming rate within the next five years.
All the changes, good, bad and neutral that have occured in the past and are manifesting in the future are part of a normal trial and error for a intellecually and spiritually maturing earth folk moving towards a different frontier of learning and expanding into the physical universe.
#168: January 29, 1999: I feel the Pope will pass this June maybe the first week. This premonition has come to me twice in the last year.
#167: January 25, 1999: it is apparent that with the negativity projected in most of your predictions that negativity will prevail upon the earth unless the "light" people start becoming more verbal such as me which is my prediction: Those of light will be able to surpass all negative thoughts with a group consciousness of white light and good thoughts!!
#166: January 23, 1999: Bill Clinton will be impeached.Elizebeth Dole will be the next president.Michael Jackson will die.
#165: January 18, 1999: Long before I ever heard of the y2k millennium bug, I had a dream in which U.S. troops were deployed
on the streets of our cities. The people were frightened of the troops. I now believe that martial law will be declared in response to the y2k bug. I believe that President Clinton is already planning to do this, but he has told nobody -- not even Gore.
#164: January 9, 1999: jcrofts@hotmix.com.au . Please feel free to email her at jcrofts@hotmix.com.au if you wish one of her readings:
1998 and 1999 onwards.
I see a crisis heading towards the stock markets around the world and I see a devastating crash worse than the stock market crashes in the 1930's. The world will be in the deepest unemployment and economic depression that it has ever seen for at least ten years.
The Price of gold will go up a lot.
In West Australia there will be a change of government and ousting of Liberal government.
International trade and immigration will become restricted as countries struggle to survive.
Financially, the only people who will survive are those who put their money into solid and stable ownership of a house. Either to owner occupier or to rent to others.
Businesses who are farming and Primary Producer related who supply food will make a profit and continue to prosper.
I see the Royal Family in England celebrating a wedding during 1999, particularly around Prince Edward.
I also see that Prince Charles will be never King due to an assassination and early death unless the security around him is severely upgraded.
Prince William will never be King. He will lead an academic life and work in an area of helping heal
people's hearts and pain of grief.
Prince Harry will become King when he is in his late twenties. He will marry late in life, at least thirty and will have two children to a younger woman who is blonde and petite and slim. Yes,there will be a remarkable similarity in his style of Kingship, in that he will be a loving and much loved Monarch who will reign at least sixty years.
Princesses Eugenie and Beatrice will be troublesome, and willful. Their father Prince Andrew will remarry, but his heart will always be with Fergie. She will move to America and remarry when the girls are in their late teens/early twenties. She will do a great deal of charity for the poor and take up the fight for charities to survive.
Princess Margaret will die of cancer of the liver and heart disease, after a long illness.
Queen Elizabeth will reign for at least another fifteen years. She will be widowed by Philip, in the next ten years time (around 2006).
The reign of Pope will be cut short by his death in 1999. He will be replaced by an elderly Pope who is not an italian, he will be an outspoken traditionalist. He will die within a five year period and then be replaced by a young Pope in his fifties who is a suprise to all in that he will come from English or celtic descent and speak English. He will have done many years service in poor missions and be a devoted man determined to drag the church into allowing priests to marry. He will have a long reign, but his reign will be extremely controversial.
Russia will erupt into civil war within the next two to three years and will be overrun by extremists who will bring terror to the West. Very hard-line attitudes to the West will be shown.
International terrorism will be extreme and previously relatively untouched nations will be target religious extremists. There will be a airplane exploded in English and American skies within a close period. There will also be hostages taken of American and Europeans for ransom. Many will be executed . This I feel is in the next two to three years.
The next Olympics will be held in an atmosphere of fear. There will be a terrorist bombing attack on the village, and aircraft. This can be prevented with careful use of security who are watching all arrivals in the next year in airports. A great deal of international political arguments will arise. Some secondary boycotts will happen. Financially it will be a disaster if the facilities are unable to be multi usage and Australian companies will face ruin, unless greater international aid is given in regards to sponsorship deals. .
There will in 1999, be a major increase in sectarian religious terrorism. None will be spared.
In America during late 1998 or 1999, there will be a serious security scare or attempt on the life of the President of America.
There will be romance in store during 1999, for the daughter of the President of America. He will be a handsome young man who guards the First Family, and she will remain in love with him.
Hillary Clinton must watch her health as I see a scare around her health in late 1998, and 1999
I see a dramatic revolt against computers, within the next five years with many people simply selling and getting rid of computers due to health warnings, and mobile phone use will plummet due to same
literacy levels will be a priority and many theorists will return to traditional methods of reading writing and arithmetic and discard current post modernism theories.
In the next five years there will be a series of border disputes with West Irian Jaya and Papua New Guinea, and I see Papua New Guinea being annexed. There will be little that will be able to be done save the culture and lifestyle of the Papua New Guinean. There will be forced government change and immigration by non Papua New Guanines into Papua New Guinea.
African nations will commit atrocities against its people due to tribal and racial genocide's during 1999, 2000, and 2001. There will be outbreaks of Ebola , fevers and terrible experimental and germ warfare in these countries.
Southern Africa will also during 1999 and 2000, have a great deal of tribal based wars.
In Europe and Australia, during the next three to five years, there will be a profound change in the attitudes against the vulnerable in society and towards the poor. Governments will be uncaring and people will basically be forced to look after their own families. Many countries will discontinue government funding to charities and social security payments. Very conservative attitudes will see social norms return to judgmental and ultra traditionalist ideology.
In Australia and Europe , there will be a forced re thinking by people in their gardens. Those who plant gardens with fruit trees, vegetable plots and food such as chickens will find that they can only grow enough to feed their families. They will have pressure to give these away and crmes such as home invasions and nighttime stealing raids will rise dramatically unless their back yards are secure. There will be a dramatic increase in home invasions into suburban homes by youths and criminals looking for easy targets to rob, due to a dramatic downturn in economy and ability to get income supports from governments.
Extremist Political ideologies will arise, and there will be within 3 yr. a dramatic rise in Europe of anti-Semitism and racially based violence.
In Hollywood there will be a rise in violent genre films, and traditional gender role stereotyping. Media will be attacking those who have unorthodox and gay lifestyles. Many actresses and actors will face backlash in "morality campaigns" by extremists religious people.
Cults suicides will be prophesying an end to the world and doomsday cult suicides will rise dramatically during 1999 and 2000 and 2001. Several pitched battles will erupt from cults against Federal Governments in America and Australia, and Europe such as Switzerland .
Israel will in 1999 and 2000 be attacked mostly by neighboring countries financially and bans on exports etc to try to force Israelis hand regarding the Palestinian State issue.
I must warn you dear reader that these changes will cause a return to traditional churches and christianity will see a huge increase in traditional Catholic and Christian churches memberships.
People need not be scared as I know that there will be enough food and governments around the world will encourage everyone to grow food in their back gardens. Generally, people will be protected. There is light on the horizons. There is no need to panic or be despairing Those people who are well educated will remain in employment.
CHINA:
China will be struck by severe flooding 1999 and 2000, and 2001. There will be crop failures and famine in some parts of China. Their will also in this period is many mudslides.
CHINA:
I see several major earthquakes causing severe damage, deaths and injury that will require International assistance.
Ding this three years period, I also see that several buildings and apartment type buildings will collapse, and corrupt local officials and poor standards of construction will be the causes.
CHINA 1999-2019
There will be a rise in abandonment of young female babies, and those babies’ with disabilities will be abandoned. There will be discovery of proof that infanticide will be widespread amongst orphanages in China. Lack of availability of food, and no adequate medical treatment and poor provision of medications will result in terrible infant deaths in orphanages, will be discovered accidently by International Organisations.
The Short sighted local and official attitudes that fail to recognise the valuable contributions that in the future could be made by these babies, who are abandoned, should they receive the optimum physical, emotional and educational support by Government are to blame under the short sighted one child policy.
Chinese Government during 1999-2009 make ruthless attempts to ruthlessly isolate, divide and conquer dissident opinions. Several politically motivated assassinations of Pro Democracy academics will be reported as "accidents". The Dissidents will face the Government deliberate sabotage and terrorising of any Dissidents and Pro Democracy movement, and their families will face severe restrictions on housing, education, employment and access to medical care.
There will be many Dissident and victims of purges, "show trials" and "Kangaroo Court" type injustice rife in the government controlled pseudo justice systems. Several dissidents will die in custody, blamed on "age and ill health etc". Basic Human Rights will be denied, and in the United Nations, China will use its veto powers to prevent any official type censure in "Domestic Policies".
A major increase in arbitrary arrest and detention without trial will result in many disappearances whilst in custody and ‘Premature deaths" of those imprisoned.
The use of computer technology, Internet access by Chinese citizens will be closely monitored by Government and informants. Many will face jail for criticism of government in the computer world wide web.
China
1999-2019
Civil unrest will erupt but be ruthlessly put down and mass executions occur around 1999 and 2000, rioting and civil unrest will erupt on or before 2005 and the Chinese Empire will face its greatest civil challenges since 1917
Independence from China will be declared by minor republics of China and they will then be invaded en masse by Chinese troops.
Up to Five separate countries will become independent and return to traditional and historic culture.
1999 and 2000, Unexpectedly, close to a visit by an influential U.S. Diplomat, two Dissidents in very poor state will be deported to America and accepted by the U. S as refugees. They will receive medical care there.
The Chinese Government will attempt to appear as though they are relaxing their markets and more open door type policy announcements will made in the media . However, there will be numerous reports of companies who deal with Chinese companies facing financial ruin, reporting that payments will never be received , and denials of deliveries will be reported .
World Governments will back away from criticism of the Chinese atrocious record on human rights and freedoms due to the desperate eagerness of Multi National companies, and governments who wish to gain entry into the economic markets potential in China to avoid offending the government in China.
China will publicly dismiss any criticism of its anti human rights powers as "Internal Domestic Policies and sovereignty".
China will begin to dominate further the political situation in Hong Kong, with further reductions in rights of the people, and crackdowns will be against dissidents there also.
China and the Phillipines will be involved in several incidents involving disputed territory claims, to do with islands close to the Phillipines. Naval presence of Chinese warships and" naval exercises" will result in increased tensions between Phillipines and Chinese Governments. China wants full control of the oil rich islands and will continue to harass the Phillipines about it.
1999 and 2000 and 2001,Chinese archaeological expeditions will discover very amazing buried well preserved ancient ruins and artefacts and tombs and statues which also will hold evidence of advanced pottery and china painting and goods, like cooking and eating implements and home wares and jewellery. Some buried preserved clothing will be incredibly detailed use of mastery over needlework and sewing.
Artefact will also be discovered from the Mongols and era of Warlords and invaders from the Ghenghis Khan and prior to his era.
Southern China in next five years will erupt into civil unrest, with increased conversions to Muslim religions will cause a change in the southern tribal power base in remote areas in China. The different religions, and local conflicts on a more tribal levels will result in civil unrest and hardline intervention by Chinese Government.
AFGHANISTAN
During 1999,2000 and 2001, alarming reports will emerge from Afghanistan of atrocities being committed in the name of religious fundamentalism, and the interpretation of teachings of the Islam Holy Book.
(Out of profound respect for those of Islam faith I will not name the Holy Book, in case I unknowingly, and without meaning to, cause some one somewhere any accidental offence. This is definitely no attempt to malign Islam, as I fully support the ideals and the religious belief systems worldwide of any person whatsoever)
The reports will be so concerning to numerous decent Muslim countries, that opposition groups will require the U.S and other countries direct support and sanctions to be placed upon trade with Afghanistan.
Tragic and Severe infant mortality increases, and a severe increase in deaths of Women, babies and infant and children will be reported. This will be as a direct result of poor government planning and lack of understanding of the need for infrastructure spending and economic restructuring in the country.
The country will collapse economically, trade will collapse as well as a devastating civil war will re erupt.
There will be reports of atrocities against minority sects and other religions.
Many women, it will be reported will be forced into marriage for their own perceived need to survive, especially young widows and child brides will be common. Female circumcision will be common, as anti women sentiment will become the standard policy.
Women will be severely restricted, denied all human and civil rights, no driving, no education, no vote, no travel, Domestic murders will become common, n o free movement at all. The terror for women, will be as if they have been transported back in time 2000 years in terms of having no rights whatsoever. There will not be any movement within the country allowed by women and non Afghanistan people.
Tourism will be near non existent due to the hard line anti foreigner attitudes of the government. The whole society will be devastated.
Decent standards medical care, well qualified provision of Health care in Afghanistan will be almost a distant memory to its citizens. Poor antenatal care will result in a huge death rate amongst pregnant and delivering mothers. Several "Witchcraft" trials will be held, where midwives and baby deliverer doctors will be accused of witchcraft.
Government will not have the resources to provide basic health care. Several disease outbreaks will occur, and there will be a suspicion of the use of Germ and Bacterial warfare chemical agents being used against prisoners and dissidents. The country will be eventually invaded, by other Islam countries, desperate to stop the numerous devastating treatment of the women and the minority groups in Afghanistan, a series of atrocities against innocent villagers and women and children will be exposed.
Mass graves will be discovered in remote areas and villages where religious purges will decimate the populations. Justice will be via Kangaroo courts. Summary executions of academics, women and children, and well educated persons will result in a huge mass civilian exodus and refugees desperate to flee the devastating murders and genocide of villages and cities.
The current government will be overthrown and a more tolerant Islam government will be installed. International economic reforms and support will take ten years to improve the plight of the people. International aid organisations will be targets by terrorists in Afghanistan, as they will be seen as causing the power to be taken away from them.
Sever and devastating earthquakes will hit Afghanistan in 1999,2000 and 2001.
EUROPE.
Years: 1999-2019.
The proposed One European Parliament will have very dangerous implications for individual citizenship rights in the whole European continent.
What Adolphe Hitler, failed to achieve in the second world war with guns, this One European Parliament will achieve through guile, propaganda and deception.
I see the future proposed One European Parliament become a distant, cruel and devastating and ruthless danger to all of the Democratic values . The European Parliament will end up suppressive and dangerous.
There will be, over a ten to fifteen year period from 1999 and 2000, the removal slowly by stealth, of Freedoms of sanctity and right to life of all, restrictions of medical services to the premature births, Elderly citizens and the poor and marginalised in society.
Extreme far Right wing ideology will be accepted, with the ineviteable reduction in respect for individual freedom, and sanctity of life and Democracy will be a distant memory.
Employment, and education access will be restricted to compliant and submissive Europeans. Economic manipulation will destroy economies of those who refuse to comply. Europen citizens, and People without realising it until it is too late to do anything about it, will hand over more and more of their rights and decision making skills and adopt a nany state will look after me type reliance upon the Parliament for their lives.
The marginalisation and "Making Madness" cycles of discrediting those who speak out against the European Parliament grab of more and more absolute power will see the isolate, divide and conquer rule to crush dissident opinion, similar to the techniques of Hitler and the Nazi is the Second World War will see opposition parties labelled as subversives and person non gratis.
Economic rationalism will devastate the medical and educational access to services to the wealthy.
Europe 1999-until 2019.
European Parliament.
1999 and 2000
Several child murder and child abuser rings involving
Shock and macabre discoveries of many missing and abducted children’s remains in backyards of homes as well as bushland and forrests .
Death Penalty will be reintroduced in European countries. next 2 years to 3 years or so in response to public outcry.
Terrorist attacks on planes and European citizens will occur in 1999. The terrorists will be traced back to Iraqi Islamic fundamentalists sympathisers.
England and the United Kingdom will be targetted by IRA and terrorists from Islamic Fundamentalist breakaway groups.
Trains, planes and automobiles will be bombed as will government buildings and shopping centres in England, London and Ireland.
Nuclear weapons will be seized by terrorists in former countries of the Russian Empire. They will be seized back by a joint American and European NATO type force.
1999, or 2000, A nuclear accident will require International assistance in Russia and the Balkan regions, causing major danger to radiation leak exposure from a nuclear plant in Russia. All of Europe will feel the fear of nuclear plant damage.
Civilian populus exposure to radiation dangers in Russia will cause a dramatic evacuation of a wide distance around the Russian city.
Mass Graves will be discovered near previously unknown WW2 Nazi massacre sites in Poland, Ukraine and Europe.
In the Former Yugoslavia, devastating mass killing graves will be discovered of the victims of Serbian massacres,
Albanians fleeing will be massacred and their bodies discovered with tortured remains, and decapitated.
The world will do nothing.
1999 and 2000
Incredible Archaeological ruins and artefacts and fossilized bones, sites will be discovered which will cause amazed excitement to Archaeologists and historians.
There will be findings in England and France and Europe, also in Africa of very amazing historical ancestors of man, and theories will be revised, paeleontology and man and dinosaur remains.
Precious oil reserves and gas reserves will be discovered near England and Scotland in remote areas which will save Britain financially.
The VFT tax will be removed slowly in Europe in favour of fairer taxation revenue raising.
The Europeans Parliament will lead to massive reduction in the next ten years or so, in individual rights , will subtly continue in areas of reducing the sanctity and respect for Life, Liberty and Freedoms of Speech, Freedoms of Religious beliefs and practices, Restrictions to standards of living, Restrictions to Trade and Commerce, and restriction to Education and Employment, Freedoms of Association to unions and workers organisations, Restrictions of Freedoms of Travel , restrictions to all Freedoms will occur slowly and subtly so it is barely noticeable until it is too late.
The proposed One European Parliament, will over time around a ten to fifteen years from 1999-2019-reduce dramatically all citizens rights in all of Europe to maintain the European Parliament grip and control on power.
Everywhere, Human rights and civil and legal rights will erode backwards five hundred years. The rights and position and status of Women, will be turned back years to orthodox and ultra -conservative ideologies of mainstream traditional sex role stereotypes and a major backlash against married women working in the workforce. Education will be extremely difficult to access by the poor and marginalised in society.
What Adolphe Hitler failed to achieve in the second world War, the One European Parliament will achieve in terms of the Parliament will fail to acknowledge rights to Human and civil rights. Westminster traditions of Common Law principals will be reversed, such as right to a jury, the right to be treated in a court as innocent until proven guilty .The onus of responsibility of proof of innocence will revert to the accused , as history has seen occurred prior to the age of reason of Liberty and Liberalism ideologies that developed after the French Revolution.
Inquisitions of accused by judges will make it seem as if the Inquisition of early European Middle ages has re emerged.
There will be total autocractic and undemocratic Power base for extremist neo nazi and neo facist type ideologues.
Power will be controlled by extremely wealthy Far Right Wing Industrialists and tycoons, via political donations and electioneering support to the member parliamentarians, and bribes. Non white Europeans will be encouraged to return to their cultural ancestral homes such as Islamic, Arabic countries, and African nations.
Mosques and Churches alike will be targets of terrorist attacks and bombings.
The One World Government will by stealth evolve from the European Parliament, subtly and slowly introducing legislation that will , until it is too late to do anything about it, ensure the reductions to rights will not be fully recognised or understood.
1999-2019.
European member countries and citizens, will be fooled into complacency and handing over their power and rights to the one European Parliament . It will be later be shown to be corrupt and controlled by minority extremist s. Media reporting will severely be curtailed.
Common Law rights will be removed by legislation.
The individuals in each of the member countries, will fail to recognise what is occurring ,because of the manipulation of Media and propaganda,.
There will emerge in the European Parliament which is proposed, a concentration of Undemocratic Power and Control over its citizen nations. Individual sovereignty of countries will be erased.
Subtle reduction in civil and human rights individually amongst European Countries,, with freedoms of those who do not join the one currency the eurodollar will face manipulation of their stock markets and financial markets unless re regulation of their markets and trade is taken by Governments immediately-particularly the United Kingdom.
By destroying the United Kingdoms ability to remain economically independent and to retain the pound sterling, British will be forced to submit to the might of the European Parliament. Sadly, no "Winston Churchill" will emerge to strongly defend British independence and sadly Britain and the United Kingdom will be forced to accept the resultant decimation of their traditions.
During the next ten years, in Europe, a dramatic rise will occur in Anti Semitism sentiments and discrimination against Jewish, and minority groups.
In France , particularly, there will be a concerted attempt to encourage immigrants to France to leave and go elsewhere. Jingoism will emerge strongly.
A rise in far right wing ant foreigner sentiment will see denial in financial support by government to immigrants.
Several scandals will be exposed of Government ministers and members being closely aligned with radical neo nazi and extremist groups. Historical revisionism particularly concerning the collaboration of the French Vichy Government will be undertaken in attempts to prevent school children learning about what had really happened in the second world war.
English and foreign languages will be not encouraged and French will be heavily promoted as the language.
In Africa, many countries will look towards reafforrestation of deserts, and this will assist to alleviate the poverty.
Desalination plants will be built to pipe water from the sea, desalinated and then piped inland to reclaim deserts and create viable crops and economic centres throughout Africa.
Several African nations will allow democracy to their countries. In return for economic infrastructure support from IMF.
1999-2000
In Africa the world will once again have to urgently fund emergency drought and famine relief worse that of Ethiopian crisis and Sudan. Disease and drought will devastate the region.
Most of the children and women will face death. Few survive as diplomatic talk will be the only thing happening as delaying tactic and many millions face death.
Three African countries during the next three years, will genuinely discover oil , coal, and diamonds. However, the governments will refuse to spend the income from the oil except to maintain their power and keep the people in poverty.
Several African autocrats and dictators will be assassinated in the next five years.
1999,2000
In Italy, severe earthquakes and landslides. Massive scandals in parliament over bribes
Death of Pope.
Japan
Major earthquakes will hit Japan. Much loss of life and damage to buildings. Tsunamis will also affect with tidally very high waves on coastal flooding areas.
Turkey, Afghanistan,. China, Russia and Rome will have earthquakes that are devastating.
1999 and 2000
Massive volcanic eruptions will affect dormant volcanoes in Asia and some increase in Volcano eruption in America and New Zealand/ Australia hit by three smaller sized but still felt earthquakes.
In America and overseas missions,there will be three government buildings targeted
By Terrorism bombs and attacks by mortar hand held missiles launchers.
A suicide bombing of U.S. bases overseas by terrorists cause loss of life. Several American Embassies will be surrounded by militant demonstrators and the embassy gates will be forced open. Hostages taken and released later after several die.
There is a threat of war erupting between Iran and neighbouring countries in 1999 and 2000.
Major devastating Earthquakes will hit Turkey, Iran and Iraq in 1999 and 2000.
Iraq will defy the U.N. and release chemical warfare against the Kurds in 1999 and 2000.
A serious attempt physically on the life or THREAT ON THE LIFE OF Clinton in 1999.
Prince Charles has serious assassination attempt on his life, bodyguard shot unless security around the entire Royal family is rapidly improved. Accident on a holiday puts the Princes in hospital.
Unless Roya;l security is severely improved, two shall die at the hands of a terrorist attack.
Terrorist attacks by Militant Muslim Phillipino terrorists against the Phillipino Government army bases and government buildings 1999 and 2000.
These are my predictions for the years 1999,2000 up until 2019.
May the Holy Spirit keep those safe. Amen.
Thankyou
TARA. contact me
I am available for Media interviews and International chat shows interviews. I am available to advise Heads of Governments, and Governments worldwide. I am available to travel internationally, and will only charge for consultations ,personal security consultant protection accompanying me, and accommodation and travel expenses.
#163: January 6, 1999: On Jan.2, 1999, there were three individuals came to me while I was in a dream state, one was silent, the other two told me, don't worry about the year 2000, the worst will happen on August 7, 2001 in Mexico. I have had these visions before and they have come to pass. I hope this one doesn't, because we will have a hard time living through this.
#162: January 4, 1999:: I am not a psychic, just relating one of a series of dreams I have had over the last year. recording this one because I have had two relating to this dream. I have seen a very big black cloud moving like I have never seen across the our land. First dram revealed a very evil source,killing everything in its path. Six months or so later another, this one was pelting rock hard balls of ice in front of it and then the cloud,tried to keep two children from going outside and they seaked out and sortly died there after, people think it is the plague. building torn down, burnt from fear, hard to find shelter.the dream was ending with me talking about it to a family, This is not the plague, only those who are out in it will die, stay inside, Two more will come in March. Then I woke up.
#161: December 31, 1998: had a short dream on the morning of October 13, 1998 In this dream NBC news anchor Tom Brokaw had announced, Libyan leader Muammar Qaddaffi died today in Geneva, Switzerland."
Has anyone else had this dream.
#160: December 30, 1998: Castro will die in 1999. The financial markets will go into a steep decline in July or August, 1999, causing a recession which will bring on a severe depression. Bin Laden will finance a terrorist act in Washington, D.C. or New York City which will cause a great loss of life.
#159: December 30, 1998: An assassination attempt will be made against President Clinton probably before June 1999. The pupratrator will be a small dark man of foreign birth. Also an attempt will be made against the Prime Minister of Israel in 1999. One of these attempts will be successful but I cannot tell which.
$158: December 28, 1998: Again i come thru drelma to say to you mount pinatubo will explode with greivous damage to those living in its shadows. those should look to remove themselves from an area away. this is likely to occure in the time of the new year at time of full moon in spring.
popocapetl is also likely to explode with great force near a new moon within planting.
one read of another speaker that there will be a tidal wave hit the northwest states int he next year. of this we must concur that a tsunami of great proportions will ocur from a rift in the earth in the far area of the pacific north near the area of north of the japans and they as well will suffer from the great waters. damages will likely be too noorth of washington state down thru
the washington state and oregon but not further. inland it may to the mountains but no further. while this seems likekly at this time oef writing it may abate if the land slows.
#157: December 28, 1998: This is from: drelma@hotmail.com. I am a trance channel. in this coming solar period, there likely will occur a great many natural disasters in china,. the yellow river will flood far to its banks and many will perish, and several earthmovings will occur to engulf those who live within. china will not be able to feed its poeples as the rice will be there, buried in the floods.there
will be no invasions of otherlandds they will be forced to break into smaller areas to feed the peoples.as tibet stands as it is for several more years. the dalai lama will stay thru the millenium for many years to come and will see the freedom of his poeple but as a very old man. taiwan will stay free as the chinese gov ermanet is not capable of takeing it.
the clinton governament will stand until the next elections but he wil be able to pay the fines that he will incur. several republicans and democrat office holders will step down as thehy will be unable to withstand the scruteny of the public. this is going to occur int he earlly part of the year before the next elections are able to start.
saddam will remain for the next year but will succum to a bullet from a leutenant of his closest arms. he will be able to set a single bomb of destructions unto the arab kuwait which will cause the world to upraor. it is then that a man at arms will kill him. this is likely to occur in one and one half turnings of hte world.
we will come again when it its correct to come. we thanks y ou for the readings of ours. we are of a similar plane of existence as the high angels gabriel. perhaps you may call us simply 'thru drelma'
#156: December 27, 1999: 1999 will see a nuclear "accident" in the U.S. Northwest area. Stock market will rise, crash and correct itself leaving inflated stocks in the dust. Panic about food due to Y2K. Irrational behaviour of masses as they struggle in complete confusion. More violence and disease this year. "Fire from the Sky" senario very likely this year. Cassini probe returns this summer
with pounds of plutonium... Major earth changes with volcanos starting the process. Mexico City is great danger. Beast moves into next phase of Global Control with marking of public. Recent dream revealed thousands of people living in their cars, houses no longer there. Husband's dream - 1/2 the world spun one way. 1/2 the world devasted - other 1/2 OK.
#155: December 18, 1998: I predict that there will be a tsunami in the middle of january 1999, which will kill injure, not kill around 10 people, and will mess up the houses along the coast of where the tsunami takes place. Prediction of Happening time and place: Around January 17, 1999, at 9:00 eastern. On the coast of Puerto Rico.
#154: December 11, 1998: In a dream, i looked up through my binoculars. I saw another Earth descending upon us. This was a sign of a new government coming for America. There was Chinese writing on it, which suggests we will be overthrown by an asian government. I see deep corruption in our world, and i saw a traitor who is a high ranking official. President Clinton will get impeached. Some kind of plague will break out early 99 having to do with food.
#153: December 7, 1998: Boulder, of course a Parent could not give up both children..Protect the living, God forgives. These are the very best of times... Stock market will zoom in l999. MRK will split, WLA will tank, Kiss will soar. 30 yr mtg best option with rates below 6% creating wealth to early 20 buyers.
Great expectations for those over 70. New beginnings for those over 50. Brains beget comfort, happiness and wealth if one will pause to look beyond 1999. Thanks to Art L and Dave, adoptees that swam faster than the sharks. Power is at the polls, not in Washington, so ............................... GET REGISTERED AND VOTE!
Intuna
#152: December 4, 1998: The mankind, not the world, will eventually come to an end not suddenly or soon but it as a water-color rinsed by water. In the US the dumbing down of our schools and universities will continue bring about Dark Ages for the sciences. The rich will become richer, the poor can not become any poorer, but the middle class will work longer and harder to maintain their status quo. People no longer have time for relationships. The children and the elderly suffer. Road rage and rudeness increase as people xxpress their emptiness and frustrations. TV and internet, and sheer exhaustion siphon off enough rage to prevent a cleansing revolution. (As those in power had hoped.)The average American will goquietly mad. For a while the rich ride on the back of the middle class as if on the back of zombie beast of burden. Within the next century the US will collapse under its own weight as the Soviet Union.The world economy will be devastated. eventually, people will be forced into slower, simpler lifestyles. The world's population continue to increase. Science fueled this population boom. Only Science can cure it. If the light of a genius does not illume the Dark Ages, humanity will die in its own wastes. Toxic environment, disease and starvation will thin our numbers. Too late, it will be recognised that the colonization of outer space would have been the only humane solution to the population problem.
These predictions were revealed to me by extrapolation.
#151: December 3, 1998: I had a premonition that a major earthquake would hit the SF Bay area in the next 72 hours While I don't feel certain about this premonition in the way that I have about others, I feel strongly enough to register it with you.
I have a hunch that it will be a 7+ quake.
#150: November 29, 1998: President Clinton will not be impeached.He and Mrs.Clinton will divorced soon after his term ends. blh2403@aol.com
#149: November 18, 1998: Power will fail and Bill Clinton will use executive priv. to start marshall law. His real intentions for the country will then known as China will soon invade afterwards. This is why he allowed foreigners to have our satellite secrets. China will NOT win but it will be a long battle. Many people from California, Washington, Oregon, Nevada, Arizona, New Mexico, and other surrouding states will die.
#148: November 18, 1998: Stock market about to SURGE. * Yeltsin gone soon. * Foreign markets especially Russia and China becoming very important. *Greenland to be in the news soon, big story. Euro Disney to "reorganize"soon. * Documents discovered in Atlanta, Georgia expose scandal. Nationwide ramifications.* Prince William to make public statement.* Barbara Striesand will become ill, Sylvester Stallone will experience family tragedy. These items will be in newspapers during next four months. Also, Monica Lewinsky to marry by summer 99.
#147: 18, 1998: In July of 99 a disaster will come to northernAmerica. 2 million people will die. An explosion so profound, people will think its the sun in the midnight sky. Screams will be filled with swift passion. Evil will grow larger then life and mankind will be led to the depths of hell by false hopes. As Cassini falls, so does hope and faith. Tears will become rivers and blood will oceans in Gods war of justice. the mark will be mans only identity. Flesh will melt and souls shall fall. Natus A will rise against man. From: July 1999 to December 2001, Kelley C. King, Daily visions, dreams and fears (pray for salvation please)
#146: November 17, 1998: There will be no type of biblical cataclism in the year 2000....the new mallinium doesnt even start until 2001. The presents of life "out there" will be made known by the year 2002 but will only be in the form of beeps and signals. The 2k problem will almost be solved by mid 1999 but..there will be power failers in some cities and computer problems in the banking industry but it will all be cleared up successfully
#145: November 13, 1998: At midnight, Jan1,2000, the power will go off. This is the beginning of the Biblical tribulation. There will be no rapture...that is Christian myth. This trying time will last through 2006 at which time the true nature of the ant-christ will become obvious.
.
#144: Zachah November 11 1998: Premonition Severe Natural/Geological Disasters will change the face of the planet 2012... i'm not sure of the exact date: May 5th?
#143: 7, 1998: A war will errupt (not necessairly in N.America). From the sky and on the ground they will come and people will turn to religion and pray in masses. The words will fly in the air. We cannot concentrate on the meaning or understand.
Teams will go up to people and give them something (tablets) to put in their mouths to protect them (not religion, science).
All these flying soucers will fill the sky , millions of them. They look just like us.
The leader will march in, gallantly on a horse.
He will go on and on circling around his troops until his horse falls to the ground with exhustion and so will he.
This came to me in a dream.(around Sep. 1997) At the time I had reason to believe that this would happen in the middle east. email: johnson73@hotmail.com
#142: November 2, 1998: We will no longer use money after 2001. We will have barcodes in our skin. More and more people will come against the church. Jon Benet was raped and killed by her brother Burke in what started out as a game/cruel joke.I know this. Diana was murdered by Buckingham. There will be a terrible plane crash (its a red and white plane.)The dow jones will crash in october/november of 99'.
#141: November 2, 1998: O.j killed Nicole because she would not let him spent time at the resturant with her after her recital and he was jealous of her boyfriend. Cancer will be cured.Aids was a man-made virus by some mad scientist who hated gays in the 70's.He injected 70 of them (they thought it was for something else) and they got 50 dollars each .acolella@yahoo.com
#140: November 2, 1998: A bad hurricane will wipe out parts of Hawaii and Las Vagas will have a bad fire
#139: October 26, 1998: I have a history of premonitions,sometimes years apart that come true very soon after. I also have dreams, and when strong enough, ususally come true. The bad thing is they concern disasters or death. Last night I dreamed I saw a huge commercial airliner crossing a city skyline while trying to land. The entire tail section was on fire, and then it crashed, but I did not see the actual crash. I woke up, but went back into the same dream again. It may mean something and may not. The last time I had a plane crash dream was about 20 years ago and I dreamed the band Lyrnd Skynrd was killed. I told people because I had no reason to think of this band. About a month later they were in a plane crash.
#138: October 25, 1998: I see a major accident happening in Europe sometime in summer of 1999.
Possibly a nuclear detonation, causing much confusion worldwide and possibly leading to war.
#137: October 10, 1998: I predict that Hilary Cliton well become President. She well be duly elected. When this well take place well be within the next 12 years. Bill well not be either an asset or a hindrance to her. He may not even be in the picture at that time.
#136: October 10, 1998: Impending economic troble following Bill Clintons impeachment.
#135: October 8, 1998-Dream- Space Shuttle will explode moments after lift off. Debris will rain down on spectators and NASA. The crews cabin will come into contact with vehicles in the south causeway viewing area. The static road viewing area will be obliterated. N Star 9@aol.com
#134: October 2, 1998: JonBenet Ramsey's mother and father know who murdered her. Mother is hiding something. The little girl knows her murderer well and trusts him or her. More information will be released after the grand jury indictment I see more love and peace in the world than ever before. The world will not end... The judgement day is an individual matter.
#133: September 30, 1998: I dreamt the world will end for me with a big flaming rock smashing my car on Highway 92 going east bound just as leavintg the highrise section. Was a really big flaming hot bolder. Seems we will have giant meteor storm or volcanic activity sometime in future. Wich I could avoid this one.
#132: September 29, 1998: IN THE YEAR 2002, BILL CLINTON WILL BE ON TRIAL FOR PERJURY IN THE WHITEWATER SCANDAL ALONG WITH HIS WIFE. HE WILL ALSO BE CHARGED WITH ORDERING THE COVER UP OF FOSTER'S "SUICIDE" AND THE REMOVAL OF HIS BODY FROM THE WHITE HOUSE (OBSTRUCTION OF JUSTICE). THERE WILL BE OTHER CHARGES REGARDING THE "CLINTON BODY COUNT"
#131: September 26, 1998: A virus will reach the mid-atlantic states on Feb 3, 1999 spreading and infecting 3 million people. Over half of these people will suffer brain damage. The source of the virus will come from a Nigerian imigrant and settling in Virginia Beach, Virginia. The Dow will fall to 2487 on fear that the entire nation will be wiped out.
#130: September 23, 1998: I predict that our Earth will continue on it's present course around the Sun and on it's evolutionary surface for 4 to 5 billion years. I predict that the human race will evolve into a loving, peaceful single race. I predict religion will become more individualistic based upon love and care for self and all others. I predict that UFO's, Loch Ness Monsters, ghosts, Big Feet, and all other human fun-loving ideas will disappear as we will no longer need to invent their existence as we will be secure within our love and concern for others and all other matter. I predict that the continents will tectonically move together in millions of years forcing the issue that we are all in this together with the environment that we choose to live in. I predict
many normal hardships and normal goodships during the coming years...just as one would expect there would be if life were to exist.
#129: September 23, 1998: Sandy something pale blue and white has to do with unborn baby
#128: September 19, 1998: I have nothing to tell them they will find their own way. It is what we have been doing since time imortal. peace be with us. There is something coming down but we will be alright. We can change our future. Be kind to each other and smile it makes the whole day go better. You are a child of the light and God or the creator loves you. Don't take everything so serious. Have fun and try not to hurt another.
#127: September 19, 1998: Life will go on. No matter what. In one way or the other. The light is there always we just have a hard time to find and see it. You don't have to look far it is within us, but we do get clouded up. You just gotta keep trying. This time period isn't easy on any of us. right! It is an exciting time and a bad time. Prediction another titanic coming. But it won't be that bad
#126: September 17, 1998: At aprox. 2155 on Sept 17, 1998 I felt a tremmor that lasted for aprox 30 sec. with subsequent aftershocks. My co-workers felt nothing. On occasions in the past these tremmors have preceeded major Earthquakes experienced throughout the world by hours, days. SF EQ = 2 days. (N Star 9@aol.com)
#125: September 15, 1998: I predict that President Clinton will resign within one to two months.
When he resigns, Hillary will leave him and then be interviewed by Barbara Walters. She will say that she stayed with her husband for the good of the country. This is just a deep feeling. curtisorrell@hotmail.com
#124: September 12, 1998: Felt & saw image of a nuclear bomb going off in Europe. Could be France or Germany..or somewhere else 9-12-98 Saintanon@aol.com
#123: 9-11-98 Felt a great discovery being found in Egypt next year 1999.
#122: September 9, 1998: I've also had a daytime premonition about economic upheaval in the United States after the November election. Something about the return of inflation. rbrice@tisny.com or romanesq@mindspring.com
#121: September 9, 1998: I've had dreams of a severe weather related phenomena, something akin to a tidal wave hitting the northwest portion of the United States and doing major damage with major loss of life: in the thousands. I don't know if this is to happen soon. It was a dream that I can't quite place as being a "normal" one.
#120: August 24, 1998: Sorry to here your server was down. No way to date two of the premonitions. The first one concerned the Pope who I feel may not survive till the Fall months. I feel he will be on a plane perhaps flying to th US for treatment when he passes on.
#119: August 24, 1998: The second one was just a few days prior to the bombings in Africa. I felt that terrorist would become active again with perhaps the bombing of a large city on the West coast either S.F. or L.A. Since then I get an even stronger feeling that such things as dams or strickly civilian facilities could be attacked perhaps a water supply even. Watch around the holidays perhaps on the anniversary of the Pan Am bombing over Lockerby.
#118: August 24, 1998: Just prior to the smmall quakes in CA. I felt that some small activity would be felt there perhaps a 5.0 or so. I still feel that this is a precursor to a major quake 7.0 or better in the U.S. maybe the Aluetian Islands or China.
#117: August 24, 1998: Lastly a week before Clinton testified about his affair with Lewinski I felt he was guilty but would stick to his story about no affair. I still feel that he may not finish his term of office. There could be a death perhaps accidental that would keep him from finishing.
#116: August 21, 1998: A large hurrican will hit Fla. in SWept. 1998
OLDER PREDICTIONS:
#50 Prediction from a dream April 15, 1997: JonBenet Ramsey's killer is associated with a friend of hers, a child who is also a beauty queen, is a few years older than JonBenet, and also has long blond hair. At one time, the three were together on a sandy beach by the ocean. The killer is a man and has assaulted her friend, so there are at least two people, the child, and the man, who know.
#51: Prediction May 9, 1997: The End of the World
# 52: Prediction May 22, 1997: There will be a large earthquake (6.0) or better in California in June 1997.
# 53: Vision May 28, 1997: Sylvester Stalone will marry his girlfriend before she has the baby.
#54: Vision May 28, 1997: Dennis Rodman will make another movie this year.
# 55: Vision May 28, 1997: Lost World by Steven Speilberg will gross over 50 million the first week.
#56: Vision May 28, 1997: Steven Speilberg will make another movie similar to Lost World.
#57: June 13, 1997: Pamela Lee will RETURN to Bay Watch when she is begged by David Hasselhoff
#58: June 26, 1997: Prediction from a dream: LIFE ON MARS In a light dream state I saw the picture (an image) transmitted from a space probe on the surface of Mars which showed a small plant on the lower left side of frame. It was a small stub, with a short stalk and several greenish-brown,oval leaves. The leaves all came out of the top of the plant like a flower except that they were not spread out in a circular formation, but more 'tucked-in' like an umbrella bent backwards by the wind.
#59: July 29, 1997: Prediction from a dream: During August 1997, thre will be some killings in the free part of Cyprus. I had this "vision" in a dream form and also the crash of a military airplane somewhere in the Mediterranean.
#60: August 3, 1997: Prediction between dreaming and consciousness: I am a 39-year old man living in England. Several years agao, I saw my future life. This was not a dram state exactly, but between dreaming and consciousness. Everything I saw has so far come true. I have constant feelings of deja vu. My prediction is that in one years time, I will contact you via e-mail and tell you I have broken my own prediction. This may not make sense but it will if I contact you as I said.
#61: December 18, 1997: The world will end in fiery ball of hate on September 27, 2040.
#62: December 20, 1997: Through several dreams and premonitions, I feel that an eruption of the Hot Creek area of Long Valley or Mammoth Lakes is very near. I feel that the current ground activity will die out, only to resurace with much stronger activity, and finally an eruption setting off a chain of events unlike any in California's history. This even should take place between April and September of 1998.
#63: December 25, 1997: There is a lot of talk about the end of our kind coming to an end in 1998 because of the devils number coming with collision with gods (666 x 3). My huge gut feeling is that nothing that major will happen that soon. It's not the Gods that will end us, it's ourselves and it will be against the god's wishes. It's our violetn nature that will come in collision with its self, the gods have forgiven us before we can forgive ourselves. That has always been our way, even if we do not believe. I guess we will come to an end when the three numbers collide god (good), devil (evil), and man (balance). And that won't be for awhile.....Jennifer
#64: December 26, 1997: The midpoint of 1998, a great eruption/disturbance. A portion of the earth lay desolate.
#65: December 26, 1997: I had a very lucid dream a couple of months ago about the Jon Benet Ramsey murder case. I dreamed that I went to her house and her spirit guided me through the house. She told me her mommy and daddy killed her, and she took me through th events of that night.
#66: December 28, 1997: Prime Minister Netanayahu will not properly end his term. Either he will be outsted by a nonconfidence vote, will have to leave because of a scandal, etc. - Michael
#67: February 24, 1998: The San Francisco Giants will finally win a World Series and the Oakland Athletics will make a dramatic turnaround from their lackluster 1997 season.
#68: February 24, 1998: I predict that El Nino will reak more havoc in California, and over 100 may die as a result. Calming waters in June, but not earlier than that.
#69: February 24, 1998: In June of 1998, an airplane crash in John F. Kennedy Airport will occur.
#70: February 24, 1998: In Setember of 1998, the Pope will die.
#71: February 24, 1998: In July 1998, U.S. will attack Iraq.
#72: February 24, 1998: Al Gore will be the next President, but in October of 1998.
#73: February 24, 1998: Frank Sinatra will pass away in 1998.
#74: March 3, 1998: I predict the pope will die next February 12/13th.
#75: March 10, 1998: The world must come to a greater understanding before 2005 or great misfortune will befall our entire planet.
#76: March 10, 1998 - EARTHQUAKE in Barstow or Claremont, California. Time: 5:00 a.m. (the exact date was not given for this). The reasons are: Death of celebrity, high temperatures, high intolerance levels among people, unusual animal behavior, identical "vibe" with loved one, heavy water saturation in Southern California and unusual dreams about babies.
#77 - PERSONAL PREDICTION SENT IN: December 1, 1997: I have experienced dreams for several years. It is strange because I also have seen visions, but sometimes I do not know what they really are. I was coming down the highway during the early part of 1997 and I saw a light in the sky in the form of an Angel, I later testifified at my church about it. I dreamed that I was in front of a building (which was a prision). The inmate had a tommy hawk, which they chopped the whole fence down at one time. During that week, a guy was stabbed in his arm in which he almost lost it. (The death No: 769) came out that week. Several weeks ago, I dreamed about my dead grandmother, which has been dead for twenty years. It was plain as day, she was in her old house in the kitchedn before my grandfather remodeled it. She was fixing me a meal and I was about 8,9 or 10 years old. The death number came out that week and my birthday came out twice that month. The spirit is working with me in which to see light of a figure of one man sometimes and at other times I see three figures of light. I really don't understand, but I know someone or something is working for the good.
#78 - Sent in March 12, 1998: Within 4 yars, Tom Cruise will win an Oscar for Jerry Maguire, pt. 2
Jack Lemmon will be either a competitor or a co-star, who many will feel was more deserving.
#79 - Sent in March 27, 1998: China will become a democracy within 10 years.
#80 - Sent in March 27, 1998: Non-local brain wave detectors are being developed for use in military applications.
#81 - Sent in March 30, 1998: AIDS will be the end of mankind. (This was told to me by a spirit I was communicating with from the other side.)
#82 - Sent in April 2, 1998: More and more people will become aware of the prsences of Mother Mary, and her son. Mary will make herself know to many throughout your community. Children will be the first to recognize her, as well as women. Blessings awaiat those who ask.
Become aware of your soroundings, for what you see is not "what is really there". Step back and take a breath, for your clarity will be shown.
#83 - Sent in April 5, 1998: Upon reading Relevations in the Bible, I predict the end of the world is near. "Credit" will overtake money and those without good credit will be made to suffer. Bar codes or microchips inserted into humans skin will enable them to purchase goods (like scanning a bar code) but if one refuses they will ultimately suffer. Those who refuse and have pure hearts will inherit the kingdom of heaven. While the meed (week of will) will remain on (inherit) the earth.
#84 - Sent in April 5, 1998: Dream: I had a dream about a town I was in, didn't know anyone in my dream. but the days and nights had grown shorter to about 3 hrs day light and stores and shops were set on fire and the lands were also set on fire. Some people and I were living in a basement of a church along with a priest who was very scared to come out. I also saw 7 moons. All seven spreaded across the red sky form east to west. At the two ends were quarter moons and next were half moons and the next two were 3/4 moons, and one full red moon in the middle. All kinds of communications were shut off. I remember looking at a newspaper with a man on it holding up the peace sign, and the think the day or year was 05. That's all I saw was 05 so it could be a day or year 2005.
#85 - Sent in April 6, 1998: Sixth Sense: War in coming to the US in the form of a civil war. Many already in power know that it is coming and are preparing for it. The war or conflict will begin on or about Dec 31, 2000. Those waiting will destroy the warriors and use it to establish a new - larger and more controlling government within the US. It will then go about to remove the rights that have been enjoyed by this country for over 200 years. BEWARE!
#86 - Sent in April 9, 1988: Major earthquake, Alaska and Chile, within the next year.
#87 - Sent in Apirl 14, 1998: There will be a strong trend by Oct. Nov of 1998 in the fashion industry of more space aged clothing. Clothing which consists of shinny, metalic looking materials, even skimmper clothes, narrower shoes than the current trend. More red haired models, even less make-up on runway models. More plain materials, meaing less patterened. New material introduced, new blends unlike what we have seen before, lighter in weight. Polyester going out by then. Fashion sets trends to belief systems of population as a whole. Belief systems more to the universal instead of religious. Clothers more loose, less tight. Shows we are relaxing more. By end of year 1998, clothes even looser.
#88 - Dream Sent in May 8, 1998: a man was born in the desert in 1962 who wears a blue scarf. He will set up a kingdom on earth. He will establish peace thru out the world. But beware he will be like no other and will carry out disater in the end. Right now he lives amoung the Jews. Most of the world will do his bidding.
#89 - Prediction - May 8, 1998: I have been told the the summer and early spring of 1998 are the times of great change. They have said to watch the sky's and that people will see something that has always been there.
I have also been told the a big earth quake will happen in california in the winter of 1998-1999.
So that could be anywhere from nov 98 - march 99 if you look at it from where I live.
I get my imformation from people I see during meditation and people I see that others can't yet. It is only a matter of time then all the peoples will see. They need to use their crystals to meditate with.
I know this sounds crazy, But I have come to the end where either I am crazy or I am O.K. and I always like to look on the brite side of things so I say I am O.K. . But if I am crazy what fun Iam having everone should be crazy with me.
#90: Prediction sent in from same person May 18, 1998: In the first week of April 1998, I was in a dream state and in my dream I heard the clock radio come on and the anouncer was saying that the pope had died and that a mass of people were filling the streets in front of the Vatigian.
Then the dream changed and I was standing in a stone corridor it felt emptied and had a echo feeling to it there I saw a robed figuare standing in front of me it pointed out a window so I looked out and there was all these people screaming and having fits in the street. I asked what was going on outside and then it pointed down the hall so I walk a little ways and another figuare appeared .
The dream then change again and I was now standing outside in some sort of field and there was dead and bloodied sheep laying every where.
At this piont I woke up with a startled shake it seemed so real that I looked at the radio to see if it was still on. It was not. So Then I started calling everyone I knew to ask if the Pope had died . They were real shocked because out of about 15 or 16 of the people I asked there was 9 to 10 who had not the same dream but real close that it was scary.
The ones that had these dreams feel that it will happen sometime this year 1998 and with so many of us having these dreams it will be real soon.
The funny part in this whole thing is that none of us are catholic or christen, I don't even know if I spelled it right.
#91: Sent in May 23, 1998: Aliens from other worlds will come and visit us in the next 10-15 years. They won't do anything violent or dangerous, they are just curious and want to see how we are doing. Sort of like an anthropological visit. This came to me in a dream.
#92: Sent in May 23, 1998: Gore will be our next president. Clinton will be re-elected in the year 2004. Our economy remains very confident.
# 93: Sent in May 23, 1998: Academy Award Winner Robin Williams will be attacked nearly-fatally by a man with a knife sometime within the next 24 months. This man is somehow tied to the life of Robin Williams from the very early 1980s, and the attack is concerning drug use. While not fatal, this attack will considerably change Mr. Williams life and career. Mr. Williams will also divorce and never remarry.
#94: Sent in May 23, 1998: Jody Foster will reveal the father of her child, and the identity of the father will shock everybody. It is not clear to me at this time who the actual father is, but he is involved in the application of science and astronomy.
#95 Sent in June 5, 1998: Uprising in the East
A large uprising of people in a city orbiting Eastern Germany, young people, hysteria and jubilation... at the heart of the city a basin, at the base of the crowd a man ascends a ladder, overtaking a young woman climbing the same ladder.. the city is shaking and roaring like a great lion.. dream from May 30, 1998
#96: Sent in June 5, 1998: Charleston, South Carolina
Earthquake centered in Charleston, South Carolina, above 4.0, within next six months. Will destroy large portions of the city - damage more lethal than Hurricane Hugo. Read from newspaper in dream on night of June 2, 1998.
#97 (many subs under this) Predictions from from Same Person - Sent in June 7, 1998
Predictions via 'gut feelings' and dreams...
1)California will be rocked by various natural calamities, these will steadily increase until 2010 when it will be shaken to its foundations in its biggest quake yet. LA is a likely epicenter. It will cause chaos and many will dies as a result.
2)NASA and other world government agencies will announce that there IS life on Mars, they will even go
so far as admitting that it is COMPLEX life. It will also be revealed to us that the major political
powers have been aware of an alien presence. his will shatter the trust level of the general population.
3)More and more people will be flocking to "militia men" type existance. The fear of food shortages and
increased government control will instigate this.
4)The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints (I hope I spelled that right!) aka Mormonism, will grow
at astonishing rates over the next few years. It will be the primary American religion by 2010. Many
will convert becuase of the Mormon church's vast food stores, and their vocal opposition to the
government controls mentioned above.
5)It will be revealed that Princess Diana was murdered. This will happen within the year (it appeared to happen in a summer month). Dodi's father will uncover a 'mystery witness'and a high ranking UK polititian will 'spill the beans' when he is implicated in another scandal. Briton's will be outraged, and the Queen will step down,( have had this dream often, usually see dates ranging between 2002-2004) appointing Will as King. Will will have a short rein marked by scandal (of the female variety), and an unlikely Prince Harry will then take the crown.
Harry will be England's last king. Queen Mum will pass away in late fall '98. Expect another Charles scandal around the same time. I see him remarying, and being forced to abdicate(?) from his 'heir apparent' status as a result of public uproar!
6) There will be a major recall of vaccines used on children. A resulting inquiry will reveal that most vaccines are ineffective and actually harm children. Most vaccines will be outlawed by 2006 (pet vaccines will be used for another 10-12 years). It will be revealed that some of our most deadly viruses will have resulted from vaccine mishaps.
7) A female Chiropractic Doctor from Canada will be the new "Depak Chopra". She emerge to the forefront 2006-2007, and will radically change the way that people look at disease. This woman will have an unlikely background, but what she will say, will make sense to the masses. This will start a health trend that will mark
the 21st century.
8) A new and improved Russia will gradually reemerge in Europe. Expect Moscow to be a major world center.(sorry, no idea about a time period, I just keep seeing Moscow flashing on a map)
9) The Canadian Province of Quebec will make a motion the join the US within 10 years. The Maritime provinces will be 'cut off' by the US, and will be, in effect, forced to join the US. This will cause major
tension between the two countries. Ironically, Quebec will hate being a part of the United States because the US will reneg on their deal to let Quebec to remain french speaking. Montreal will break off and rejoin Canada. Many American Indians will immigrate to Canada durring this time period.
10) Expect another major space accident by April 2001.
#98: We are currently experiencing 'the clam before the storm' and a number of shattering but relatively small scale events will occur during the rest of this year. I do not see the end of the world anytime soon, just a change in consciousness.
#99: Prediction sent in June 8, 1998: My wiccan Friend had one of something big comming
but would not say for he only new there was going to be a huge event coming to the area we are in and it revolves around me The end result was somthing of a greater good that people will remember for a time.
stange but I wanted to share for your files.
#100 Prediction sent in June 9, 1998: Microsoft will eventually merge with IBM and the company is planning to release a new operating system in the next decade called "Microsoft Millenium". As for the case against
Microsoft's monopolistic practices, it will be dismissed in the future.
#101: June 10, 1998: FBI & GEO-THERMAL SATELLITE TECHNOLOGY
In 1999, the FBI will successfully use data from a geo-thermal satellite (that normally studies heat activity on the floor of the Chesapeake Bay) to put an end to a bizarre string of daylight robberies and child abductions occuring in a corridor between suburban Baltimore and Annapolis, Maryland. The perpetrator drives a small red lightweight pickup truck, with a washer, dryer, or washer/dryer in the back.
#102: June 10, 1998: I predict that the computer millenium bug will have a devestating effect on every person's life.
#103:August 3, 1998: Millions of animals will be departing from Planet Earth....
#104:August 3, 1998: This is my second submission and concerns an act of terrorism. Most of these premonitions come when I relax and let my mind wander. This premonition came 0n 31 July 98 and involves a terrorist act on a large scale, perhaps several city blocks in a large CA. city. As with many of these acts it will happen around the holiday season, perhaps as a sick memorial to the Pan Am bombing over Lockerby Scotland.
As always hope I am wrong. wisewood@aol.com
#105:In 1994 I was supernaturally called, along with many people worldwide, to pray each day during that year. The prayer was very specific and if written down would take about four typed pages, double-spaced. Although I was told to never reveal the specific contents of the prayer, on November 23, 1994, I was informed that at midnight, December 31, 1994, with the coming of the new year, the door for repentence FOR THE NATIONS would close and never open again (God never closes the door to personal repentence). The key to what would happen was the body of Christ on earth. If revival broke out among God's people anytime in 1994,
would interrupt His time clock for judgement outlined in the New Testament book of Revelation, delaying it for many years. In January 1995 I was told that a short period of peace and properity would follow and then sudden judgment would come upon the world, beginning with the fall of the United States from a world superpower to the stature of a Third World nation. With this fall would come sudden destruction for over a dozen major American cities and the deaths of over 65 million people. The church, not the world, has always been the reason for God's mercy and forebearance in modern times. This judgment will be preceded by the Rapture (by a few minutes)and will involve many mysteries associated with this event that have been hidden within the mind of almighty God - - happenings that will absolutely stun and amaze those raptured and those left behind. What follows, although written about in
the Bible, will turn reality upsidedown as the world knows it, leaving people no recourse but fear, confusion and madness. Many will commit suicide in mass forms of psychotic rage. Before the second revelation of Jesus Christ to the world,there will come such spiritual darkness that no human being can face life. Death will become a
friend and the only way out of spiritual and existential chaos, such as the world has ever knownor will ever know again. Deception will fall like torrents of rain upon the earth's inhabitants.As the rainbow became the symbol of God's peace with the world after the flood, so a new sign of certain judgment and an offer of redemption will appear in the heavens. The Third Millennium willbe ushered in with both a supernatural warning and a universal purging of evil from the earth. Pray that you will not have to go through the coming nightmare, when Satan introduces in an absolutely convincing manner his counterfeit of Christ and the true church. The invasion of Christ from supernatural space by way of the Incarnation will be copied by another invasion of a living reality 100 percent evil in nature but 100 percenet benign in appearance. He will come with many supernature powers. The darkness will be pure and unadulterate, just as the deception involved will be absolutely believable and convincing. God has given up on the nations.But he has not given up on you. Seek His face today, before it is too late and you are consumedby the spiritual darkness to come.
#106:August 5, 1998: Powerful earthquake on Aug. 11,12 or 13,1998. This came as a newspaper headline in a dream. The paper was dated Aug. 13 but it appeared as a non front page headline so I assume it is possible that it occured one or two days earlier. It is also possible that it was not front page due to the fact that it did not take place in United States and that it occured on the 12th. If I were to be precise, I would estimate that it would take place on the 13th. of Aug. 1998.
#107:August 5, 1998: JonBenet Ramsey murderer...With accurate co-ordinates which are composed of date, location approx.time I remote viewed the scene. The perp looked like a potter...someone that worked with glaze because it was on his trousers. He was about 5` 10" tall. He was strangling her and then hit her on the side of the head with his flashlight. After dragging her to the basement to a small room he left the way he came in...through the back double doors.
#108: August 7, 1998 As an acumulation of thoughts,ideas,intitution,etc.I have come to these conclusions:Clinton will serve 3and1/2 yrs into his 2nd term(predicted1981),Democrat will start WW3,The USA will loose its power as no 1.A bomb will go off by mistake and nuke an ally.August 1998 will be a devistating month for government.Communications will be in havoc in August98,it will cause something major to fail.
Very soon we will all wittness something that will change our lives as we know it.The sky will turn a glowing shade of orange and trees will be blown over like toothpicks!(nuke?)A dream in 1985.The water was poison,the sky was red-orange,there was no safe place to go.we tried the civil defence shelter and all there were was rat infested rations,and old dented cans with no labels.No water,is what I was panicing about.Now as this part is only a dream,I would like to point that out.But it seems so real....
...isis
#109:August 12, 1998: I don't receive my knowleadge in dreams or sight.It's something I just know deep down that its true no question.I can do this with seeing football,cars anysports who's going to win as soon as there on the field. Just kinow and I know its true .
1.The house will be democratic(congress.)
2.Susan M. will be found not guilty-over taking money,credit cards.
3.Starr will be found out that he pressured people to lie,inorder to get the president.
threatened Monica's mother and father.Monica has in the past stolen paper and signed someone else namer to it.
for a job for herself or someone closer forged someones name .and was caught.Hale was paid off.Starr did talk over grand jury testimony to selected people.
Starr will loss his ability to practice law for ethical violations.
4 Gore will be the next president.
5.Clinton will not resign or be forced out.Truth will come out and the Rep.will pay a big price.
6.Newt will be back in the news for money problems.
7 A new drug will come out for the treatment of aids maybe a cure in the next two years.
8 Another standoff between FBI and gun toting nuts.
9 A law will be passed holding parents responible for childrens actions-crimial.
10 A male Hollywood star will be attacked by a male he knows9knife.
11 Ireland will never see peace.
12. No doomsday,things will change earthwise.
13. Atlantis will be found-land will reappear.
14.Proof will be found that there was a trade route from the natives of Mexico
to the Romans long before Leif Ericson set foot on the new world.
Proof in Pompei
15 Newsweek will lose a law suit and fire someone -reporter over the Clinton matter.
16.In Ireland there is a castle.Castle L I just know L beginning end I don't know.That castle was built on top of a stone-In that stone is a peice of crystal from Atlantis-broken fragment.Castles built on top of it.
17 Weather will get really odd.But remember God is always with us in his hands we have nothing to fear. rgarcia@nb.net
#110:August 12, 1998: I just saw about our embassie's being bombed.They have the ones who did it.I have a strong feeling that someone knew something was wrong,didn't have enough time.They got them.not all.Their just looking for the edvince
They just need the proof...........rgarcia@nb.net.
#111:August 12, 1998: I let this one get buy a little. While starring at the computer screen on or about the 5th of August 98, I thought of California and a moderate earthquake came to mind 5.5 or there about. Well its a little late obviously, the quake happened today, but at the time of the original premonition I also got the impression that this was a precursor for a bigger one fairly soon. this would be a major quake 7.+ and I feel the U.S. or China could be the place. Perhaps the Aluetian Islands off the coast of Alaska.
by wisewood @aol.com
#112:August 15, 1998: JUST A PASSING THOUGHT WITH REGARDS TO THE PRESIDENT. I SEE HIM STICKING WITH HIS STORY CONCERNING HIS RELATIONSHIP WITH LEWINSKI BUT IF IT LOOKS LIKE A DUCK AND QUACKS LIKE A DUCK THEN IT'S A DUCK. WHEN THE TEST RESULTS ON THE DRESS COME BACK HE WILL HAVE TO ADMIT SOMETHING HAPPENED AND THIS COULD BE HIS DOWN FALL. I DONT'T FEEL HE WILL COMPLETE HIS TERM. POSSIBLY HEALTH OR ACCIDENTAL DEATH WILL END ALL QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS AFFAIR.
wisewood@aol.com
#113:August 17, 1998: I predict that the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics will revive itself by the year 2000.
#114:August 19, 1998: A GROUP IN SOUTHERN CALIF OR ARIZONA WILL CLAIM TO GODS CHOSEN AND START KILLING PEOPLE AND JUST BEFORE POLICE CLOSE IN ON THEM THEY ALL COMMIT SUICIDE.. i THINK THE GROUP IS RATHER LARGE, IN MY DREAM I SAW LOTS OF PEOPLE AND NEVER THE SAME FACE TWICE..... MAYBE JUST A WILD DREAM... YERRJ@SWBELL.NET
#115:August 21, 1998: Feb 1999 will put the clincher on what ever is to happen at the White house.The War will esclate,Will Clinton hand over his position to Gore?at this time,Looks that way but will be a major change in the U.S anyway in Feb 99.ifClinton has notleft the presidency. It will happen with Clinton having 6 more months to serve.
There will be a serious mistake made.France will be nuked by mistake(Paris)not sure when though.The worst day we will have will be Aug 10 -11 `1999....ww3will be in full progress.The biggest change in our lives will happen on that day.
July1999,around the 4 will be an earth problem of large scale,a disaster of some sort Cal quake,tsunami etc. Did Clinton begin this bombing strikes to get the heat off of himself?It will backfire!!!!isis13